Multicam Digital

Surveillance System
User’s Manual V8.8

UMV88-A
© 2019 GeoVision, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part,
without the written consent of GeoVision.

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is
accurate. GeoVision, Inc. makes no expressed or implied warranty of any kind
and assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. No liability is assumed
for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the information
or products contained herein. Features and specifications are subject to
change without notice.

GeoVision, Inc.
9F, No. 246, Sec. 1, Neihu Rd.,
Neihu District, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: +886-2-8797-8377
Fax: +886-2-8797-8335
http://www.geovision.com.tw

Trademarks used in this manual: GeoVision, the GeoVision logo and GV

series products are trademarks of GeoVision, Inc. Windows is the registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

February 2019
Full Manual for
GeoVision Surveillance System

Welcome to the Full Manual for V8.8 GeoVision Surveillance System.

Cards Supported
V8.8 GeoVision Surveillance System only supports the following GV video capture cards:

 GV-600(S) V3.20 and later

 GV-650(S) V3.30 and later
 GV-800(S) V3.30 and later
 GV-804A V3.10 and later
 GV-600A, GV-600B
 GV-650A, GV-650B
 GV-800A, GV-800B
 GV-900A
 GV-1120, GV-1120A, GV-1120B
 GV-1240, GV-1240A, GV-1240B
 GV-1480, GV-1480A, GV-1480B
 GV-3008
 GV-4008, GV-4008A
 GV-5016
 GV-SDI-204

Note that GV-600 (V4), GV-650 (V4) and GV-800 (V4) and GV-804 (V4) Cards are renamed to
GV-600A, GV-650A, GV-800A and GV-804A. These V4 and A Cards are the same video capture cards.

i
 Important Notes

GPU Decoding Specifications

Support for GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) decoding is added to lower the CPU loading and to
increase the total frame rate supported by a GV-System. GPU decoding only supports
the following software and hardware specifications:

For H.264 video compression,

On-board VGA: GPU decoding is only supported when using the following Intel chipsets:
nd
 2 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Sandy Bridge)
rd
 3 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Ivy Bridge)
th
 4 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Haswell / Haswell Refresh)
th
 6 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Skylake)
th
 7 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Kaby Lake)
th
 8 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Coffee Lake)

For H.265 video compression,

On-board VGA: GPU decoding is only supported when using the following Intel chipsets:
th
 6 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Skylake)
th
 7 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Kaby Lake)
th
 8 Generation Intel Core i3 / i5 / i7 Desktop Processors (Coffee Lake)

Note: You can install multiple external graphics cards, but it is required to connect a monitor to the
on-board VGA to activate H.264 / H.265 GPU decoding.

ii
Software Specifications
GPU decoding is only supported under the following operating system, resolution, and codec.
Ivy Bridge /
Kaby Lake /
Sandy Bridge Haswell / Haswell Skylake
Coffee Lake
Refresh / Skylake

Operating 32-Bit Windows 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2008 N/A

System 64-Bit Windows 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 R2 Windows 10

GV-System V8.5.0.0 or later V8.5.8.0 or later V8.7.0.0 or later V8.7.3.0 or later

1 MP / 2 MP / 3 MP /
1 MP / 2 MP / 3 MP /
Resolution 1 MP / 2 MP 4 MP / 5 MP / 8 MP /
4 MP / 5 MP
12 MP
Codec H.264 H.264 / H.265

Note:
1. Windows 8 and Server 2012 are only supported in GV-System V8.5.7.0 or later.
2. To apply GPU decoding, the recommended memory (RAM) requirements is 4 GB dual channels
for 64-bit OS and 3 GB for 32-bit OS.

Multi-Channel Playback Specifications

In V8.5 or later, multi-channel playback in ViewLog has been enhanced to improve the smoothness of
the video by producing higher frame rate. However, playing back multiple channels at high resolution
can increase the CPU loading especially if the GV-System is processing other tasks simultaneously. As
a result of the high CPU loading, dropped frames may sometimes occur in recorded video when
playing back multiple megapixel channels.

To avoid the problem, it is recommended to play back megapixel video in single view.

GDPR Practice
For details on how GeoVision Inc. is committed to helping users become GDPR (General Data
Protection Regulation) compliant, visit the GDPR Consent Request.

iii
Naming Definition
GeoVision Analog and Digital Video Recording Software. The GV-System
GV-System also refers to Multicam System, GV-DVR System, GV-NVR System and
GV-Hybrid DVR System at the same time.

iv
 Contents

Important Notes .................................................ii

Naming Definition ............................................. iv

1 Configuring Main System ............................. 4

1.1 Getting Started ....................................................................................................... 4

1.1.1 Main Screen ......................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Installing Cameras................................................................................ 7
1.1.3 Enabling the Recording ........................................................................ 8
1.1.4 Playing Back Video .............................................................................. 8
1.2 System Configuration ........................................................................................... 9
1.2.1 General Setting .................................................................................... 9
1.2.2 Setting Data Storage .......................................................................... 13
1.2.3 Adjusting Camera Configuration ........................................................ 16
1.2.4 Setting Day and Night Recording Mode............................................. 21
1.2.5 Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings ......................................................... 22
1.2.6 Customizing Startup Settings ............................................................. 24
1.2.7 Customizing Display Settings............................................................. 26
1.2.7 Customizing Display Settings............................................................. 26
1.2.8 Setting Auto Reboot ........................................................................... 28
1.2.9 Setting Text Overlay........................................................................... 29
1.3 Audio and Video Settings ................................................................................... 30
1.3.1 Setting Video Source and Resolution ................................................ 30
1.3.2 Fixing Aspect Ratio ............................................................................ 30
1.3.3 Adjusting Video Attributes .................................................................. 31
1.3.4 Adjusting Audio Setting ...................................................................... 34
1.3.5 Turbo Mode ........................................................................................ 35
1.4 Camera Monitoring .............................................................................................. 37
1.4.1 Snapshot ............................................................................................ 37
1.4.2 Associate Monitoring .......................................................................... 38
1.4.3 Daylight Saving Time Recording ........................................................ 39

v
 1.5 Account and Password ....................................................................................... 40
1.5.1 Creating an Account........................................................................... 40
1.5.2 Configuring Account Settings ............................................................. 40
1.5.3 Changing or Retrieving Password on Login....................................... 42
1.5.4 Preventing Unauthorized System Termination................................... 43
1.5.5 Setting a Startup Auto Login User...................................................... 44
1.6 System Idle Protection ........................................................................................ 45
1.7 System Log .......................................................................................................... 46
1.7.1 Viewing Event Logs............................................................................ 46
1.7.2 Setting Event Logs ............................................................................. 48
1.7.3 Searching Event Logs ........................................................................ 49
1.8 Recording Schedule ............................................................................................ 50
1.8.1 Video Schedule .................................................................................. 51
1.8.2 Special Days Schedule ...................................................................... 52
1.8.3 I/O Schedule....................................................................................... 52
1.8.4 Center V2 Schedule ........................................................................... 53
1.9 Schedule Center .................................................................................................. 54
1.9.1 Compacting Video Events .................................................................. 54
1.9.2 Merging Video Events ........................................................................ 57
1.9.3 Setting Backup Schedule ................................................................... 60
1.9.4 Setting VSM Schedule ....................................................................... 62
1.10 Alert Notification................................................................................................ 63
1.10.1 Setting Email Server......................................................................... 65
1.10.2 Setting Hotline Services ................................................................... 67
1.11 PTZ Control ........................................................................................................ 69
1.11.1 Mapping PTZ Cameras .................................................................... 71
1.11.2 Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels ................................................. 71
1.11.3 PTZ Idle Protection........................................................................... 72
1.11.4 PTZ Automation ............................................................................... 74
1.12 Digital PTZ Control ............................................................................................ 75
1.13 Pop-up Live Video ............................................................................................. 77
1.14 Video Noise Solutions....................................................................................... 78
1.14.1 Noise Tolerance ............................................................................... 78
1.14.2 Noise Detection to Reduce File Size................................................ 79
1.14.3 Noise Filter ....................................................................................... 80
1.15 Picture-in-Picture View...................................................................................... 81
1.16 Picture-and-Picture View .................................................................................. 82
1.17 Shortcuts ............................................................................................................ 83

vi
 1.18 Touch Screen Support ...................................................................................... 84
1.18.1 PTZ and I/O Control Panel ............................................................... 84
1.18.2 Touch Screen Panel......................................................................... 84
1.19 System Tools...................................................................................................... 86
1.19.1 Hard Disk Calculator ........................................................................ 86
1.19.2 Colorful Mode ................................................................................... 88
1.19.3 Stopping Video Lost Watchdog........................................................ 88
1.19.4 Deactivating Video Lost Beep .......................................................... 89
1.19.5 Fast Key Lockup............................................................................... 89
1.19.6 Fast Key Reference.......................................................................... 89
1.19.7 Network Failure Detection ................................................................ 90
1.19.8 Memory Limit.................................................................................... 91
1.19.9 Version Information .......................................................................... 91

2 Hybrid and NVR Solution ....................93

2.1 Dongle Requirement............................................................................................ 93

2.2 Hybrid Solution Description ............................................................................... 94
2.3 NVR Solution Description................................................................................... 94
2.4 IP Channel Setup ................................................................................................. 95
2.4.1 Adding Cameras Manually ................................................................. 96
2.4.2 Scanning Cameras............................................................................. 98
2.4.3 Automatic Setup ................................................................................. 98
2.4.4 Customizing IP Camera Settings ..................................................... 100
2.5 PTZ IP Camera ................................................................................................... 102
2.6 RTSP Connection .............................................................................................. 102
2.7 ONVIF & PSIA Connection ................................................................................ 104
2.7.1 ONVIF Connection ........................................................................... 104
2.7.2 PSIA Connection .............................................................................. 105
2.8 Camera Mapping Using GV-IP Device Utility .................................................. 106
2.9 Economic Mode ................................................................................................. 108
2.10 On Demand Display......................................................................................... 111

vii
 3 Video Analysis .......................................... 115

3.1 Object Tracking and Zooming .......................................................................... 115

3.1.1 Object Tracking ................................................................................ 115
3.1.2 Object Zooming ................................................................................ 122
3.2 Advanced Single Camera Tracking.................................................................. 125
3.3 Digital Object Tracking...................................................................................... 128
3.3.1 Setting Digital Object Tracking......................................................... 128
3.3.2 Tracking in PIP View ........................................................................ 130
3.3.3 Tracking in PAP View....................................................................... 131
3.4 Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm.............................................................. 132
3.4.1 Object Counting................................................................................ 133
3.4.2 Intrusion Alarm ................................................................................. 137
3.5 Object Index ....................................................................................................... 142
3.5.1 Setting Object Index ......................................................................... 142
3.5.2 Viewing Object Index........................................................................ 144
3.5.3 Searching Object Index .................................................................... 145
3.6 Automatic Video Snapshots ............................................................................. 147
3.6.1 Setting Video Snapshots .................................................................. 147
3.6.2 Searching Video Snapshots ............................................................. 148
3.7 Face Detection ................................................................................................... 150
3.8 Face Count ......................................................................................................... 152
3.8.1 Installing the Camera ....................................................................... 152
3.8.2 Setting Face Count........................................................................... 153
3.9 Unattended and Missing Object Detection ..................................................... 156
3.9.1 Detecting Unattended Objects ......................................................... 156
3.9.2 Detecting Missing Objects................................................................ 158
3.10 Privacy Mask Protection ................................................................................. 161
3.10.1 Setting a Privacy Mask................................................................... 161
3.10.2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas ........................ 162
3.11 Scene Change Detection................................................................................. 163
3.12 Panorama View ................................................................................................ 165
3.12.1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping Areas...................... 167
3.12.2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area ........................................... 168
3.12.3 Accessing a Panorama View ......................................................... 171
3.13 Video Defogging .............................................................................................. 172

viii
 3.14 Video Stabilization ........................................................................................... 173
3.15 Wide Angle Lens Dewarping .......................................................................... 174
3.16 Advanced Motion Detection ........................................................................... 175
3.17 Crowd Detection .............................................................................................. 177
3.18 Advanced Scene Change Detection .............................................................. 180
3.19 Advanced Unattended Object Detection ....................................................... 183
3.20 Advanced Missing Object Detection ............................................................. 186
3.21 Video Analysis Schedule ................................................................................ 189
3.21.1 Privacy Mask Schedule .................................................................. 191
3.22 Fisheye View .................................................................................................... 192
3.22.1 Setting Up a GV-Fisheye Camera.................................................. 193
3.22.2 Setting Up a Third-Party Fisheye Camera ..................................... 195
3.23 Specifications .................................................................................................. 199

4 Video Playback ........................................ 202

4.1 Playing Back on ViewLog ................................................................................. 203

4.1.1 Playback Screen Layout................................................................... 206
4.1.2 Playback Control Buttons ................................................................. 207
4.1.3 Recycling Option for Video Files ...................................................... 209
4.1.4 Bookmarking a Frame ...................................................................... 210
4.1.5 Searching a Video Event.................................................................. 212
4.1.6 Merging and Exporting Video ........................................................... 217
4.1.7 Extracting Frames from a Video Event ............................................ 224
4.1.8 Saving Images.................................................................................. 225
4.1.9 Printing Images ................................................................................ 226
4.1.10 Setting Face Mask.......................................................................... 227
4.1.11 Displaying GPS Data...................................................................... 228
4.1.12 Adjusting Distorted Views............................................................... 229
4.1.13 Object Tracking in Fisheye View.................................................... 230
4.1.14 Event Search Limitation ................................................................. 232
4.1.15 Advanced Settings ......................................................................... 233
4.2 Object Search..................................................................................................... 240
4.3 Advanced Log Browser .................................................................................... 243
4.3.1 Filter Settings ................................................................................... 245

ix
 4.4 Quick Search...................................................................................................... 247
4.4.1 Event Query Settings ....................................................................... 249
4.4.2 Advanced Search Settings ............................................................... 250
4.5 Address Book .................................................................................................... 251
4.5.1 Creating a Host Account .................................................................. 251
4.5.2 Creating a Group.............................................................................. 252
4.5.3 Creating a Folder Link ........................................................................ 22
4.5.4 Connecting from Address Book ....................................................... 253
4.5.5 Importing and Exporting the Address Book...................................... 253
4.6 Remote ViewLog Service .................................................................................. 254
4.6.1 Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host ....................................... 254
4.6.2 Retrieving Images of Object Index ................................................... 255
4.6.3 Resuming Backup ............................................................................ 256
4.7 Single Player ...................................................................................................... 257
4.7.1 Single Player Window ...................................................................... 257
4.8 GPS Tracks Playback ........................................................................................ 259
4.9 Touch Screen Support ...................................................................................... 261
4.10 Fast Key Reference ......................................................................................... 262
4.11 Specifications................................................................................................... 262

5 Backup, Deletion and Repair ................... 264

5.1 Backing Up Log Data......................................................................................... 264

5.2 Backing Up Recorded Files .............................................................................. 265
5.3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple Discs ..................................................... 268
5.3.1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Files ......................................... 268
5.3.2 Including the Player in the Backup Files .......................................... 269
5.4 Deleting Recorded Files.................................................................................... 270
5.5 Repairing Damaged File Paths ......................................................................... 272
5.6 Repairing Damaged Video Files ....................................................................... 272

x
6 I/O Applications ........................................ 276

6.1 I/O Device Setup ................................................................................................ 277

6.1.1 Latch Trigger .................................................................................... 279
6.1.2 Keeping Last Toggle Status ............................................................. 281
6.2 I/O Control Panel................................................................................................ 282
6.3 Advanced I/O Applications ............................................................................... 283
6.3.1 Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trigger............................................. 283
6.3.2 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input Trigger ........ 285
6.3.3 Setting Momentary and Maintained Modes...................................... 286
6.3.4 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input Trigger ............... 286
6.3.5 Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger ................. 287
6.4 Input State Detection ......................................................................................... 288
6.5 I/O Enable Setting .............................................................................................. 289
6.6 Advanced I/O Panel ........................................................................................... 290
6.6.1 The Advanced I/O Panel .................................................................. 290
6.6.2 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers ........................................... 291
6.6.3 Configuring the Advanced I/O Panel................................................ 294
6.6.4 Setting Up Mode Schedule............................................................... 295
6.6.5 Quick Link......................................................................................... 297
6.6.6 Forcing Output.................................................................................. 297
6.6.7 Editing Background Image ............................................................... 298
6.6.8 System-Wide Triggers...................................................................... 298
6.6.9 The “Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam” Option ................ 299
6.6.10 Managing a Group of I/O Devices .................................................. 300
6.7 Visual Automation ............................................................................................. 301
6.8 Virtual I/O Control .............................................................................................. 302
6.8.1 Setting a I/O Module......................................................................... 303

xi
 7 Point-Of-Sale (POS) Application ............... 305

7.1 POS Device Setup.............................................................................................. 306

7.2 POS Data Overlay .............................................................................................. 308
7.3 POS Field Filter .................................................................................................. 309
7.4 Abnormal Transaction Alerts............................................................................ 311
7.4.1 Setting Alarm Frequency.................................................................. 312
7.5 Codepage Mapping............................................................................................ 313
7.6 POS Data Search ............................................................................................... 314
7.7 POS Live View .................................................................................................... 315
7.7.1 The POS Live View Window ............................................................ 315
7.7.2 Setting Live View.............................................................................. 316
7.8 POS Color Text................................................................................................... 317
7.8.1 Setting POS Color Text .................................................................... 318

8 Remote Viewing ....................................... 322

8.1 Remote Viewing Using a Web Browser........................................................... 323

8.2 WebCam Server Settings .................................................................................. 326
8.2.1 General Settings............................................................................... 326
8.2.2 Server Settings ................................................................................. 327
8.2.3 Video Settings .................................................................................. 328
8.2.4 SDK Settings .................................................................................... 329
8.2.5 Audio Settings .................................................................................. 330
8.2.6 JPG Settings .................................................................................... 331
8.2.7 3GPP Settings .................................................................................. 332
8.2.8 Mobile Settings ................................................................................. 333
8.2.9 Multicast Settings ............................................................................. 334
8.2.10 P2P Setting .................................................................................... 335
8.2.11 UPnP Settings ................................................................................ 336
8.2.12 FTP Server Settings ....................................................................... 337
8.2.13 Network Port Information................................................................ 338
8.3 Single View Viewer........................................................................................ 339

xii
 8.3.1 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream.................................. 341
8.3.2 Control Panel.................................................................................... 342
8.3.3 Configuring Single View Options...................................................... 343
8.3.4 PTZ Control ...................................................................................... 347
8.3.5 Visual PTZ Control Panel ................................................................. 348
8.3.6 I/O Control ........................................................................................ 348
8.3.7 Visual Automation ............................................................................ 349
8.3.8 Picture-in-Picture View ..................................................................... 350
8.3.9 Picture-and-Picture View.................................................................. 350
8.4 2-Window Viewer ............................................................................................... 351
8.5 Multi-Window Viewer......................................................................................... 351
8.6 Multi View Viewer............................................................................................... 352
8.6.1 Installation of Multi View................................................................... 352
8.6.2 Channel Status Information.............................................................. 355
8.6.3 Host List............................................................................................ 356
8.6.4 Creation of a Host ............................................................................ 357
8.6.5 Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host ............................ 358
8.6.6 Video Recording............................................................................... 360
8.6.7 Camera Polling ................................................................................. 360
8.6.8 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream.................................. 360
8.6.9 PTZ Control ...................................................................................... 361
8.6.10 Visual PTZ Control Panel ............................................................... 361
8.6.11 Output Control ................................................................................ 362
8.6.12 Remote ViewLog ............................................................................ 362
8.6.13 System Configuration ..................................................................... 363
8.6.14 Camera Status ............................................................................... 364
8.6.15 Host Information ............................................................................. 365
8.6.16 Icon Image Change ........................................................................ 366
8.7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast ........................................................................ 367
8.7.1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings ................................. 367
8.7.2 Sending Audio Broadcast................................................................. 369
8.7.3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast........................................ 370
8.8 JPEG Image Viewer ........................................................................................... 372
8.9 Remote Playback ............................................................................................... 373
8.10 Remote ViewLog.............................................................................................. 374
8.11 Event List Query .............................................................................................. 375
8.12 Download Center ............................................................................................. 376
8.13 Mobile Phone Applications............................................................................. 377

xiii
 9 E-Map Application..................................... 381

9.1 The E-Map Editor ............................................................................................... 381

9.1.1 The E-Map Editor Window ............................................................... 382
9.2 Creating an E-Map File ...................................................................................... 383
9.3 Starting E-Map.................................................................................................... 387
9.3.1 Setting the Pop-up Map.................................................................... 388
9.4 Remotely Accessing E-Map.............................................................................. 389
9.4.1 The Remote E-Map Window ............................................................ 389
9.4.2 Accessing E-Maps of Multiple Hosts................................................ 391
9.4.3 Configuring the Remote E-Map........................................................ 392
9.4.4 Viewing Event List and Playing Back Video..................................... 393
9.5 E-Map Server...................................................................................................... 394
9.5.1 Installing E-Map Server .................................................................... 394
9.5.2 The E-Map Server Window .............................................................. 394
9.5.3 Setting E-Map Server ....................................................................... 395
9.5.4 Remote Monitoring via E-Map Server .............................................. 395
9.5.5 Accessing Authentication Server Account Information .................... 395

10 Short Message Service............................. 397

 
10.1 Installing SMS Server ...................................................................................... 397
10.2 The SMS Server Window ................................................................................ 398
10.3 SMS Server Setup............................................................................................ 399
10.3.1 Device Settings .............................................................................. 399
10.3.2 Server Settings ............................................................................... 400
10.3.3 Account Settings ............................................................................ 403
10.4 SMS Log ........................................................................................................... 405
10.4.1 Setting SMS Log ............................................................................ 405
10.4.2 Viewing SMS Log ........................................................................... 406
10.5 Password Security........................................................................................... 408
10.6 SMS Notification .............................................................................................. 408

xiv
 10.6.1 Connecting GV-System to SMS Server ......................................... 408
10.6.2 Setting Mobile Numbers ................................................................. 410
10.6.3 Setting Alert Notification ................................................................. 411

11 Useful Utilities .......................................... 415

11.1 Dynamic DNS ................................................................................................... 415

11.1.1 Installing Dynamic DNS.................................................................. 416
11.1.2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS .......................................... 416
11.1.3 Starting Dynamic DNS ................................................................... 417
11.1.4 Local DDNS Server ........................................................................ 418
11.2 Watermark Viewer ............................................................................................ 419
11.2.1 Activating Watermark Protection .................................................... 419
11.2.2 Running the Watermark Proof........................................................ 419
11.2.3 The Watermark Proof Window ....................................................... 420
11.3 Multi-view Display............................................................................................ 421
11.4 Windows Lockup ............................................................................................. 423
11.4.1 The GV-Desktop Screen ................................................................ 423
11.4.2 GV-Desktop Features..................................................................... 423
11.4.3 Token File for Save Mode .............................................................. 427
11.5 Authentication Server ..................................................................................... 428
11.5.1 Installing the Server........................................................................ 428
11.5.2 The Server Window........................................................................ 429
11.5.3 Creating a Client DVR .................................................................... 430
11.5.4 Creating a User Account ................................................................ 431
11.5.5 Importing Groups and Users from Active Directory ....................... 434
11.5.6 Starting the Server ......................................................................... 438
11.5.7 Connecting GV-System to the Server ............................................ 440
11.5.8 Remote Access from Control Center, Remote E-Map and MultiView
..................................................................................................................... 443
11.6 Fast Backup and Restore................................................................................ 446
11.6.1 Installing the FBR Program ............................................................ 446
11.6.2 Customizing Logo and Button ........................................................ 447
11.6.3 Customizing the Features .............................................................. 448
11.6.4 Backing up and Restoring Settings ................................................ 449

xv
 11.7 Hot-Swap Recording ....................................................................................... 451
11.7.1 The Media Man Tool Window......................................................... 451
11.7.2 Viewing Disk Drive Status .............................................................. 452
11.7.3 Adding a Disk Drive........................................................................ 453
11.7.4 Removing a Disk Drive................................................................... 454
11.7.5 Logging In Automatically at Startup ............................................... 455
11.7.6 Setting LED Panel .......................................................................... 456
11.8 Backup Server.................................................................................................. 458
11.8.1 Adding a Disk Volume .................................................................... 458
11.8.2 Enabling Backup Server................................................................. 460
11.8.3 Advanced Settings ......................................................................... 461
11.8.4 Manually Adding Files for Backup.................................................. 463
11.8.5 Viewing Server Status .................................................................... 463
11.8.6 Retrieving Recorded Files .............................................................. 465
11.8.7 Viewing Backup Status................................................................... 466
11.9 Backup Viewer ................................................................................................. 467
11.9.1 Usage Requirements...................................................................... 467
11.9.2 Starting Backup Viewer .................................................................. 468
11.9.3 Performing Queries ........................................................................ 468
11.9.4 Viewing the Event Files .................................................................. 469
11.9.5 Using Remote ViewLog.................................................................. 469
11.10 Bandwidth Control Application .................................................................... 470
11.10.1 Installing the Bandwidth Control................................................... 471
11.10.2 Allowing Remote Control at DVR ................................................. 472
11.10.3 Connecting to a WebCam Server ................................................ 472
11.10.4 Controlling a WebCam Server ..................................................... 473
11.10.5 Bandwidth Setup .......................................................................... 474
11.10.6 Block List Setup............................................................................ 475
11.10.7 General Setup .............................................................................. 476
11.11 Report Generator ........................................................................................... 477
11.11.1 Starting Report Generator ............................................................ 477
11.11.2 Setting Report Generator ............................................................. 478
11.11.3 Setting Report Criteria.................................................................. 480
11.11.4 E-Mail Attachment Settings .......................................................... 483
11.11.5 Playing Back Video Recordings ................................................... 484
11.11.6 Viewing Event Log........................................................................ 485
11.12 Spot Monitor Controller................................................................................. 486
11.12.1 Spot Monitor Controller ................................................................ 486

xvi
 11.12.2 Spot Monitor Panel....................................................................... 489
11.13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller ...................................................................... 490
11.13.1 Setting the Controller.................................................................... 490
11.13.2 Setting Pop-up Views ................................................................... 493
11.13.3 Displaying TV Quad Panel ........................................................... 494
11.14 Digital Matrix .................................................................................................. 495
11.14.1 Activating Multiple Monitors ......................................................... 496
11.14.2 Setting Live View.......................................................................... 497
11.14.3 Setting Scanned Pages................................................................ 498
11.14.4 Setting Pop-up Alert ..................................................................... 499
11.14.5 Setting Live View with Pop-up Alert ............................................. 501
11.14.6 Controlling Screen Display........................................................... 502
11.15 GIS Recording ................................................................................................ 503
11.15.1 Setting the GPS Receiver ............................................................ 503
11.15.2 Recording GPS Locations of GV-System .................................... 504
11.15.3 Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device ................................. 505
11.15.4 Viewing GPS Locations during Playback ..................................... 506
11.15.5 Sending GPS Data to the GV-GIS ............................................... 508
11.16 GV-IP Device Utility........................................................................................ 511
11.16.1 Installing GV-IP Device Utility ...................................................... 511
11.16.2 The GV-IP Device Utility Window................................................. 512
11.16.3 Setting GV-IP Devices.................................................................. 513
11.16.4 Setting GV-POE Switch................................................................ 514
11.16.5 Mapping IP Cameras.................................................................... 515
11.17 MCamCtrl Utility for GV-Joystick V2 ............................................................ 516
11.17.1 Installing MCamCtrl Utility ............................................................ 516
11.17.2 Starting the MCamCtrl Utility........................................................ 517
11.18 GV-Mobile Server ........................................................................................... 518
11.19 Language Setting........................................................................................... 519
11.19.1 MultiLang Tool for Translated Text .............................................. 519
11.19.2 SetLanguage Tool to Set UI Language........................................ 523

Appendix .............................................................. 537

A. USB Dongle Required for IP Device Applications ........................................... 537
B. Supported PTZ Protocols and Models.............................................................. 538
C. Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking ........................................................ 540
D. Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan and Tilt Control ....................... 541

xvii
 E. Supported IP Device Brands and Protocols..................................................... 542
F. Supported GPRS Models .................................................................................... 543
G. Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View ....................................................... 544
H. Display Ratio Supported by Panel Resolution................................................. 545

xviii
Chapter 1

Configuring Main System................................4

1.1 Getting Started ..................................................................................... 4
1.1.1 Main Screen....................................................................................................... 5
1.1.2 Installing Cameras .......................................................................................... 7
1.1.3 Enabling the Recording ................................................................................. 8
1.1.4 Playing Back Video ......................................................................................... 8

1.2 System Configuration ......................................................................... 9

1.2.1 General Setting ................................................................................................ 9
1.2.2 Setting Data Storage.................................................................................... 13
1.2.3 Adjusting Camera Configuration .............................................................. 16
1.2.4 Setting Day and Night Recording Mode................................................. 21
1.2.5 Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings................................................................. 22
1.2.6 Customizing Startup Settings ................................................................... 24
1.2.7 Customizing Display Settings ................................................................... 26
1.2.7 Customizing Display Settings ................................................................... 26
1.2.8 Setting Auto Reboot ..................................................................................... 28
1.2.9 Setting Text Overlay..................................................................................... 29

1.3 Audio and Video Settings ................................................................ 30

1.3.1 Setting Video Source and Resolution..................................................... 30
1.3.2 Fixing Aspect Ratio ...................................................................................... 30
1.3.3 Adjusting Video Attributes......................................................................... 31
1.3.4 Adjusting Audio Setting............................................................................... 34
1.3.5 Turbo Mode ...................................................................................................... 35

1.4 Camera Monitoring ............................................................................ 37

1.4.1 Snapshot........................................................................................................... 37
1.4.2 Associate Monitoring ................................................................................... 38
1.4.3 Daylight Saving Time Recording .............................................................. 39

1.5 Account and Password ..................................................................... 40

1.5.1 Creating an Account..................................................................................... 40
1.5.2 Configuring Account Settings ................................................................... 40
1.5.3 Changing or Retrieving Password on Login.......................................... 42
1.5.4 Preventing Unauthorized System Termination ................................... 43
1.5.5 Setting a Startup Auto Login User .......................................................... 44

1
 1.6 System Idle Protection..................................................................... 45

1.7 System Log........................................................................................... 46

1.7.1 Viewing Event Logs ...................................................................................... 46
1.7.2 Setting Event Logs ........................................................................................ 48
1.7.3 Searching Event Logs .................................................................................. 49

1.8 Recording Schedule........................................................................... 50

1.8.1 Video Schedule .............................................................................................. 51
1.8.2 Special Days Schedule ................................................................................ 52
1.8.3 I/O Schedule .................................................................................................... 52
1.8.4 Center V2 Schedule ...................................................................................... 53

1.9 Schedule Center ................................................................................. 54

1.9.1 Compacting Video Events .......................................................................... 54
1.9.2 Merging Video Events .................................................................................. 57
1.9.3 Setting Backup Schedule ........................................................................... 60
1.9.4 Setting VSM Schedule ................................................................................. 62

1.10 Alert Notification ............................................................................. 63

1.10.1 Setting Email Server .................................................................................. 65
1.10.2 Setting Hotline Services .......................................................................... 67

1.11 PTZ Control ........................................................................................ 69

1.11.1 Mapping PTZ Cameras .............................................................................. 71
1.11.2 Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels ..................................................... 71
1.11.3 PTZ Idle Protection .................................................................................... 72
1.11.4 PTZ Automation ........................................................................................... 74

1.12 Digital PTZ Control .......................................................................... 75

1.13 Pop-up Live Video ............................................................................ 77

1.14 Video Noise Solutions .................................................................... 78

1.14.1 Noise Tolerance........................................................................................... 78
1.14.2 Noise Detection to Reduce File Size .................................................... 79
1.14.3 Noise Filter.................................................................................................... 80

1.15 Picture-in-Picture View .................................................................. 81

1.16 Picture-and-Picture View .............................................................. 82

1.17 Shortcuts ............................................................................................ 83

2
1.18 Touch Screen Support.................................................................... 84
1.18.1 PTZ and I/O Control Panel ........................................................................ 84
1.18.2 Touch Screen Panel ................................................................................... 84

1.19 System Tools ..................................................................................... 86

1.19.1 Hard Disk Calculator.................................................................................. 86
1.19.2 Colorful Mode ............................................................................................... 88
1.19.3 Stopping Video Lost Watchdog .............................................................. 88
1.19.4 Deactivating Video Lost Beep ................................................................ 89
1.19.5 Fast Key Lockup .......................................................................................... 89
1.19.6 Fast Key Reference .................................................................................... 89
1.19.7 Network Failure Detection ...................................................................... 90
1.19.8 Memory Limit................................................................................................ 91
1.19.9 Version Information.................................................................................... 91

3
 1
CHAPTER

Configuring Main System

1.1 Getting Started

When you run GV-System for the first time, the system will prompt you for a Supervisor ID and
Password.

Figure 1-1
1. Type the desired ID, Password and a Hint to remind you of the password.

2. Optionally click E-Mail List to enter e-mail addresses used to receive the password when
forgotten.

3. Click OK to enter the main screen. You can also select the following options:

 Auto Login: Allows auto login as the current user every time when the system is launched.
Allow removing password System: It is recommended to select this option allowing
removal of the password database once you forget passwords. For details, see the same
option in Account and Password later in this chapter.

 : Click to open the onscreen keyboard and enter the login information.

4
 1 Configuring Main System

1.1.1 Main Screen

1 2

3
4

6
7
8
9

10

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Figure 1-2

The controls in the main screen:

No. Name Description
Indicates the camera number matching the port number in the GV video
1 Camera Number
capture card.

2 Camera Name Indicates the given camera name.

3 Date/Time Displays the current date and time.

4 Storage Space Indicates the remaining disk space.

5 Connection Indicates the connection status of remote applications.

6 PTZ Control Displays the PTZ control panel.

7 I/O Control Displays the I/O control panel.

8 TV-Out Displays the TV Quad control panel.
9 User-Defined Accesses other applications.
10 Location Name Indicates the GV-System’s name, usually named by its geographical location.

11 Network Enables the connection to remote applications.

12 Camera Scan Rotates through the screen divisions.

5
 Brings up these options: Video/Audio Log, System Log, Search POS Data,
13 ViewLog
POS Live View, Live Object Index, Search Object Index and E-Map.

14 Configure Accesses System settings.

15 Schedule Set up recording schedule.

16 Monitor Starts monitoring.

17 Camera Select Select the desired camera number for main division view.

18 Screen Division Select screen divisions.

Brings up these options: Login/Change User, Logout, Minimize, Restart

19 Exit
Multicam and Exit.

6
 1 Configuring Main System

1.1.2 Installing Cameras

To set up cameras on the GV-System, click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System
Configure and click Camera Install.

 If you are connecting to an IP camera, select IP Camera Install and refer to IP Channel Setup in
Chapter 2 for detailed instructions.

 For analog cameras, no further configuration is required after physically installing the cameras.
To disable a connected camera, select Camera Install. In the dialog box, clear the checkmarks
of the channels you want to disable and click OK.

Figure 1-3

7
1.1.3 Enabling the Recording

To start recording, press [F7] on the keyboard, or click the Monitor button (No. 16, Figure 1-2) and
select a camera. By default, every camera records with the following settings:

Default Recording Settings

Recording Mode Motion Detection
Resolution 320 x 240
Codec Geo Mpeg4

When working with the system, you will undoubtedly want to change the settings as you go along. The
buttons on the main screen provide quick access to several popular Main System settings. Click any
button to see the menus of these settings.

 To change recording mode, see Rec. Control in Adjusting Camera Configuration later in this
chapter.

 To change resolution, first you need to set up video source and resolution of your system (see
Setting Video Source and Resolution later in this chapter) and then define the resolution of each
camera (see Recording Resolution in Adjusting Camera Configuration later in this chapter.)

 To change codec, see Code Settings in Adjusting Camera Configuration later in this chapter.

1.1.4 Playing Back Video

You can instantly play back the recorded video without interrupting the monitoring and recording.

 To instantly play back the events of one single channel, click on the Camera Name (No. 2, Figure
1-2), and select the time length.

 To instantly play back the events of all channels, click on the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2),
select Instant Play, and select the time length.

Time length choices include 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute and 5 minutes.

Note: For details on the ViewLog player, see Video Playback in Chapter 4.

8
 1 Configuring Main System

1.2 System Configuration

This section introduces system configurations of the GV-System.

1.2.1 General Setting

Changes made on the General Setting dialog box apply to all available cameras attached to the
system. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and click General
Setting to access the following dialog box.

Figure 1-4

[Location Name] The given name (maximum 14 characters) is displayed in main screen as the name
of the server.

[Caption] Display camera ID and name on the upper left-hand corner of the camera screen. You may
choose No for no caption; ID to show only camera ID; ID+Name to show both camera ID + Name.

[Monitor Option] Select Start Delay to start recording after x second(s) when the system is activated.

[Camera Scan] When rotating through screen divisions, GV-System will switch to the next screen
division after the time specified in the drop-down list elapses.

[Exit Option] Select to close or restart Windows OS after exiting GV-System.

9
 [Display]
 Enable DirectDraw Scale: Applies DirectDraw Scale to enhance image quality if your VGA card
supports it. For certain VGA cards, DirectDraw Scale can result in blurred images. To avoid the
image problem and remain DirectDraw Scale, change the image quality from High to Standard.
See Image Quality of DirectDraw Scale in System Tools later in this chapter.
 Enable De-interlace Render: Avoids interlace of the odd and even video lines. This feature
affects only single view mode with the resolution of 640 x 480 and 704 x 480. After enabling the
feature, you must restart the GV-System to apply it.

Note: The Enable Directdraw Scale and De-interlace Render features can greatly enhance image
quality. If your VGA card supports DirectX9, enable both settings.

Tip: To check the version of your DirectX, search for the file name dxdiag. Open the file and find the
related information.

[Video Record]
 Max Video Clip: Specifies the maximum time length of each recorded file (from 1 to 5 minutes),
i.e. If you select 5 Min, a 30-minute event will be chopped into six 5-minute event files.
 Post-Rec: Keeps on recording for a set period of time after an event stops.
 Pre-Rec: Records video for a set period of time before an event starts or an input device is
triggered. This feature allows you to choose RAM or HDD as a pre-recording buffer. The
difference between the two is that RAM can save smaller pre-record from 1 second to 1.5 minutes,
while the hard disk can save larger one from 1 minute to 45 minutes.

Note: The Pre-recording using RAM is not supported by GV-SDI/3008/4008/5016 video capture
card.

10
 1 Configuring Main System

Figure 1-5

[Pre-Record Performance] The amount of physical memory of the computer that the system is
running on determines the pre-recording performance. Some options are grayed out if the computer
does not have enough memory for the selections.

This table shows the maximum pre-recording frame rate and the physical memory requirements of
each setup:
Good Better Best Extra
Max pre-recording frames per camera (fps) 15 fps 30 fps 60 fps 90 fps
RAM required 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 768 MB

Note: The recording frame rate is based on a 320x240 recording size.

[Pre-Record Option (per camera)] Determines the number of pre-record frames.

 Total Frames: Specify the maximum pre-recording frames of the system.
 Frame/Sec Limitation: Specify the maximum pre-recording frame rate (fps) of a camera.
Dividing the Total Frames by Frames/Sec Limitation, you will get the pre-recording duration of each
camera. For example:
Total Frames 30
Pre-recording duration = = = 5 seconds
Frame/Sec Limitation 6

11
 [Pre-Recording using HDD] Use the hard disk as a pre-recording buffer, which gives you much
longer pre-recording time.

Keep Pre-Record Files: Specify the number of video clips for pre-record. The maximum number of
video clips you can specify is 9, and the time range of one video clip is from 1 minute to 5 minutes. So
the pre-recording time can be from 1 minute to 45 minutes.

 Use Digital Watermark Protection: Click to watermark all recorded videos. Watermark is a way
to verify the authenticity of video streams, and to ensure that they have not been tampered with or
modified in any way. For details, see Watermark Viewer in Chapter 11.

[Video Log Storage] Select storage type (recycle or not recycle) and location. See Setting Data
Storage later in this chapter.

12
 1 Configuring Main System

1.2.2 Setting Data Storage

You can change storage locations of recorded files and event database files. You can also enable or
disable the recycle function for recorded files.

Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select General
Setting. In the General Setting dialog box, you can see the storage information in the middle as
illustrated below.

Figure 1-6

 Available: Indicates the remaining hard disk space.

 Recycle Log: Indicates the recording date of the next video file to be deleted.

 Recycle: When this option is selected, the oldest files will be deleted when the system requires
storage space for new files. If it is not selected, the system will stop recording when disk space is
full.

 Right-Arrow button: Select the Enlarge Recycle Threshold option and specify the recycle
threshold. Recycle threshold is the file size at which the recycling begins. The limit of the
recycle threshold is 99999 MB.

By default, the system has the following default settings.

Default Data Storage Settings

Storage Location Recorded Files :\GV folder\<camxx or audxx folder>.

Event Database Files :\GV folder\<camxx or audxx database file>

Recycle Function Enabled

13
 Setting the Event Database Location
The Event Database consists of the video and audio .db files that are used for the Video Event List. By
default they are saved at the C:\GV folder. Follow the steps below to change the storage location.

1. Click the Set Location button (Figure 1-6) and select Database Folder.

2. Click the Select Files button to specify a new storage path.

Setting the Video Storage Location

You can create the maximum of 24 storage groups with different storage locations, keep days and
recycle sizes to store video files.

1. Click the Set Location button and select Storage Group Folder. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-7

2. Click the Add Storage Group icon to add a storage group. The first storage group is
created by default.

3. Select the cameras to be contained in the new storage group. Note one camera can only be
added to one storage group.

4. Select the Keep Days option and specify the number of days to keep the video files in storage.

5. Click the Add New Path icon to specify the storage location in a hard drive which is not
used for other storage groups.

6. Click OK.

14
 1 Configuring Main System

Note:

1. If the designated storage space is not big enough to keep all video files for the defined days, the
Recycle setting then overrides the Keep Days setting.

2. The default recycle threshold is 32 GB.

You can select Enlarge Recycle Threshold to adjust the threshold. The minimum recycle
threshold is 1200 MB. Depending on the number of cameras connected, the minimum recycle
threshold will increase by 50 MB for each connected camera. Whenever the recycle threshold is
reached, 400 MB of the oldest files will be deleted.

15
1.2.3 Adjusting Camera Configuration

In the Camera Configure dialog box, you can adjust the configurations for each camera. Click the
Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and click Camera Configure to
access the following dialog box.

Figure 1-8

[Camera Name] The name entered here will appear in the upper-left hand corner of the camera
screen. You can use the drop-down list to select the camera to be configured.
[Rec. Control] The Rec. Control section allows you to set each camera’s recording mode and frame
rate. For analog cameras, you can also adjust the recording quality and resolution here.

Figure 1-9
 Rec Video: Enable the recording function. Use the drop-down list to select the desired recording
mode: Motion Detect, Round-the-Clock or Day/Night.

16
 1 Configuring Main System

 Right-Arrow button: Click to set up the recording frame rate, quality, resolution, codec or
Day-Night recording mode for the selected camera.
 Day-Night Rec Mode Setup: This option is only available when Day-Night Recording Mode is
selected, allowing you to set up different recording modes during different time frames of the
day. For details on Day/Night mode, see Setting Day-Night Recording Mode later in this
chapter.
 Rec. Frame Rate Setting: Allows you to set the maximum recording frame so as to save
storage space. For IP cameras, refer to Economic Mode in Chapter 2 for more details. For
analog cameras, the following 4 options are available.
- Max. recording frame rate of Non-Motion or Non-I/O Trigger: This option provides a
space-saving solution for recording. Set the maximum frame rate for non-motion or non-I/O
trigger periods so as to save as much storage space as possible.
- Max. Frame Rate Rec of Motion: Set the maximum frame rate on motion detection. For
example, if you set 10 Frames/sec in the field, the maximum frame this camera will record is
10 frames/second. This setting does not mean it always records at 10 frames/second because
the actual recording frame rate is also affected by other settings in the system and CPU
loading.
- Max. recording frame rate of I/O Trigger: Set the maximum frame rate during I/O trigger.
- Priority: Set Motion First or I/O First as the priority for video recording when both motion
detection and I/O trigger occur at the same time. If you select Motion First, the frame rate
setting of motion detection will override the frame rate setting of I/O trigger. If you select I/O
First, the frame rate setting of I/O trigger will override that of motion detection.
 Recording Quality: Allows you to adjust the video quality of analog cameras in 5 levels. The
camera’s recording quality is based on its resolution and compression rate. Higher-quality
picture means lower compression rate and requires more storage space. This option is only
available for analog cameras.
 Recording Resolution: This option is only available after you change the default video
resolution (see Setting Video Source and Resolution later in this chapter). Click to select
recording resolutions. This option is only available for analog cameras.
 Codec Settings: Select the type of recording compression for your video. This option is only
available for analog cameras.
Geo Mpeg4: It supports a number of advanced settings that allow experienced users to adjust
the encoding process. For details, see Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings later in this chapter.
Geo H264: Provides a much smaller compressed file size than other available codec without
compromising the image quality.

17
 Apply Advanced Codec Setting: Enable Apply Advanced Codec Setting and click the
button. To use standard codec in recording, select Standard Format in the General tab and
the standard format of the selected recording codec will be applied. See Geo Mpeg4
Advanced Settings later in this chapter.

The Advanced Codec Setup button also includes the function of noise detection. See Noise
Detection to Reduce File Size later in this chapter.

Note: To set the recording quality and codec of IP cameras, refer to IP Channel Setup in Chapter 2.

[Motion Detection]

Apply to all cameras Adjust Sensitivity (Level 1-10)

Activate Noise Tolerance &

Motion Detection Associated Group
Clear mask
Set mask color Cut mask
Add mask

Figure 1-10

 Sensitivity: There are 10 levels of sensitivity for motion detection. The default value is set to 9.
The higher the value, the more sensitive the system is to the motion. Click the Arrow button to
access the two options below:
 Noise Tolerance: This function reduces false alarms and unwanted recordings caused by
weather or light changes without changing video quality. The level of noise tolerance can be
adjusted. For details, see Video Noise Solutions later in this chapter.
 Motion Detection Associated Group: Refer to Associated Monitoring later in this chapter for
more details.
 Mask Filter: Mask instructs the system to ignore movement within the masked area. Mask could
be applied to repetitive motion that should be ignored within the surveillance area, such as street
trees.

Figure 1-11

18
 1 Configuring Main System

 Invoke Alarm: Sends computer alarm (.wav sound file) on motion detection.
 Invoke to Send Alerts: Sends an assigned alert (E-Mail/Hotline/SMS) when motion occurs. Use
the drop-down list to specify the motion duration to trigger the alert. The choices include High (0.5
seconds), Normal (1 second), and Low (1.5 seconds). For example, if you choose High, the alert
will be sent out when motion is detected for over 0.5 seconds.
To configure e-mail alerts, see E-Mail Notification later in this chapter; to configure hotline alerts,
see Hotline Notification later in this chapter; to configure SMS alerts, see Short Message Service
in Chapter 10.
 Right-Arrow button: Sets the time to delay the activation of the assigned alerts
(E-Mail/Hotline/SMS).
 Output Module: Triggers the specified output module on motion detection. Use the drop-down
lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function. To configure the output
device, see I/O Device Setup in Chapter 6.
 Right-Arrow button: Sets the time to delay the activation of the specified output module.
 Register Motion Event: Records motion events to System Log.

Note: The Delay Time in Invoke to Send Alerts and Output Module allow you time to turn off the
input device before the system triggers alerts or the output device. The Delay Time will not work if
you stop monitoring or enable the function “Deactivate notification when selected pin ON" in I/O
Application window (Figure 6-7).

[Video Lost / Connection Lost]

Minimum Duration Setup

Figure 1-12

 Output Module: Triggers the specified output module upon video lost or connection lost. Use the
drop-down lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function. To configure
the output device, see I/O Device Setup in Chapter 6.
 Right-Arrow button: Sets the counting time between 3 and 9999 seconds for the activation
of output module. If you set 30, the output module will be triggered when the video lost or
connection lost lasts for 30 seconds.

19
 Figure 1-13

[Camera Lens] Select Wide Angle to correct warping toward the edge of the camera image. See
Wide Angle Lens Dewarping in Chapter 3 for details.
[Video Attributes] Allows you to adjust video characteristics such as brightness, contrast, saturation,
and hue.
[Advanced] Allows you to access the control panel of GV-IP cameras to adjust advanced video
attributes such as white balance and shutter speed. Different image settings are available on different
GV-IP camera models.

20
 1 Configuring Main System

1.2.4 Setting Day and Night Recording Mode

Day-Night Recording allows you to set up different recording modes for different time frames of the
day. Each day can be divided into 4 time frames, each represented by 1 span. You can set up a
different frame rate, recording quality, motion sensitivity and noise detection level for each time frame.

1. Click the Day-Night Recording Mode button in Figure 1-9, and this dialog box appears.

Figure 1-14

2. Enable Span1 and specify the Start time in the first time field; select the check box in the second
time field and specify the End time.

3. Use the drop-down list to select Motion Detect or Round-the-Clock to be the recording mode
for the Span 1.

4. Select the check box and click the […] button to adjust recording quality, motion sensitivity and
noise detection level for Span 1.

5. Repeat above steps to set up multiple spans if required.

6. If you want to start monitoring all day on the weekend, select Weekend Apply and select
recording mode to be applied. And define whether your weekend includes Sunday and Saturday
or Sunday only.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

Note: If the End time field is not enabled, the time span will continue to the start of the next span.

21
1.2.5 Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings

The Geo Mpeg4 codec supports a number of advanced settings that allow experienced users to adjust
the encoding process.

In Figure 1-9, check the Apply Advanced Codec Setting option, click the button beside, and
then click the Advanced tab. This window appears.

Figure 1-15

[Setting]
 Setting: Click the drop-down list to select High speed, Recommend, or High compression rate
for default configurations. Or, select User-defined to define encoding settings yourself.
 Subpixel precision: Click the drop-down list to select Full, Half or Quarter pixel.
Full pixel: Fastest compression speed, medium compression rate, and normal image quality.
Half pixel: Fast compression speed, high compression rate, and better image quality.
Quarter pixel: Slow compression speed, highest compression rate, and better image quality.
 Quantizer: Raising the value will improve compression speed and dramatically increase
compression rate, but reduce image quality.
 Inter-frame threshold: Raising the value will improve compression speed and rate, but reduce
image quality slightly.

22
 1 Configuring Main System

 Max. key frame interval: Raising the value will extend the duration between key frames and
increase compression rate, but reduce image quality slightly. Compression speed remains the
same.
[Evaluation]
 Encode size: Click to calculate the encoding size based on your encoding settings (see [Setting]
above) and assigned video clip (select PTZ dome or street from the drop-down list). Click the
Stop tab to stop the evaluation.
 Encode speed: Click to calculate the frame rate based on the encoding settings (see [Setting]
above) and assigned video clip (select PTZ dome or street from the drop-down list).

23
1.2.6 Customizing Startup Settings

The Startup dialog box allows you to set the system to enable selected features at system startup. To
access the Startup dialog box, click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System
Configure and click Startup.

Figure 1-16

[General]
 Auto Monitoring: Select one of the following monitor control modes at system startup:
 Monitor All: Allows you to monitor all cameras and I/O (if available) at system startup. It is the
same as to manually click Monitor button (No. 16, Figure 1-2) and select Start All Monitoring.
(For details, see Camera Monitoring later in this chapter).
 Schedule Monitor: Allows you to monitor cameras by schedule. Alternatively you may click
Schedule button (No. 15, Figure 1-2) and select Schedule Start. Refer to Recording
Schedule later in this chapter.
 I/O Monitor: Allows you to monitor all I/O devices. Alternatively you may click the Monitor
button (No. 16, Figure 1-2), and then select I/O Monitoring.
 Camera Monitor: Enables all cameras for monitoring.

Note: To set different recording modes and alert methods for each camera, see Rec. Control in
Adjusting Camera Configuration later in this chapter.

24
 1 Configuring Main System

 Limit Port: Limits the number of video ports to be used. This option helps increase the frame rate
of each channel by shifting the frame rate of disabled video ports to enabled ones. This function
will take effect at next system startup.
 Startup Auto Login: Select and press the Arrow button to assign an ID used at system auto
startup. After the setup, the system will automatically login using this ID at next startup, without
asking for ID and Password.
 Startup and Hide into System Tray: GV-System appears in the system tray when you launch
Windows instead of displaying the system login window.

[Network] Automatically enables connection to the following applications upon startup: WebCam
Server, Center V2, VSM (Vital Sign Monitor), Control Center Server, Backup Server.

25
1.2.7 Customizing Display Settings

You can customize the display settings in the Display section of the Startup dialog box. Click the
Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure and click Startup.

Figure 1-17

 Default Screen Division: Select the number of screen division to display at startup.
 Panel Resolution:
 From the drop-down list, select the resolution that best fits your computer monitor screen. For
the monitor display ratio supported by each panel resolution, see Appendix H.
 Click the Arrow button and select Activate Quad Enhanced to enable the enhanced screen
layout for the 8, 12 and 16 screen divisions. The layout 1 is the default layout; the layout 2 is
the enhanced layout.

Figure 1-18

26
 1 Configuring Main System

Note:
1. When the enhanced screen layout is applied, camera 1 view will be displayed in the central
screen. When the popup feature is enabled, the pop-up view will show on the central. When the
camera scan feature is enabled, the scanned view will show on the central.
2. The enhanced screen layout cannot be applied when DSP card is in use.
3. The enhanced screen layout will be applied at next startup.

 Mini-View for Remote Desktop: Squeezes all video channels into a single 320x240 view. Since
you may use Microsoft Remote Desktop (a feature that comes with Windows 7 Professional
Edition) to set up the Main System through network, it is important to get smallest size possible
data to transfer over network.

After Mini-View for Remote Desktop is selected, restart the Main System and you can now switch
between the mini and normal view by clicking the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), pointing
to A/V Setting and selecting Mini-View Switch.

Figure 1-19 Mini View

 Show E-Map: Displays the setup E-Map Viewer window (Figure 9-5) at system startup.

27
1.2.8 Setting Auto Reboot

The Auto Reboot feature restarts GV-System and Windows at a scheduled time. Click the Configure
button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Auto Reboot Setup.

Figure 1-20

[Auto Reboot System] Enables the automatic reboot of the GV-System and Windows.
 Day Interval: Specifies the frequency of auto reboot (from 1 to 14 days). After the Day Interval is
modified, the new day interval will start counting from the last reboot date instead of the day when
the change is applied, unless you restart the GV-System.
 Reboot Time: Specifies the reboot time.
 Restore Last Status: The system will resume the last operation after rebooting, e.g. camera
recording.
 Apply Startup Settings: The system will apply your Startup settings in System Configure
section after rebooting.
[Delay for Cancel Reboot] When the item is checked, a warning message will appear and count
down for the specified seconds before the reboot schedule begins. Clicking the Cancel button on the
prompt will cancel the rebooting.
[Watchdog Reset if Reboot System Suspend and Fail] Prior to the Reboot Time, if GV-System finds
any abnormal Windows operation that may hinder the Auto Reboot, GV-System will instruct a hard
reboot on the computer. The feature is not available in GV-250 Card and GV-NVR System.

Note: GV-System must already be added to Windows Startup menu; only so will the Windows
automatically restart GV-System after a reboot. Also, make sure you’ve correctly connected a GV
video capture card to your motherboard for the hardware watchdog feature.

28
 1 Configuring Main System

1.2.9 Setting Text Overlay

You can align the camera name, time stamp and triggered input name to different positions for each
channel.

Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Text Overlay
Setting to display the Text Overlay Setting dialog box, and select one Camera to be defined.

Figure 1-21

[Camera/Time/IO Alarm Text]

 Print on video file: Displays camera ID, location name, date and time on the recorded video.
Note that the text overlay is not supported when standard format codec is enabled.

 Print on screen (Only for IO alarm): Displays the name of a triggered input device on the
camera screen. For this function to work, it is required to map a camera to an input device, see
Overlaying Input Device Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger in Chapter 6.

Note: Up to 5 input names can be stamped on each channel when inputs are triggered.

 Alignment: Select how you want the camera information to be aligned on a camera screen.

[Set Font] Click the Set Font button to set up the font. The option Apply Stereo Font makes texts
stand out from the background by giving white-edge to the texts.

29
1.3 Audio and Video Settings

1.3.1 Setting Video Source and Resolution

To select a video standard used in your country, NTSC or PAL, click the Configure button (No.14,
Figure 1-2), select A/V Setting, and select Video Source. You can also consider your priority in image
quality or CPU usage and select a desired video resolution. The better image quality, the higher the
CPU usage.

Figure 1-22
To change the resolution of individual analog cameras, refer to Recording Resolution in Adjusting
Camera Configuration earlier in this chapter.

1.3.2 Fixing Aspect Ratio

You can define the aspect ratio of camera channels so they will not be stretched when viewed in wide
screen resolutions such as 1280 x 800, 1440 x 900, 1680 x 1050 and 1920 x 1080.

Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select A/V Setting, and select Wide Display Setup.
The following dialog box appears. Select Fit to automatically fit the video ratio into the camera channel.
Or, fix the aspect ratio of the camera channel to 3:2 / 4:3 / 5:4.

Figure 1-23
For Digital Matrix, see Chapter 11 Useful Utilities.

30
 1 Configuring Main System

1.3.3 Adjusting Video Attributes

This feature lets you adjust video attributes to get the best picture. Click the Configure button (No.14,
Figure 1-2), point to A/V Setting, and select Video Attributes to choose between Standard and
Advanced.

Users of GV-Combo A Card (GV-1016/GV-1120A/1240A/1480A), GV-600A, GV-650A and GV-800A

can also select Default Value to change the default video attributes to Vivid or Standard. The Vivid
option produces more saturated and colorful video images, while the Standard option produces
brighter and less saturated video images. You must click the Default button in Standard Video
Attributes or Advanced Video Attributes to apply the selected default values.

Note: The Video Attributes feature is only available for analog cameras.

Standard Video Attributes

Adjust image quality by moving the sliders to the desired values. Click Default to apply default values.
Click the left and right arrow buttons to select a desired camera for setup. Or, click the finger button
to apply the displayed settings to all cameras.

Figure 1-24

AGC (Auto Gain Control): This option is only available on GV-600A, GV-650A and GV-800A.
Adjusting AGC boosts weak video signals or reduces strong video signals, and optimizes image quality.
The adjustment could be done manually or automatically. When a video signal is weak, for example,
due to distance, adjusting the brightness or contrast of the video source will not help the situation.
Adjust AGC and see the difference.

31
 In the Auto Gain Control window, click Auto for auto adjustment, click Default to apply default values,
or click Apply to apply the displayed settings. The default value is set to 1.15V (115), but you may
move the slider to adjust between 0.3V (30) or 2.5V (250).

Advanced Video Attributes

With the advanced settings, you can see the difference in image size or bitrate after you adjust image
quality and codec.

[Multicam]
This feature helps you to see the difference in image size after you adjust video attributes, codec and
recording quality. Your selection here will be applied to the selected camera.

Figure 1-25
 Camera drop-down list: Select a camera channel for the application.

 Codec Selection: Select a desired type of compression.

 Image Adjustment (Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Hue): Move the sliders to adjust image
attributes. Click the finger button to apply the selected values to all cameras.

 Recording Quality: Move the slider to increase or decrease the picture quality. Click the finger
button to apply the selected quality to all cameras.

 Image Size: Keyframe indicates the compressed file size while Frame shows the partly
compressed file size after quality and image adjustment.

Note: The smaller image size means higher video compression and smaller file size, thus
extending the recording capacity.

32
 1 Configuring Main System

[WebCam, Center V2, Control Center]

You can configure the image quality for video streaming to the WebCam server, Center V2 and Control
Center. Your quality settings for Low, Normal and Best will be applied to these remote applications.

Figure 1-26

 Quantizer: The bigger the Quantizer, the poor the image quality.

 Quality: The default Quantizer for Best is 2, for Normal is 4 and for Low is 8.

 Bits per second: Indicates the data transmission speed after quality adjustment.

 Codec Selection: The codec selection is for your reference only to know the bitrate. The
selection will not be applied to video streaming to the remote applications.

33
1.3.4 Adjusting Audio Setting

To adjust audio settings, click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select A/V Setting, and select
Audio Settings to bring up the following dialog box:

Figure 1-27
[Audio]
 Audio: Select an audio channel to be configured. Clicking the finger button to apply the settings
to the rest of channels.
 Gain Control: Increases or decreases the gain of the microphone.
 Wave Out: Enable live view audio. Select Wave Out De-Noise to reduce audio noise.
 Rec Audio: Activates the audio recording.
 By Sensitivity: Audio recording is activated when the volume reaches the sensitivity level
indicated.
 Round-the-Clock: Continuously records audio.

[Other]
 Show Audio Indicator: Displays an audio volume indicator in the top-left corner of the camera
view.
 Disable Wave Out Auto-Switch: By default, channel 1 is set to be background sounds even
when you switch between video channels. To change background sounds, select the desired
channel and select Disable Wave-Out Audio Switch. The selected audio channel will always be
in the background.

[Audio Format] Select an audio format. The default is 16kHz, 16 bit. If you are using GV video
capture cards, select 32kHz, 16 bit for better audio quality.

34
 1 Configuring Main System

1.3.5 Turbo Mode

Turbo mode allows recording at the highest speed that GV-Combo A Card (GV-1120A, GV-1240A and
GV-1480A) can provide at the VGA and D1 resolutions.

Comparison for GV-Combo Card and GV-Combo A Card

Total Recording Rate (NTSC/PAL)

GV-1480 GV-1480A GV-1240 GV-1240A GV-1120 GV-1120A

VGA 120 / 100 fps 240 / 200 fps 120 / 100 fps 120 / 100 fps 80 / 70 fps 80 / 72 fps
D1 120 / 100 fps 240 / 200 fps 120 / 100 fps 120 /100 fps 80 / 70 fps 80 / 72 fps
Turbo VGA 416 / 400 fps 240 / 200 fps 120 / 100 fps
Turbo D1 352 / 320 fps 240 / 200 fps 120 / 100 fps

Note: When Turbo Mode is activated, the DSP (Real-Time Display) and TV-Out functions will be
disabled.

System Requirements
Following is the basic system requirements to activate the turbo mode.

Video Capture
CPU RAM Graphics Card HDD
Card

Pentium 4, 3.0 GHz,

GV-1120A x 1 120 GB
Dual Core

GV-1240A x 1 Core 2 Duo, 3.0 GHz 160 GB

AGP or
GV-1480A x 1 Core 2 Quad, 2.4 GHz PCI-Express, 320 GB
2 x 1 GB Dual minimum 800 x 600
Channels (1280 x 1024
GV-1120A x 2 Core 2 Quad, 2.4 GHz recommended), 250 GB
32-bit color

GV-1240A x 2 Core 2 Quad, 2.8 GHz 320 GB

GV-1480A x 2 Core i7-920, 2.66 GHz 750 GB

35
 Activating Turbo Mode
1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select A/V Setting and select Video Source.
This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-28

2. Use the drop-down list to select the Video Resolution. If D1 or VGA resolution is selected, the
Turbo mode option appears.

3. Select Turbo mode, and click OK.

4. You will be prompted to restart GV-System. Restart the GV-System to take effect.

36
 1 Configuring Main System

1.4 Camera Monitoring

Click the Monitor button and select to start or stop all or individual camera monitoring. Camera Name
in the upper left corner of the view screen changes from yellow to red color when motion is detected.
(Blinking represents that motion is detected in the camera view). [F7] is the shortcut key of this
operation.

1.4.1 Snapshot

To take a snapshot of the current frame, click the Camera Name and select SnapShot to open the
Save As dialog box, shown as below. You can select to watermark or de-interlace the snapshot, as
well as tagging the frame with Host name, Camera name, Time and Date. Select Transparent Text if
you want to make the tag background transparent, and select Set Font to choose your text font.

Click to display host name

Click to display date
Click to de-interlace
Transparent text background

Set font for overlaid text

Click to watermark the snapshot Click to display camera name

Click to display time

Figure 1-29

37
1.4.2 Associate Monitoring

You can set camera channels to start recording when any of the associated camera channels begins
recording.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Camera
Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-30

2. From the Rec. Video drop-down list, select either Motion Detect or Day-Night. If you select
Day-Night, remember to click the Arrow button beside to configure the time spans and also set
the recording mode to be Motion Detect.

3. Click the Arrow button on the right of Sensitivity, and select Motion Detection Associated
Group. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-31
4. Select the camera channels you wish to be associated with the current camera. In this example,
Camera 1 is being configured and it cannot be selected, so it is grayed out. Cameras 2 and 3 are
selected to be associated with Camera 1.

5. Click OK to apply the settings. In this example, whenever Camera 2 or 3 starts recording, Camera
1 will also begin recording.

38
 1 Configuring Main System

1.4.3 Daylight Saving Time Recording

GV-System can automatically adjust to Daylight Saving Time (DST). If you are in a time zone that uses
DST, make sure DST is enabled. In Windows’ Control Panel, go to Date and Time, click Change
Time Zone, and make sure Automatically adjust clock for Daylight Saving Time is selected.

Figure 1-32

In System Log, the DST recordings can be identified in the D.S.T Rollback column.

Figure 1-33
In ViewLog, a separate DST subfolder will be displayed in the Date Tree.

Figure 1-34

Note: The AVI file recorded during the DST period is named with the prefix “GvDST”, e.g.
GvDST20081022xxxxxxxxx.avi, to differentiate from the regular AVI file named with the prefix
“Event”, e.g. Event20081022xxxxxxxxx.avi.

39
1.5 Account and Password
The password setup allows you to assign permission and rights to accounts. You can create up to
1,000 passwords. Only Supervisor-level account is pre-set with access to password settings. Click the
Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Password Setup, and select
Local Account Edit to start.

1.5.1 Creating an Account

To create a new account, click the New button at the lower-left hand corner of the Password Setup
dialog box. You can create three types of accounts: Supervisor, Power User and User.

 Supervisors have permissions over all system settings.

 Power Users have the same permissions as Supervisors, except that they cannot edit user
accounts and delete the password system (described later).

 Users are restricted from all system settings and have limited access to certain functions.

If you want to enable the guest account, click Guest and deselect the Disabled Account option.
Guests will only be allowed to watch live view.

1.5.2 Configuring Account Settings

You may find these options to the right of the account list depending on the authorization level.

Figure 1-35

40
 1 Configuring Main System

 Expire in xx day(s): The account will expire and be disabled automatically after a set number of
days. Specify the number between 1 and 9999. The number you set will count down automatically.
 User cannot change password: The user is not allowed to change the set password.
 Force Password change at the first logon: The user must change the password when logging
in first time.
 Disable user if do not login after xx day (s): When the user does not log in the system after a
set number of days, its account will be disabled automatically.
 Export this ID for IR Remote Control: Allows you to log into the system by using the
GV-Keyboard instead of using the general keyboard and mouse. For details see GV-Keyboard
User’s Manual.
 Send Password by Email: Allows you to retrieve passwords through e-mails. To specify e-mails,
click the […] button. For details on this feature, see Retrieving Password Through E-mail later in
this chapter.

 Login this ID automatically (Single User Mode): GV-System will automatically log into this
account after you click Login at startup.

At the bottom of the page are global settings, which are applied to all accounts.

Figure 1-36

 Allow removing password System: Enables the password removal utility. The option is critical if
you forget or unable to retrieve any Supervisor password in the future. With this option selected,
you can run the password removal utility PassUNINStall.exe from the GV folder and remove the
password database. Otherwise, you can only remove the password database by reinstalling
Windows operating system.

 Enable double password: When selected, after clicking ViewLog, you will need to type the
passwords of any two supervisors to continue. At least 2 supervisor accounts are required.

 Make ID and passwords case-sensitive: Select to make all ID and passwords case-sensitive.

41
 Note:
The loss of passwords can be solved in the following two ways:
1. Retrieving password through e-mails.
2. Removing password database by using the PassUNINStall.exe utility and rebuilding all
accounts.
However, if both Send Password by Email and Allow Removing Password System options are
not selected in advance, it is required to reinstall Windows operating system once you loss the
passwords.

1.5.3 Changing or Retrieving Password on Login

You can change or retrieve passwords of GV-System through e-mail upon login.

Changing Password
1. In the Login dialog box, click Change Password. The Change Password dialog box appears.

2. Type the new password information, and click OK to save the changes.

Note: Only Supervisors can change the password.

Retrieving Password through E-mail

The password retrieval works in the following ways after you click Send Password in the Login dialog
box.

 If you are a supervisor but do not remember your ID, separate passwords will be sent to all
supervisor e-mail accounts after you click the Send Password button.

 If you remember your ID but forgot your password, enter your ID and click Send Password. The
password will be sent to your e-mail account.

42
 1 Configuring Main System

1.5.4 Preventing Unauthorized System Termination

1. To restrict a non-supervisor account from exiting or restarting the system, click the Configure
button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Password Setup, and select Local
Account Edit. The Password Setup dialog box appears.

2. Select a user from the user list to display its properties.

3. Select the Multicam tab at the bottom, and clear Exit System to restrict the user from quitting or
restarting the system.

Figure 1-37

43
1.5.5 Setting a Startup Auto Login User

The Startup Auto Login User is typically a user account with limited access rights. After system is
started, the GV-System will automatically log in with the Startup Auto Login User instead of showing
the Login dialog box.

1. Create an account you want to use for Startup Auto Login. Refer to Creating an Account earlier in
this section for instructions.

2. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Startup.

3. In the Startup dialog box, enable Startup Auto Login, and click the Arrow button beside. The
Startup Auto Login Setup dialog box appears.

4. Type ID and Password to set up a user for auto login, and click OK.

Figure 1-38

44
 1 Configuring Main System

1.6 System Idle Protection

The System Idle Protection automatically log off and/or start monitoring after the GV-System is idle for
a set period of time.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select System
Idle Protection Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-39

1. To automatically log out or switch to Startup Auto Login User, select Auto Logout or Switch to
Startup Login User if available and select the type of account to log out from the drop-down list.

If you have set up a Startup Auto Login User, GV-System will switch to the Startup Login User
instead of logging out. For details, see Setting a Startup Auto Login User earlier in this chapter.

2. To automatically start monitoring, select Auto Monitoring, and use the drop-down list to select
Monitoring All, Schedule Monitoring, I/O Monitoring or Camera Monitoring. When Monitoring
All is selected, both I/O Monitoring and Camera Monitoring will be enabled.

 Select Auto Network Service of Startup Setting to enable network connections to the
applications predefined in Startup. See Customizing Startup Settings earlier in this chapter.

3. In the System Idle Over field, type an idle time between 10 and 14400 seconds.

4. Click OK.

Note: The feature can monitor keystrokes, mouse clicks and actions from IR Remote Control and
GV-Keyboard.

45
1.7 System Log
System Log provides historical information that can help you track down events, system problems and
POS and object counting data. To view the System Log, click the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2),
and select System Log from the menu. This brings up the Live Log Browser as shown below.

1.7.1 Viewing Event Logs

The Live Log Browser provides five types of event logs. Use the control tabs to switch among them.

[Monitor] Shows events related to camera connection and motion. Double-clicking an event will allow
you to view the related video (if available) in ViewLog.

Figure 1-40

[System] Shows system startup/exit, network server start/stop, and monitoring start/stop.

Figure 1-41

46
 1 Configuring Main System

[Login] Shows whom and when has logged in and out of GV-System, WebCam server and a Control
Center account.

Figure 1-42

[Counter] This function shows the information and results of GV-System’s counter function.

Figure 1-43

[POS] This function shows the POS event information. Double-clicking on the log list will allow you to
view related video in ViewLog or Quick Search (depending on the video player you selected in the
System Log Setting dialog box. See Figure 1-45).

Figure 1-44

47
1.7.2 Setting Event Logs

In System Log Setting, you can specify which event log to be recorded, the interval time to write the log
into the system, video player, and the number of days to keep the logs. Click the Configure button
(No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure and select System Log Setting to display the following
dialog box.

Figure 1-45

 General Event: Registers system startup/exit, network server start/stop, and recording start/stop.
 Login/Logout Event: Registers the login/logout activities of the local user to GV-System and
WebCam Server.
 Monitor Event: Registers motion-triggered and I/O-triggered events. For this feature to work, you
must enable the Register Motion Event option in Figure 1-11 or the Register Input Event option
in Figure 6-7 in Chapter 6.
 POS Event: Registers POS transaction data.
 Counter Event: Registers counting results.
 Interval of Motion Event: Specifies the log interval between motion-triggered events. This setting
could prevent the System Log from becoming too large in a motion-intensive environment.
 Interval of Input Event: Specifies the log interval between I/O-triggered events.

48
 1 Configuring Main System

[Default Video Player]

 Monitor Table: Specifies the playback software for monitor events. For details on each playback
application, see Chapter 5.
 POS Table: Specifies the playback software for POS events.

[Import Previous Days of Live Log Browser] Specifies how many days of data to be loaded into the
System Log.
 Keep Days: Set the number of days to keep logs.
 Recycle: Enable the system to delete old log files to make space for new files when the space of
assigned Log Path is below 500 MB.
 Log Path: Click the … button to specify a storage path. The default log path is:
:\GV folder\database. The available free space of the storage path will be displayed below.

1.7.3 Searching Event Logs

To search for log data, click the icon on the upper left corner of the Live Log Browser to bring up
the Advanced Log Browser. See Advanced Log Browser in Chapter 4.

Figure 1-46

49
1.8 Recording Schedule
You can program recording, I/O devices, and Center V2 services to turn on and off at specific time
each day. Click the Schedule button (No.15, Figure 1-2) and select Schedule Edit to display the
following window.

The window has three major tabs:

 Video Schedule: A schedule starts the surveillance system automatically.
 I/O Schedule: A schedule starts I/O surveillance automatically.
 Center V2 Schedule: A schedule starts the connection to Center V2 services automatically.

CenterV2 Schedule
I/O Schedule

Video Schedule
Weekly Schedule
Special Day Schedule

Schedule List
Window

Camera Tabs

Edit Tab

Figure 1-47

Note: You can add the schedule settings using the Camera Tabs or the Edit Tab. To modify the
settings, you have to use the Edit Tab.

50
 1 Configuring Main System

1.8.1 Video Schedule

Setting up a Video Schedule

1. Set your surveillance preferences:
[Time] Enter the starting and ending time of the schedule.
[Monitor Invoke] Sets alert methods on motion detection.
 Rec: Records while monitoring. Select the recording mode to be Motion Detection or
Round-the-Clock.
 Pager/E-Mail: Sends pager or e-mail alerts on motion detection.
 Output: Triggers the corresponding I/O devices on motion detection. To set up I/O devices,
see Adjusting Camera Configuration earlier in this chapter.
[Remote] Allows remotely accessing live video from the WebCam server on the scheduled time.
[Week Days Enable Schedule] Select days for the schedule.
[Camera] Applies the settings to selected cameras.
2. Click the Add button to apply above settings. The schedule that you just edit will be displayed on
the Schedule List Window.
3. Repeat above steps to set up more schedules.
4. Click OK.

You will see different color bars being displayed on the Schedule List Windows when you click the
Camera Tabs. Each color stands for a setting.

Figure 1-48
 Red: Recording enabled.
 Green: Pager/E-mail notification enabled.
 Blue: Live view from the WebCam server accessible.
 Jade: I/O monitor enabled.
 Purple: Center V2 schedule enabled.

51
 Modifying a Video Schedule
1. Click the Edit tab .
2. Click the desired schedule to highlight it in the Schedule List window.
3. Change the settings of surveillance preferences.
4. Click the Modify button to apply the changes to your schedule.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a Video Schedule

1. Click the Edit tab .
2. Click the desired schedule to highlight it in the Schedule List window.
3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
4. Click OK.

1.8.2 Special Days Schedule

Click the Special Day Schedule tab. All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule, except the
following section. Use the drop-down list and select a date from the pop-up calendar. Click Apply to
add the date to the schedule.

Figure 1-49

1.8.3 I/O Schedule

Set up a schedule to activate the monitoring of I/O devices automatically. All settings are the same as
those in Video Schedule, except the following section. After setting up time and dates, select the I/O
Monitor option to activate the schedule.

Figure 1-50

52
 1 Configuring Main System

1.8.4 Center V2 Schedule

Set up a schedule to connect to Center V2 services automatically. All settings are the same as those in
Video Schedule, except the following section. After setting up scheduled time and dates, select the
Center V2 option to activate the schedule.

Figure 1-51

Note: If you select the Center V2 option without setting up the Center V2 schedule and later enable
the Center V2 server, the connection to Center V2 will be stopped automatically after 15 minutes. For
this problem, please complete the setup of Center V2 schedule or clear the Center V2 option.

53
1.9 Schedule Center
The Schedule Center allows you to set up a schedule to automatically compact video events, merge
video events, and back up the system settings.

1.9.1 Compacting Video Events

The Video Compacting feature helps you to save storage space by extracting key frames from the
recorded files. After the extraction, the recorded files will be composed of key frames only. This can
significantly reduce the file size. The Video Compacting action is enabled on a specific weekly
schedule.

Note:

1. The audio files cannot be compacted.

2. If a file is in playback when it is supposed to be compacted, the compacting will not occur. The
compacting will be started the next time when the GV-System is scheduled to compact video
files.

3. Compacting the recorded files to key frames only will affect the smoothness of the playback, but
will not result in data loss since key frame contains the complete image and only the intermediate
frames between key frames are deleted.

Setting up a Compacting Schedule

1. Click the Schedule button, select Schedule Center and select Compacting Video Events.

Figure 1-52

54
 1 Configuring Main System

2. Click Add schedule. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-53

3. Select the desired camera individually, or select Camera to check all the cameras from the
camera list.

4. Select Enable schedule of compacting video files.

5. In the Schedule Time section, specify the day and time to compact the video files.

6. In the Setting section, specify the options below.

 Reserved Days: The number of days the original video files to be reserved. For example, if
you set it to 2 days, the system will keep the original video files for the last two days
(recorded today and yesterday), and compact all the files earlier. The minimum value is to
reserve 1 day.

 Reserved Frames (MJPEG): For the video files compressed with MJPEG, you can specify
the desired number of frames per second to reserve. The default value is 1 frame per
second.

 Temp Folder: The temporary storage path for the video files to be compacted.

 Include “Never Recycle” events: Enable the “never recycle” events to be compacted.

7. Click Exit.

After the setup is completed, the GVService program appears on the Windows notification area.

, which allows the video compacting to run automatically without starting the GV-System.

55
 When the GV-System starts to compact video files at the time you specified, the following Compacting
List will pop up, displaying the compacting status. To view the log files of video compacted, click the

icon in the bottom of the window.

Figure 1-54

Viewing Compacted Video Files

After the video compacting, the compacted files will replace the original files and become the video
events you view on ViewLog. After selecting a camera and date you specified for video compacting,
you would see three types of icons on the Video Event list.

Icons Description
Key The compacted file.

Never-Recycle The Never-Recycle events.

Tick Failed to compact the file because the file was being played back when it was
supposed to be compacted.

Figure 1-55

56
 1 Configuring Main System

1.9.2 Merging Video Events

You can program the file merging and exporting to begin on a specific date or on a daily schedule. The
schedule is helpful when computer sources are busy at monitoring or detection, it allows you to assign
the file merging and exporting after working hours.

Setting up a Merging Schedule

1. Click the Schedule button, select Schedule Center and select Merging Video Events.

Figure 1-56

2. Click Edit. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-57

3. In the Task Name field, name the schedule.

57
 4. In the Schedule Type section, select one of the types:

 Specific Date: The file merging only begins on the specified date. You can further choose
to merge files from a specific time period on the specified date in step 7.

 Daily: The file merging begins on the selected days every week. The Daily schedule
merges the files of the day previous to the selected day. For example, if you select Tue,
Thu and Sat to begin file merging. The files of Mon, Wed and Fri will be merged on those
selected days respectively.

5. In the Start Time section, specify the time of day to begin the file merging.

6. Click Next. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-58

7. In the Time Period section, specify Start and End time to locate files. The number of video and
audio files for each camera found within the specified time is displayed in the camera list on the left.
For example, “Camera 9 18+0” means the Camera 9 has created 18 video files and 0 audio files
within the specified time. By default you can only merge the files of one day.

8. In the Merge Mode section, select one of the merging methods:

 Single File: Merges several AVI files into a single file. The maximum size of the merged file
is 2 GB for FAT32 file system and 4 GB for NTFS file system. If the merged file exceeds the
limit of Windows file system, it will be split up into another file.

 Multiple Files: Merges AVI files into several files of a specific duration. After specifying the
duration, you can see the number of merged files will be created.

58
 1 Configuring Main System

 Direct Merge (Higher Speed): The merging method only joins video files together without
the inclusion of their video effects, such as privacy masks, watermarks, time stamps, GPS
data and etc.

 Using the Direct Merge to merge several AVI files into a single file, also select Single
File.

 Using the Direct Merge to merge AVI files based on the specified duration, also select
Multiple Files.

 To merge audio and video together, click the arrow button and select Include Audio.

The Direct Merge is faster than the other two merging methods, because the video effects
are excluded.

9. In the Output Location section, specify the storage location of merged files, and select whether to
save merged files in EXE format.

10. Click Add to create the schedule task.

59
1.9.3 Setting Backup Schedule

You can set up a schedule to regularly back up the configurations in the Main System. The backup
settings can be restored to the current system or imported to another GV-System.

1. Click the Schedule button, and select Schedule Center. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-59

2. Select Fast Backup and Restore and click Edit. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-60

60
 1 Configuring Main System

3. Select Active.

4. Under the Schedule Type section, choose a backup schedule.

 Daily Schedule: Backs up the system configurations daily.

 Weekly Schedule: Select a day of the week from the drop-down list to back up the system
configurations.

 Monthly Schedule: Select a day of the month from the drop-down list to back up the
system configurations. Note that if you have selected 31, and the particular month does not
st
have the 31 day, the system will skip backup for that month.

5. Under the Backup Setting section, select the settings you want to back up.

6. Type the ID and Password of your login account.

7. Under the Save Path section, specify a file path to store the settings.

8. Click OK to save the settings.

After setup is completed, the GVService icon appears on the Windows notification area as shown

below. The GVService program allows the backup to run automatically

without starting the GV-System.

For details on how to restore the system, see Backing Up and Restoring Settings in Chapter 11.

Note: Backup will be performed at the time when you first set up the function. For example, if the time
when you click OK to apply a daily backup schedule is 11:30 am, the system will perform backup at
11:30 am every day.

61
1.9.4 Setting VSM Schedule

You can set up a schedule to activate the connection to Vital Sign Monitor (VSM) on a specific date or
on a weekly schedule.

Note: For details on setting up the connection to the VSM, see Chapter 3 in GV-CMS Series User’s
Manual.

1. Click the Schedule button, and select Schedule Center. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-61

2. Select Setting VSM Schedule and click Edit. The VSM Schedule List dialog box appears.

To add a new schedule, click the Add button . This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-62

3. Select to activate VSM on a Specific Date or select Weekly to set up a weekly schedule.

4. Set a Start Time and an End Time for the Specific Date or Weekly schedule.

5. Click OK to add the schedule.

6. To add multiple schedules, click the Add button and repeat the steps above.

62
 1 Configuring Main System

1.10 Alert Notification

When events occur, you can receive alert notification through e-mails, SMS messages, pagers or
telephones. Follow the steps below to enable alert notification and select the event types to receive
notification.

The events that can trigger alert notification include: Video Lost, Recording Error, Disk Full, Motion
Detection, I/O Trigger, Scene Change, Intruder Event, Missing Object, Unattended Object. POS Loss
Prevention, Scene Change, Crowd Detection, Advanced Unattended Object, Advanced Scene
Change Detection, Advanced Missing Object and Face Detection.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure and click Send Alerts
Approach Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-63

2. To enable alert notification, select Send Event Alerts.

63
 3. To specify the types of events to receive alert notification, click the arrow button next to Send
Event Alerts and select the alert types. Some alerts are only available when the alert settings
are activated.

Figure 1-64

4. Click OK.

5. To send e-mail, hotline or SMS alerts when motion is detected, click Invoke to Send Alerts in the
Camera Configure (F9) dialog box. You can select specific cameras for this application or click
the Finger button to apply the setting to all the cameras. See Figure 1-11. For related settings,
see, Invoke to Send Alerts and options earlier this chapter.

6. To receive notification by e-mail or hotline, select Default Alert Approach and select E-Mail or
Hotline. To receive notification by SMS, select Alternative Alert Approach (SMS). To see how
to set up e-mail server or hotline service, refer to the sections below. To see how to set up SMS
notification, refer to Chapter 10 for more details.

64
 1 Configuring Main System

1.10.1 Setting Email Server

To send e-mail notification, you need to first set up your mail server as described below:

1. In the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box (Figure 1-63), enable Default Alert Approach,
select E-Mail and click the Setting button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-65

2. In the Mail Setup section, set up the following fields:

 SMTP Sever: Type your mail server’s URL address or IP address.

 E-Mail From: Type the sender’s e-mail address.

 E-Mail To: Type recipients’ e-mail addresses. For multiple recipients, add a semicolon
between each e-mail address.

 Charset: Select the character set for outgoing e-mails.

 Subject: Type a subject that comes with the alert message.

3. Click the Test Mail Account button to send a test e-mail and see whether the setup is correct. If
the connection attempt fails, you may also need to check the settings of SMTP Mail Server
requires authentication and SMTP Server described below.

65
 Other options on the E-Mail dialog box:
[Attach Image Setup] Select Attach to include up to 6 snapshots in the e-mail. The image format and
size are selectable from drop-down lists.
[Email-Alerts Setup] Specify the time interval between e-mail alerts. This option can prevent e-mails
from being sent frequently. The default interval is 5 minutes (configurable from 0 to 60 minutes). For
example, if motion lasts for more than 15 minutes, it means that you will receive 3 e-mails at least. If
motion lasts for less than 5 minutes, you will receive one e-mail only.

[SMTP Mail Server requires authentication] If the SMTP mail server needs authentication for login,
select this option and type your account name and password.

[SMTP Server] Keep the default port 25 which is common for most SMTP servers. However webmail
providers such as Yahoo and Hotmail generally use different SMTP port. In this case, check your
e-mail provider for the SMTP port number. Select SSL if your e-mail server requires the SSL
authentication for connection.

[Domain Name from DDNS] This option generates URL links for remote video playback in the sent
e-mails. For this function to work, enter the fixed IP address or domain name of the GV-System, and
enable WebCam Server.

[E-mail in Text Mode] When WebCam Server is enabled, your e-mail alert will be sent in HTML
format. If you want to send the e-mail alert in pure text format, select this option.

66
 1 Configuring Main System

1.10.2 Setting Hotline Services

When events occur, you can receive notification by a text or voice message through pagers or
telephones.

1. In the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box (Figure 1-63), enable Default Alert Approach,
select Hotline and click the Setting button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-66

[Modem Setup] Select the dialup modem installed on the computer of the GV-System, and the COM
port that is connected. Click the Detect button to test the connection with the modem.

Note: Internal modems (PCI or ISA) are not recommended.

[Hotline Alert x] The event can be set to trigger up to 3 units of telephones and pagers. A text
message may be sent to the pager.

Enter the telephone number

Enter the text message

Figure 1-67

67
 1. In the Dial HotLine drop-down list, type the telephone or pager number.
2. Select Activate.
3. Select Attach Text Message and type the text messages to be sent to a pager.
4. The system allows you to send a custom sound file to the telephone. For this operation a
microphone must be installed on the computer of the GV-System. To record a sound file, follow
these steps:

a. Click the Rec button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-68

b. Click the Record button to start recording. Speak the message script clearly to the
microphone. Click Stop button when it is done.
c. Click the Play button to listen to the recording. To save this sound file, click File, select Save
as, and then click the Change button. This Sound Selection dialog box appears.

Figure 1-69
d. Select PCM 8,000 Hz, 8-bit Mono, the only format supported for this feature, and then click
OK.
5. To find a sound file, click the Browse button to locate the file. Add the path of the file to the field,
and the file will be sent with the telephone calls.

[Hotline Option] Specify the interval between hotline alerts. The option is useful for the frequent event
occurrence by which any event triggers during the interval period will be ignored.

[Hotline Attach Audio Message] Specify how many times to repeat the audio message when a
telephone call is made to you.

68
 1 Configuring Main System

1.11 PTZ Control

With the PTZ control panel, you can control PTZ functions, e.g. pan, tilt, zoom, focus and preset points.
This control panel will not appear, unless at least one PTZ camera is connected to the system.

Adding a PTZ Camera

For the IP Camera, skip steps 1 to 3 and start from the step 4.

1. Click Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select PTZ Device and select
Add / Remove PTZ. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-70

2. Select the brand of your camera, and click the button.

3. Click OK and restart the GV-System.
4. Click Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select PTZ Device and select
PTZ Device Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-71
5. For an IP camera, select the brand name from the drop-down list and click OK.
6. For an analog camera:

69
 A、 Select the brand name from the drop-down list, click the button.
B、 Select Active. Note that without this step the PTZ camera will not be added to the system.
C、 Click OK.

PTZ Control Panel

After the PTZ cameras are added to the system, you should now see the PTZ Control button
on the screen. Click the button to bring out the on-screen control panel, shown as follows:

PTZ Switch

Close

Pan/Tilt Control

Zoom Control

Focus Control

Iris Control

Option

Preset Switch Panel

Figure 1-72

 PTZ Switch: Changes the PTZ model to be controlled.

 Close: Exits the control panel.
 Pan/Tilt Control: Allows the PTZ to pan and tilt to any angle.
 Zoom Control: Allows the PTZ to zoom in or out.
 Focus Control: Adjusts the camera focus.
 Iris Control: Adjusts the camera iris. The iris Control buttons are only available for GV-IP
Speed Dome.
 Option: Moves the PTZ to a preset point by clicking the preset number. Functions included in
the Option may be different in terms of PTZ models. Consult the manual of the connected
PTZ model.
 Preset Switch Panel: You can also enter a preset number using the onscreen keypad
displayed.

For the supported PTZ models, see Appendix B.

70
 1 Configuring Main System

1.11.1 Mapping PTZ Cameras

It is required to map PTZ cameras to the corresponding camera channels for either local control or
remote applications.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select PTZ Device and
select Camera Mapping PTZ Dome. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-73
2. Select a Camera channel.
3. Select the PTZ model connected to the selected channel from the Device drop-down list.
4. When more than one identical PTZ brand are connected to the system, use the Address
drop-down list to choose the corresponding address. Up to 64 addresses can be supported.
5. Click OK to apply the settings.

1.11.2 Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels

To allow the corresponding PTZ control panels to be called up automatically when you switch to
different PTZ camera screens, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories,
select PTZ Device, and select Auto PTZ Panel Switch.

71
1.11.3 PTZ Idle Protection

When the PTZ remains stationary for a certain time, the PTZ can automatically activate the scan mode,
move to the designated preset point, or start the preset tour.

1. In the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box (Figure 1-73), select PTZ Inactivity.
2. Set the idle time after which to start the protection mode.
3. Select Auto, Preset, Multi Position Tour or Tour Schedule as protection mode.

Setting Multi Position Tour

You can create a PTZ tour with up to 64 preset points. Note the number of preset points depends on
your PTZ capacity.

1. Select Multi Position Tour on the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box (Figure 1-73), and click the
Setting button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-74

2. Select a Preset as a start point.

3. Set the Dwell Time that the PTZ will remain in a preset.
4. Click Add and repeat Steps 2-3 to build more points in the tour.

72
 1 Configuring Main System

Setting Tour Schedule

When the PTZ camera remains stationary for a certain time, the camera will start the defined
behaviors, such as activating the auto pan or returning the designated preset, in the defined time
frames.

1. Select Tour Schedule on the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box (Figure 1-73), and click the
Setting button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-75

2. Select Span 1, specify a period of time, and select a camera behavior to be activated during the
defined time period.

3. Set another span.

4. If you want to apply a different setting to weekends, select Weekend Apply and select a camera
behavior. And define whether the weekend includes Saturday or not.

5. Click OK to apply the settings.

Note: It is required to set more than one span so that a specified camera behavior will only run in the
defined time frame. Otherwise, you can select the Auto, Preset or Multi Position Tour option (see
Figure 1-73) to configure the idle protection.

73
1.11.4 PTZ Automation

Other than the PTZ control panel, you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image.

Figure 1-76

1. To control the PTZ, you must map one channel to the PTZ camera first. For details, see Mapping
PTZ Cameras earlier in this chapter.
2. To access the Visual PTZ Control Panel click on the desired Camera Name on the top left corner
of every channel, and select PTZ Automation. A separate PTZ control window appears.
3. To change the panel settings, click the green PTZ button on the top left corner of the PTZ control
window to have these options:
[PTZ Control Type]
 Fixed Direction Move: In this mode, the dome view can only be moved to the eight
directions (north, south, east, west, northeast, northwest, southeast and southwest). To move
the camera view, click and hold on to the dotted red line further from the panel. The round
panel appears when moving the mouse to the live view.
 Random Move: In this mode, you can move the camera view to any direction. Click any
place on the live view for the panel to appear, and right-click for the panel to hide. To move
the camera view, click and hold on to a desired direction. Click further for the camera view to
move faster.
 Center Move: In this mode, you can zoom in and out using the mouse scroll or by drawing a
block directly on the live view. The mode is only for GV-SD220.
 Transparency: Adjusts the transparency level of the panel. Ten levels range from 10% (fully
transparent) to 100% (fully opaque).

74
 1 Configuring Main System

1.12 Digital PTZ Control

In non-PTZ cameras, the Digital PTZ (DPTZ) function allows you to simulate the PTZ movement on
the screen.

1. Right-click the live view, find Camera Name and select Digital PTZ. The Visual Automation
View window for DPTZ control appears.

Figure 1-77

2. To zoom in / out, click the corresponding buttons or use the mouse scroll. To bring the Visual
Automation View back to its default image, click Home.

75
 3. To pan and tilt the Visual Automation View, zoom in on the image first, and then click and hold the
arrow. The arrow appears when you place the cursor in one of the eight directions, i.e. up, down,
left, right, left up, left down, right up and right down.

Figure 1-78 Visual Automation View (zoom-in function applied)

Figure 1-79 Visual Automation View

(tilt function applied by holding the arrow in the upper left corner)

4. To adjust the transparency level of the Control Panel, click the green DPTZ button on the top left
corner of the window and select Transparency. Ten levels range from 10% (fully transparent) to
100% (fully opaque).

Note: The functions of Focus In / Out and the speed level are not supported in Digital PTZ.

76
 1 Configuring Main System

1.13 Pop-up Live Video

The live video can pop up immediately for alert whenever motion detection and alarm occurs. To set up,
click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, and then select Camera
Popup Setting. This brings up the following Camera Popup Setting dialog box.

Figure 1-80

 Dwell Time: Specify the amount of time a pop-up live video to remain in the foreground.
 Interrupt Interval: Specify the interval between live video pop-ups. This feature is useful when
several cameras are activated for a pop-up alert at the same time.
 Camera Motion Invoke: Choose which camera you wish to have auto pop-up upon motion
detection.
 Input Invoke: Select an input module and number using arrow buttons, select this option and
assign a camera to the input device. Whenever the input is triggered, the live video of the
assigned camera will pop up.
 The Arrow Button: The pop-up live videos appear on the screen when triggered events occur. If
the DSP Spot Monitor function is enabled, you can select if pop-up live videos appear on the
system screen, spot monitor or both. For details on DSP Spot Monitor Controller, see Spot Monitor
Controller in Chapter 11.

Note: You can use the Mask Filter function in the Camera Configure dialog box (Figure 1-8) to mask
off certain areas of the camera image that you don’t want to detect motion.

77
1.14 Video Noise Solutions
The system provides these solutions for video/audio noise:

 Noise Tolerance for motion detection and advanced motion detection

 Noise Detection to Reduce File Size for round-the-clock recording

 Noise Filter to filter out video and audio noise

1.14.1 Noise Tolerance

Designed for motion detection, the noise tolerance feature reduces false alarms and unwanted
recordings caused by weather or light changes. The level of noise tolerance can be adjusted.

Note: The noise tolerance function will not change video quality.

Setting Up for Motion Detection

Figure 1-81

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Camera
Configure. The Camera Configure dialog box appears.
2. To set the recording mode to motion detection, enable Rec. Video, and select Motion Detect.
3. To enable noise tolerance, click the right-arrow button next to Sensitivity in the Motion Detect
section. The Motion Detection Setup dialog box appears.

78
 1 Configuring Main System

4. Select Activate Noise Tolerance and adjust tolerance level. The higher the level, the more
tolerant the system is to video noise. If your surveillance area may produce much video noise, set
the level to High. Conversely, set the level to Low if the surveillance area may produce less video
noise.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

Setting Up for Advanced Motion Detection

For details, see Advanced Motion Detection in chapter 3.

1.14.2 Noise Detection to Reduce File Size

Designed for the round-the-clock recording, the Noise Detection feature can automatically reduce
recording size on video noise conditions, and restore normal recording size when the disturbing
conditions are over.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Camera
Configure. A dialog box appears.

2. To set the recording mode to Round-the-Clock, enable Rec Video and select Round-the-clock.

3. Select Apply Advanced Codec Setting and click the button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-82
4. Select Noise detection to reduce file size and adjust the Sensitivity level. The higher the value,
the more sensitive the system is to video noise.
5. Click Apply.

When the option is selected and video noise conditions are detected, you can see the icon
overlaid on the right-bottom corner of recorded videos. So you can easily distinguish the normal- size
segment from reduced-size segment. Note the icon does not appear on live video.

Note: You can also use this function when the recording mode is set to Motion Detection.

79
1.14.3 Noise Filter

The Noise Filter function can remove video and audio noise from live view. The video denoising can
reduce file size and improve image quality, while the audio denoising can maximize the sound quality.

Filtering Out Video Noise

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis and select Video
Lowpass Filter Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-83
2. Select the desired channels to be filtered out video noises, and click OK. The video noises from
the selected channels are reduced, and file sizes are decreased too.

Filtering Out Audio Noise

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to A/V Setting, and select Audio Settings.
A dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired channels to be filtered out audio noise, select Wave Out De-Noise, and click
OK. The audio noises of the selected channels are reduced.

80
 1 Configuring Main System

1.15 Picture-in-Picture View

With the Picture in Picture (PIP) view, you can crop the video to get a close-up view or zoom in on the
video. This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the
surveillance area.

1. Click the desired camera name and select PIP View.

2. The screen automatically switches to one division, and an inset window of the camera view
appears in the bottom right corner.

Inset window

Figure 1-84

3. Double-click the inset window. A hand icon appears.

4. Click the inset window. A navigation box appears.

Figure 1-85

5. Move the navigation box around in the inset window to have a close-up view of the selected area.
6. To adjust the navigation box size, move the cursor to any of the box corners, enlarge or diminish
the box.
7. To change the frame color of the navigation box, right-click the image, select Mega Pixel Setting,
and select Set Color of Focus Area.
8. To exit the PIP view, click the camera name and click PIP View again.

81
1.16 Picture-and-Picture View
With the Picture and Picture (PAP) view, you can create a split video effect with multiple close-up
views on the image. A total of 7 close-up views can be defined. This function is useful for megapixel
resolution that provides clear, detailed images of the surveillance area.

1. Click the desired camera name on the screen, and select PAP View.
2. The screen automatically switches to one division, and a row of three inset windows appears on
the bottom of the screen.

Figure 1-86

3. Draw a navigation box on the image, and this selected area is immediately reflected in one inset
window. Up to seven navigation boxes can be drawn on the image.
4. To adjust a navigation box size, move the cursor to any of the box corners, enlarge or diminish the
box.
5. To move a navigation box to another area on the image, drag it to that area.
6. To change the frame color of the navigation box, right-click the image, select Mega Pixel Setting
and click Set Color of Focus Area.
7. To hide the navigation box on the image, right-click the image, select Mega Pixel Setting and
click Display Focus Area of PAP Mode.
8. To delete a navigation box, right-click the desired box, select Focus Area of PAP Mode and
select Delete.
9. To exit the PAP view, click the camera name and select PAP View again.
10. To add another navigation box when less than seven navigation boxes are drawn, click the
camera name, select PAP View to enter, right-click the image, select Mega Pixel Setting, and
then select Enable Add-Focus-Area-Mode.

82
 1 Configuring Main System

1.17 Shortcuts
You can create up to 20 shortcuts on the main screen to a program or file.

1. Run Fast Backup & Restore Main System from the Windows Start menu. The Fast Backup &
Restore MultiCam System window appears.
2. Click the Customize Logo and Button button, select DVR, and select User Define Setting. This
dialog box appears.

Figure 1-87
3. Click the Add button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-88

 Application: Names the desired application to be pointed to.

 File: Assigns the path to the desired application.
 Parameter: Sets the information for the application.

4. Click OK to save all the configurations.

5. Run the Main System. The shortcut button appears.

83
1.18 Touch Screen Support
The GV-System offers three types of control panels with touch screen support: PTZ Control Panel, I/O
Control Panel and Touch Screen Panel.

1.18.1 PTZ and I/O Control Panel

This feature gives you the option of a large PTZ and I/O control panel with touch screen support. To
open the panel, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Accessories, select PTZ
Device, select PTZ/IO Panel, and select Large.

Figure 1-89

1.18.2 Touch Screen Panel

The touch screen panel allows you to switch to ViewLog and full screen by the touch of a finger. To
open the panel, follow the steps below:

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Tools, select Tool Kit, point to Touch
Screen Panel and then select Panel Setup to display the following window.

Figure 1-90

84
 1 Configuring Main System

[Activate]
 Activate when enter Full-Screen Mode only: Launches automatically the panel when the
full screen view is applied.
 Always Active: Always displays the panel on the screen.
[Layout] Choose a vertical or horizontal panel.

2. Click OK to save the above settings.

3. An information window indicating date, time, and storage space will appear at the upper left corner
of the screen. Right-click it to open the touch panel as shown below.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Figure 1-91

No. Name Description

1 Indicator Indicates date, time and storage space.

2 ViewLog Opens the ViewLog.

3 Full Screen Switches to a full screen.

4 Login / Change User Switches users to log in the GV-System.

5 System Log Opens the System Log.

6 Close MultiCam Closes the GV-System.

Note: You can move the touch screen panel anywhere on the screen by dragging it.

85
1.19 System Tools

1.19.1 Hard Disk Calculator

Before actual recording, the Hard Disk Calculator allows you to know the required hard disk space and
frame size for different types of codec and quality.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to A/V Setting, select Video Attributes,
and then click Advanced. The Advanced Video Attributes dialog box appears.
2. Click the HDD Calculator button at the right bottom. The HDD Calculator dialog box appears.

Figure 1-92

 Select Camera: Select cameras to be used for recording.

 Select Video Compression Codec: Check the desired codec(s) to be used for recording.
You can choose more than one codec to compare their performance.
 Software Compression: Check the desired codec(s) to be used for recording. You can
choose more than one codec for performance comparison. This option appears dimmed
when GV-3008 or GV-4008 is installed.
 Hardware Compression: Check the desired codec(s) to be used for recording. This
option is available when GV-3008 or GV-4008 is installed.
 Select Recording Quality: Check the desired quality value(s) for recording. You can choose
more than one quality value for comparison.

86
 1 Configuring Main System

 Set Test Time: The system will process a real-time test recording based on the time you set.
For example, if you enter 24 hours here, it will take more than one day to do the test recording.
So avoid entering the longer test time to save you time.
 Set Expected Recording Time: Enter the time you wish for recording.

3. Click the Calculate tab to see the result.

Note:
1. A calculation difference by  5 % from actual disk usage is expected.
2. The video attribute settings will effect the hard disk calculation.
3. This function is not available to the IP cameras.

87
1.19.2 Colorful Mode

You can enhance the coloring of live video to have more vivid and saturated images. Note this function
does not affect the original files.

For the users of GV-600A, GV-600B, GV-600(S), GV-650A, GV-650B, GV-650(S), GV-800A,
GV-800B, GV-800(S), GV-804A, GV-900A, GV-4008, GV-4008A, GV-5016 or GV-SDI-204 Card:

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select General Setting,
select Apply Directdraw Scale in the Display dialog box, and restart the Main System.

2. Click the Configure button, select Tools, select DirectDraw Configuration and select Use
Colorful Mode. Then restart the Main System for the mode to take effect.

For the users of GV-1120, GV-1120A, GV-1120B, GV-1240, GV-1240A, GV-1240B, GV-1480,
GV-1480A GV-1480B,or GV-3008 Card:

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select General Setting,
select Apply Directdraw Scale in the Display dialog box, and restart the Main System.

2. Click the Configure button, select Tools, select DirectDraw Configuration and select Use
Colorful Mode. Then restart the Main System.

3. Click the Configure button, select A/V Setting, clear the selection of DSP Overlay, and restart
the Main System for the colorful mode to take effect.

Note: The Colorful Mode can be applied to any connected channels of IP devices directly by
selecting Use Colorful Mode and then restarting the Main System.

1.19.3 Stopping Video Lost Watchdog

When the video signal is weak, the software watchdog will try to recover the lost video by restarting the
system and even rebooting the computer. By default, the video lost watchdog is enabled. To disable
this feature, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2) , point to Tools, select Video Signal
Diagnostic, and select Disable Video Signal Weak Watchdog.

Note: This function is not available in GV-NVR System.

88
 1 Configuring Main System

1.19.4 Deactivating Video Lost Beep

To stop a beep noise when any of videos lost, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to
Tools, select Video Signal Diagnostic, and select Disable Video Lost Beep.

1.19.5 Fast Key Lockup

If you don’t want to use certain fast keys and do not want them to interfere with the keyboard use, you
can disable the fast key functions.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Tools, select Tool Kit, and then select
Fast Key Lock Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 1-93
2. Check Lock Sensitive Fast Key, and check the fast keys you want to disable. To restore the fast
keys, uncheck them again.
3. Click OK to apply your settings.

1.19.6 Fast Key Reference

To know the fast keys used by the GV-System, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select
Tools, select Tool Kit, and select Fast Key List.

89
1.19.7 Network Failure Detection

The Network Failure Detection function triggers an output device when the network connection
between GV-System and the specified network host has failed. You can set a time interval, which
specifies how often the GV-System will send a ping message to the network host to check if the
connection is still active.

1. Click the Configure button, select Tools and click Network failure detection. This dialog
appears.

Figure 1-94

2. Under IP Address, type the IP address or domain name of the remote host.

3. Next to Interval, type the time interval between each ping in minutes ranging from 1 to 999. If the
interval is 5 minutes, GV-System will ping the network host every 5 minutes.

4. Under Action, enable Output Module and select the output module and pin number.

5. Click OK.

The selected output device will be triggered when the network host does not respond to GV-System’s
ping message.

90
 1 Configuring Main System

1.19.8 Memory Limit

The GV-System can automatically warn you on high memory usage to prevent system instability. The
memory monitoring and warning function requires your system to be Windows 7 SP1 or later.

The memory limit of GV-System or Main System is as listed below:

 For users of 32-bit Windows, the memory limit is 1.7 GB.

 For users of 64-bit Windows, the memory limit is 1.7 GB with 2 GB RAM and 3 GB with 4 GB
RAM.

When the memory usage of the GV-System exceeds the limit, the warning message will pop up. The
system can become unstable if the high memory persists. To reduce memory usage, you can close
one or more of these applications: connection to IP video devices, Video Analysis, Advanced Video
Analysis and Pre-Record by Memory. The system will check the memory usage of the GV-system
every 60 minutes.

To disable the memory warning function, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Tools,
select Memory Usage, select Hide Warning Message, and click OK.

Figure 1-95

1.19.9 Version Information

To know which version of GV-System you have, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point
to Tools, and select Version Information.

91
 Chapter 2

Hybrid and NVR Solution ..............................93

2.1 Dongle Requirement.......................................................................... 93

2.2 Hybrid Solution Description ............................................................ 94

2.3 NVR Solution Description ................................................................ 94

2.4 IP Channel Setup ................................................................................ 95

2.4.1 Adding Cameras Manually .......................................................................... 96
2.4.2 Scanning Cameras ........................................................................................ 98
2.4.3 Automatic Setup ............................................................................................ 98
2.4.4 Customizing IP Camera Settings............................................................ 100

2.5 PTZ IP Camera .................................................................................. 102

2.6 RTSP Connection.............................................................................. 102

2.7 ONVIF & PSIA Connection............................................................. 104

2.7.1 ONVIF Connection ....................................................................................... 104
2.7.2 PSIA Connection .......................................................................................... 105

2.8 Camera Mapping Using GV-IP Device Utility ........................... 106

2.9 Economic Mode................................................................................. 108

2.10 On Demand Display ........................................................................111

92
 2
CHAPTER

Hybrid and NVR Solution

To implement IP video surveillance, GeoVision provides the two solutions:
 Hybrid Solution: Integrates analog videos with digital videos from IP video devices.
 NVR Solution: A software-based system GV-NVR without requiring a video capture card.

Both Hybrid and NVR Solutions come with 32 free IP channels when connecting to GeoVision IP video
devices.

GeoVision’s Hybrid and NVR solutions support not only GeoVision’s own IP video products but also
products from other leading manufacturers. For the supported IP devices, refer to the Supported IP
Camera List.

Note: GV-250 Card does not support the Hybrid solution.

2.1 Dongle Requirement

To perform third-party IP devices with the Hybrid or NVR soltuion, you will need a NVR dongle to run
the GV-System. There are two types of dongles: internal dongle with hardware watchdog function and
external dongle.

 The dongle options include: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32 IP channels.

It is required to install drivers from the Software DVD or our website for the NVR dongle to work.
See USB Dongle Required for IP Device Application in Appendix A.

93
2.2 Hybrid Solution Description
1. Specifications of the Hybrid solution. The Hybrid solution integrates analog videos with digital
videos from IP video devices with the limit of 32 channels in total. The Hybrid solution allows you
to connect up to 32 IP channels from GeoVision IP Devices for free.

For example: Number of analog channels + up to 32 free GV IP channels <= 32 channels.

2. Connection of third-party IP devices to GV-System. To implement the Hybrid solution with

third-party IP video devices, you will need a NVR Dongle.

 The dongle options include: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32 IP
channel(s).

In this case, the total number of channels for your Hybrid system is: Number of analog channels
(+ up to 32 free GV IP channels) + Number of channels in your NVR Dongle <= 32 channels.

2.3 NVR Solution Description

1. Specifications of the NVR solution: The NVR solution supports up to 32 IP channels. It allows
you to connect up to 32 IP channels from GeoVision IP Devices for free.

2. Connection of third-party IP devices to GV-NVR. To implement the GV-NVR solution with

third-party IP video devices, you need a NVR Dongle.

 Dongle options include: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32 IP
channel(s).

94
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

2.4 IP Channel Setup

There are many ways to set up IP cameras in the system. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure
1-2), select System Configure, and click IP Camera Install. This dialog box appears.

Figure 2-1
 To automatically set up an IP camera, click Scan Camera to detect any IP cameras on the same
LAN.
 To manually set up an IP camera, click Add Camera.
 To import IP cameras from the GV-IP Device Utility, click Import Camera.
 To map IP devices through the GV-IP Device Utility, click IP Device Utility. See
 To add all IP cameras within an IP address range, click Automatic Setup.

For details on importing and mapping cameras using GV-IP Device Utility, refer to Camera Mapping
Using GV-IP Device Utility later in this chapter. For other methods, refer to the sections below.

95
2.4.1 Adding Cameras Manually

1. To manually add cameras, click Add Camera. This dialog box appears.

Figure 2-2
2. Type the IP address, username and password of the IP device. Modify the default HTTP port 80 if
necessary.
3. Select a camera brand and model name from the Brand and Device drop-down lists respectively.
This dialog box appears.

Figure 2-3

96
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

4. The options in the dialog box may vary depending on camera brands.
 Dual Stream: Use the default codec and resolution of the GV-IP camera. To see the default
resolutions after the camera is added, refer to Appendix I.
 Query: Use the current codec and resolution setting on the GV-IP camera.
 Camera list: Select a camera number.
 Port: Video streaming port number.
 Stream Type: You may have the option of single or dual streaming depending on camera
models.
 Codec Type: You may have different codec options depending on camera models. If the
selected camera supports dual streaming, the preview codec and recording codec can be set
differently.
 Resolution: You may select the different resolutions for preview and recording.
5. Click Apply. The IP camera is added to the list.
6. Right-click the camera and select Display position to map the IP camera to a channel on the
GV-System.

Figure 2-4
7. The Status column now should display “Connected”. Click OK.

To customize camera settings such as codec and frame rate, right-click the camera to see the list of
options. See Customizing IP Camera Settings section below for more details.

Tips: You can access the configuration interface of the connected IP device by right-clicking the IP
device and selecting Remote Camera Setting.

97
2.4.2 Scanning Cameras

1. To detect for IP devices on the LAN, click Scan Camera.

2. Click the Start Scan button. IP devices detected are displayed.

Figure 2-5
3. Double-click a camera you wish to connect to.
4. By default, the username and password are set to admin. If the camera does not use the default
settings, a dialog box will appear for you to type the correct username and password.
5. Follow steps 4-8 in the Adding Cameras Manually section above to set up the camera.

2.4.3 Automatic Setup

1. To add all GeoVision and third-party IP camera within the defined IP range, click Automatic Setup.
A dialog box appears.

Figure 2-6

98
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

2. Type a Starting IP address and specify the number of addresses in the IP pool to include. For
this example, IP devices using IP address between 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.10 will be added.
3. Click OK.

By default, the login username and password are set to admin. If the camera does not use the default
settings, its status will be displayed as “Connecting.” To modify the login credentials, right-click the
camera, click Disconnect Camera, right-click the camera again and click Change Setting.

99
2.4.4 Customizing IP Camera Settings

To configure IP camera settings such as frame rate, codec type and resolution, right-click the desired
camera to see the following list of options:

Figure 2-7

 Change Setting: Changes the IP address, port number, username and password of the camera.
Only available when the IP camera is disconnected.
 Change Resolution: Changes the display ratio, live view resolution and record resolution.
 Remote Camera Setting: Accesses the configuration interface of the connected IP device.
 Duplicate Camera: Duplicates camera settings to quickly add multiple cameras of the same
model. You can choose to use the same IP address but different port numbers or use the same
port number but different IP addresses for each duplicated camera. Only available when the IP
camera is disconnected.
 Network Time Out: When network disconnection exceeds the specified time period, the camera
status will be displayed as Connection Lost.
 On Demand Display: Enables automatic adjustment of live view resolution. See the On Demand
Display section later in this chapter for more details.
 Change Live View Codec: Changes the live view codec.
 Change record codec: Changes the recording codec.
 Live view decode postpone time: Specifies the number of milliseconds to postpone live view
decoding. When network connection with IP devices is unstable or when the time length between
frames is not evenly distributed, postponing the live view decoding will make the video smoother.
 Frames to keep in live view buffer: Specifies the number of frames to keep in the live view buffer.
When CPU performance is insufficient, you can reduce the number of frames kept in buffer to
achieve a real-time appearance by dropping frames. This setting does not affect the frame rate of
the recorded videos.
 Recording codec format Specifies whether to record in standard or GeoVision type of JPEG,
MPEG4, H.264, or H.265 codec.

100
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

 GIS Setting: Records the video with the GPS data. To record the GPS data, remember to also
enable the GIS function of the GV-System (Configure button < Accessories < Enable Local GIS).
 Automatically adjust DST: If enabled, the time on the GV-IP Device Web interface will be
synchronized with the time of the GV-System when DST period starts or ends on the GV-System.

After a display position is assigned and the camera becomes connected, you can also access the
following options:

Figure 2-8
 Live-view frame rate control (Sub stream): Sets the live view frame rate of the sub stream to
help reduce the CPU usage. If you have set the live view codec to be JPEG, select the number of
frames to allow in a second. If the live view codec selected is MPEG4, H.264, or H.265, select one
of the following options:
 Maximum Live-view Frame Rate: View the video at the maximum frame rate possible.
 Live-view Key Frame only: You can choose to view the key frames of the videos only instead
of all frames on the live view. This option is related to the GOP setting of the IP camera. For
example, if the GOP value is set to 30, there is only one key frame among 30 frames.
 Live-view frame rate control (Main stream): Sets the live view frame rate of the main stream
with higher resolution when On Demand function is enabled. Refer to Live-view frame rate control
above to see the options available.
 Image Orientation: You can adjust the image orientation by selecting Normal, Horizontal Mirror,
Vertical Flip or Rotate 180.

Note:
1. Some options are not available for GV-Fisheye Cameras.
2. When CPU loading is high, selecting Live-View Key Frame Only can reduce CPU loading by
jumping from key frame to key frame and dropping the non-key frames in between. This
settings do not affect the frame rate of the recorded videos.

101
2.5 PTZ IP Camera
To set up the IP camera with PTZ functions, follow these steps:

1. To add the PTZ IP camera to the system, follow the steps in Adding IP Video Sources above.

2. To open the PTZ control panel and perform the PTZ functions, follow the steps in PTZ Control in
Chapter 1.

2.6 RTSP Connection

You can add an IP camera to the GV-System by using the RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) if
this protocol is supported by your IP camera.

Note: The RTSP is a protocol that allows you to access video streams by using the compatible media
players like Windows Media Player or equivalent software like GV-System.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Camera Install
and click IP Camera Install.

2. Click the Add Camera button to manually add an IP camera. The Select Brand dialog box
appears.

3. Type the IP address, username and password of the IP camera. Modify the default HTTP port if
necessary.

4. Select Protocol from the Brand drop-down list.

5. Select the protocol that is supported by your IP camera from the Device drop-down list.

Figure 2-9

102
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

 GV_HTTP_SDK_RTSP: This option is for GeoVision SDK users. The RTSP protocol uses a
HTTP port for data streaming from the IP camera.

 RTSP over HTTP: The RTSP protocol uses a HTTP port for data streaming from the IP
camera.

 RTSP over TCP: The RTSP protocol uses a TCP port for data streaming from the IP camera.

 RTSP over UDP: The RTSP protocol uses an UDP port for data streaming from the IP
camera.

6. On the RTSP Command dialog box, enter the RTSP link address. For the RTSP command,
consult the documentation of your IP camera. For instance:

 For an AXIS IP camera, enter RTSP://<IP of the IP camera>/<codec>/media.amp

 For a HIKVISION IP camera, enter RTSP://username:password@<IP of the IP Camera>

7. Click OK. The IP camera is added to the list.

103
2.7 ONVIF & PSIA Connection
The GV-System is compatible with all other IP video devices using ONVIF and PSIA standards. The
ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) and PSIA (Physical Security Interoperability Alliance)
specifications are global standards created to ensure network video products from different
manufacturers are compatible with each other.

2.7.1 ONVIF Connection

GV-System supports dual streaming of IP cameras connected through ONVIF protocol. For each
stream, you can set a different codec, resolution, maximum bitrate, maximum frame rate and etc.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Camera Install,
and select IP Camera Install.

2. Click Add Camera. The Select Brand dialog box appears.

3. Type the IP address, User name, and Password of the camera.

4. For Brand, select Protocol; for Device, select ONVIF. A dialog box appears after the system
confirms that the camera is ONVIF compatible.

5. Select Dual Stream to enable the second stream if needed, and click the Setting button
next to Stream1 and Stream 2 to adjust Codec, Resolution, Quality, Frame Rate, Bitrate and
GOV. The GOV is the number of frames between each key frame. For example, a GOV of 10
means there will be 1 key frame every 10 frames.

Figure 2-11

6. Click Apply. The IP camera is now added to the camera list.

104
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

2.7.2 PSIA Connection

To connect to an IP device through PSIA protocol, follow the steps below.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Camera Install,
and select IP Camera Install.

2. Click Add Camera, and type the camera’s Server IP, Username, and Password.

3. From the Brand drop-down list, select Protocol.

4. For Brand, select Protocol; for Device, select PSIA. A dialog box appears.

5. A dialog box appears after the system confirms that the camera is PSIA compatible. Click Query.

6. After the camera is located, click Apply.

105
 2.8 Camera Mapping Using GV-IP Device
Utility
The GV-IP Device Utility detects all available GV-IP devices on the same LAN and allows you to map
detected cameras to channels. You can then export the device list and import it to the GV-System. The
Utility also allows you to quickly set the IP address, upgrade firmware, export/import device settings
and reboot the device.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Camera
Install, and select IP Camera Install. The IP Device Setup dialog box appears.

Figure 2-12

2. Select IP Device Utility. All the available IP cameras on the LAN are detected and listed in the
window.

Figure 2-13

3. To map the desired IP camera to a channel, drag the IP camera from the Camera List to the
desired channel number in the Dispatch Pattern section.

106
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

4. By default, the login username and password for the IP camera are admin. To modify the login
info of the camera to be added, right-click the IP camera in the Dispatch Pattern section and
select Login User Information.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to map more IP cameras.

6. To create multiple IP camera mapping settings, click the Add button on the Dispatch Pattern
toolbar. A new tab (NVR2) is created.

Figure 2-14

7. When you finish selecting the IP cameras, export the IP camera mapping settings.

A. Select the tab of the IP camera mapping settings (NVR1, 2, 3,…) you want to apply and click
the Export button on the Dispatch Pattern toolbar. The Save As dialog box appears.

B. Specify the file name (.ipcd) and the storage path of the IP camera mapping settings.

C. To export more sets of IP camera mapping settings, repeat the steps above.

8. Import the IP camera mapping settings into the GV-System.

A. Close the GV IP Device Utility window, return to the IP Device Setup dialog box and select
Import Camera.

Figure 2-15

9. Locate the storage path of the IP camera mapping settings you want to import and click OK. The
settings are updated to the GV-System.

107
2.9 Economic Mode
The economic mode helps you reduce the disk space needed to store videos from IP video devices.
Once the economic mode is enabled, you can choose to record key frames only or at a lower frame
rate when no motion is detected or when I/O devices are not triggered. This can significantly reduce
the file size of the recorded events.

Note: The Economic Mode can only be applied to IP cameras.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, and select Camera
Configure.

2. Select an IP camera under Camera Name.

3. Under the Rec Control section, click the button after Frames/Sec. This dialog box appears.

Figure 2-16

4. Select Enable Economic Mode to enable the economic mode.

108
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

5. Under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section, configure the frame rate settings for the
incoming IP video compressed with JPEG, MPEG, H264, or H265 codec.

 To configure the frame rate setting for the IP video compressed with JPEG:

A. Select JPEG.

B. Specify the number of frame rates per second for different situations: when motion is
detected (the Max. Recording Frame Rate of Motion option), when I/O devices are
triggered (the Max. Recording Frame Rate of I/O Trigger option), when no motion is
detected or when no I/O devices are triggered (the Max. Recording Frame Rate of
Non-Motion or Non-I/O Trigger option).

 To configure the frame rate setting for the IP video compressed with MPEG, H.264, or
H.265:

A. Select MPEG_H264_H265.

B. Select to record in the maximum frame rate or record key frames only for different
situations: when motion is detected (the Max. Recording Frame Rate of Motion
option), when I/O devices are triggered (the Max. Recording Frame Rate of I/O
Trigger option), when no motion is detected or when no I/O devices are triggered (the
Max. Recording Frame Rate of Non-Motion or Non-I/O Trigger option).

6. Under the Motion and I/O Trigger Setting section, select one of the following options to specify
the conditions to begin recording according to the Economic Frame Rate Setting you set in Step 5.

 Motion and I/O (Motion First): The video images will be recorded according to your
selection under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section when motion is detected or
when the I/O device is triggered. However, when both motion detection and I/O trigger
occur at the same time, the frame rate setting of motion detection will override the frame
rate setting of I/O trigger.

 Motion and I/O (I/O First): The video images will be recorded according to your selection
under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section when motion is detected or when I/O
devices are triggered. However, when both motion detection and I/O trigger occur at the
same time, the frame rate setting of I/O trigger will override the frame rate setting of motion
detection.

 Motion Only: When motion is detected, the video images will be recorded according to
your selection in Max. Recording Frame Rate of Motion.

 I/O Only: When I/O devices are triggered, the video images will be recorded according to
your selection in Max. Recording Frame Rate of I/O Trigger.

7. Click OK to apply the settings and select Start All Monitoring to run the application.

109
 Note:

1. The Max. Recording Frame Rate of Non-Motion or Non-I/O option is only available when the
camera is set to the Round-the-Clock recording mode.

2. The Max. Recording Frame Rate is subject to each camera’s maximum frame rate.

3. When the video is recorded using JPEG compression method, every frame is a key frame.

110
 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution

2.10 On Demand Display

For cameras that support dual streaming with different resolutions, you can select the On Demand
Display option to enable automatic adjustment of live view resolution. This option produces good
image quality without causing high CPU usage.

You will need to set one video streaming of the camera to be higher than the other streaming. The
system will switch to the higher resolution streaming when using view modes that require higher
quality images, such as single view or PIP/PAP mode. When watching live view in view modes where
higher resolution does not make a difference, such as a 16-channel screen division, the system will
switch to the lower resolution streaming to reduce CPU usage.

1. Make sure the IP camera has been added to the Main System and you have selected Dual
Stream during setup. For details on how to add an IP camera, see IP Channel Setup earlier in
this chapter.

2. Click the Configure button, select System Configure, select Camera Install and select IP
Camera Install. The IP Device Setup dialog box appears.

3. Right-click the camera and select On Demand Display.

Figure 2-17

4. Point to Enable, When View Size Bigger Than, and select a resolution. When the resolution
of the camera image on the screen is bigger than or equal to the selected resolution, the
system will switch to the higher resolution streaming.

111
 Note:

1. The On Demand Display function is not supported for Privacy Mask, Defog and Stabilizer.

2. The On Demand Display function is not supported by GV-Fisheye Camera.

3. If the same resolution has been set for both video streams, the On Demand Display option
will still be visible, but automatic resolution adjustment will not occur.

Application Example

A resolution of 640 x 480 has been selected for the On Demand Display function.

 Higher Resolution Streaming

1152 x 648 = 640 x 480,

higher resolution streaming will be used

Figure 2-18

The camera image in the middle has a resolution of 1152 x 648, so the higher resolution streaming
will be used, because 1152 x 648 is bigger than the selected 640 x 480.

 Lower Resolution Streaming

480 x 270 < 640 x 480,

lower resolution streaming will be used

Figure 2-19

After switching to 16-channel screen division, the resolution for each channel is 480 x 270, which is
smaller than the selected 640 x 480, so the lower resolution streaming will be used.

112
Chapter 3

Video Analysis ............................................115

3.1 Object Tracking and Zooming ...................................................... 115
3.1.1 Object Tracking ............................................................................................ 115
3.1.2 Object Zooming ............................................................................................ 122

3.2 Advanced Single Camera Tracking ............................................ 125

3.3 Digital Object Tracking .................................................................. 128
3.3.1 Setting Digital Object Tracking .............................................................. 128
3.3.2 Tracking in PIP View .................................................................................. 130
3.3.3 Tracking in PAP View ................................................................................. 131

3.4 Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm ........................................ 132

3.4.1 Object Counting............................................................................................ 133
3.4.2 Intrusion Alarm............................................................................................. 137

3.5 Object Index....................................................................................... 142

3.5.1 Setting Object Index................................................................................... 142
3.5.2 Viewing Object Index ................................................................................. 144
3.5.3 Searching Object Index ............................................................................. 145

3.6 Automatic Video Snapshots ......................................................... 147

3.6.1 Setting Video Snapshots........................................................................... 147
3.6.2 Searching Video Snapshots ..................................................................... 148

3.7 Face Detection .................................................................................. 150

3.8 Face Count ......................................................................................... 152
3.8.1 Installing the Camera................................................................................. 152
3.8.2 Setting Face Count...................................................................................... 153

3.9 Unattended and Missing Object Detection .............................. 156

3.9.1 Detecting Unattended Objects ............................................................... 156
3.9.2 Detecting Missing Objects ....................................................................... 158

3.10 Privacy Mask Protection.............................................................. 161

3.10.1 Setting a Privacy Mask............................................................................ 161
3.10.2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas........................ 162

3.11 Scene Change Detection ............................................................. 163

3.12 Panorama View............................................................................... 165

113
 3.12.1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping Areas.................... 167
3.12.2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area................................................ 168
3.12.3 Accessing a Panorama View................................................................. 171

3.13 Video Defogging ............................................................................. 172

3.14 Video Stabilization ........................................................................ 173
3.15 Wide Angle Lens Dewarping....................................................... 174
3.16 Advanced Motion Detection ....................................................... 175
3.17 Crowd Detection ............................................................................ 177
3.18 Advanced Scene Change Detection ........................................ 180
3.19 Advanced Unattended Object Detection................................ 183
3.20 Advanced Missing Object Detection........................................ 186
3.21 Video Analysis Schedule ............................................................. 189
3.21.1 Privacy Mask Schedule ........................................................................... 191

3.22 Fisheye View ................................................................................... 192

3.22.1 Setting Up a GV-Fisheye Camera......................................................... 193
3.22.2 Setting Up a Third-Party Fisheye Camera ........................................ 195

3.23 Specifications ................................................................................. 199

114
 3
CHAPTER

Video Analysis

3.1 Object Tracking and Zooming

Object Tracking provides you the real-time tracking and automatic magnification of a single moving
object by the combination of one PTZ camera and one stationary camera. If only one PTZ camera is
available, it can be applied for Object Zooming, letting you configure four critical views for real-time
zooming. The Object Tracking and Object Zooming functions can be combined together by completing
both settings.

3.1.1 Object Tracking

For the tracking function, you need one PTZ camera applied for tracking and one stationary camera
set for a fixed view. Install the PTZ camera and the stationary camera in close proximity of each other
so the focus and the camera view of both are similar. Only GV-IP Speed Dome and some third-party IP
cameras support this function. To see the supported PTZ cameras, see Certified PTZ Models for
Object Tracking in Appendix C.

Setting Up a PTZ Camera

Before configuring the Object Tracking function, first configure the PTZ camera.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select PTZ Device and
select PTZ Setup.
2. Select the model from the drop-down list.
3. Click the button. A setup dialog box appears.

 For GV-IP Speed Dome, select Enable Object Tracking. To configure the preset points, first
select Normal and configure presets from the PTZ control panel on the screen.

115
 Figure 3-1

 For other cameras, select Active and select Enable Object Tracking. Specify COM port,
Baud Rate and PT Speed of the PTZ camera. To configure the preset points, first select
Normal and configure presets from the PTZ control panel on the screen.

4. Click OK to apply the settings.

Note: For analog cameras, you must first add the camera to the PTZ camera list. Click Configure
button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select PTZ Device and select Add / Remove PTZ.
In the dialog box that appears, select the brand of your cameras and click the button.

116
 3 Video Analysis

Setting up Object Tracking

After the above PTZ setup, go back to the main screen. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure
1-2), point to Video Analysis, select Object Tracking Application, and click Object Tracking Setup
to display the following dialog box. The left image is the PTZ camera view and the right image is the
stationary camera view.

Figure 3-2

[PTZ Selection]
 : Click to set up the PTZ.
 Camera: Click the drop-down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of the PTZ.
[Fixed Camera Selection] Click the drop-down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of
the stationary camera.
[Setup]
 Pan, Tilt and Zoom: Use the slide bars to adjust the PTZ camera view.
 Sensitivity: Use the slide bar to adjust the detection sensitivity.
 The drop-down menu: Click the drop-down menu to define detection region and object size.
[Selection]
 Tracking: Click to specify the tracking time.
 Zoom in Object: Click to specify the idle time.
[Live Tuning] Adjust directions and the desired level of zooming.
[Schedule] Click to set up a schedule to enable the function.

117
 [Enable Mask] Click to display the mask on the defined detection region when you test the settings.
1. Click to display the following dialog box, select the PTZ brand and the hardware address,
and click OK to apply the settings.

Figure 3-3

2. Choose the corresponding camera views of the PTZ and stationary cameras. In Figure 3-2, the
images of the PTZ camera show in the Camera 2 view, while the images of the stationary camera
show in the Camera 1 view.
3. Adjust the view of the PTZ camera with the sliders of Pan, Tilt and Zoom. Make sure the PTZ
camera view is as similar as possible to the stationary camera view.
4. Click the Save button to save the both views as image references.
5. Adjust Sensitivity or keep it as default.

118
 3 Video Analysis

6. Select Define Detect Region from the drop-down menu. Use the mouse to outline a detection
region in the right image; you will be prompted to enter Detect Region.

Figure 3-4

7. Select Define Object Size from the drop-down menu. Use the mouse to outline the max and min
object sizes for tracking separately. Every time when finishing the outlining, you will be prompted
to enter Maximum Object Size or Minimum Object Size.

Figure 3-5
8. Click the Tracking item and specify Track Time (sec). Track Time (sec) indicates the tracking
duration in seconds.

Figure 3-6

119
 9. When the PTZ is tracking, you can still control it to zoom in a desired area. Click the Zoom in
Object item and specify Idle Time (sec). Idle Time (sec) indicates the zooming duration in
seconds. If a target appears after the specified idle time, the PTZ will start tracking. If not, the PTZ
will remain on the zoomed place.

Figure 3-7
10. Click the Schedule button to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video
Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.
11. Click the Test button to check your settings. There are two major settings you have to observe in
the testing. 1) Tracking: Observe if the target showing in the defined detection region is being
tracked with a highlighted mask, and magnified automatically in the left image. If not, increase the
sensitivity degree. 2) Zooming: Use the mouse to outline an object in the right image, and observe
if it is magnified in the left image clearly. If not, use the Live Tuning buttons to adjust directions
and the desired level of zooming.
12. Click OK to save your settings of the tracking time, the idle time for zooming in objects and the
testing results.

Starting Object Tracking

After the above settings, you can start the object tracking application. Click the Configure button (No.
14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, select Object Tracking Application, and then click Object
Tracking Start to start the function.

Tip: You can interrupt the PTZ camera tracking and take over the camera control by using PTZ
Control Panel on Main System, PC’s keyboard and GV accessories such as GV-Keyboard, GV-IR
Remote Control, and GV-Joystick. When the controlling device or panel is inactive for over 5
seconds, the PTZ camera will go back for tracking.

120
 3 Video Analysis

Zooming in Objects
While the PTZ is being applied for tracking, you can still control it to zoom in any desired area by
launching the Zoom in Dialog window.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, select Object Tracking
Application, and then click Object Tracking View to launch the Zoom in Dialog window,
overlapping in the main screen, as shown below.

Note: The Zoom In Dialog window is for the stationary camera view and the main screen is for the
PTZ view.

Figure 3-8 The outlined area in the Dialog window is magnified on the main screen

2. In the Zoom In Type field, select Fixed Camera.

3. In the Camera field, select the assigned camera view for the stationary camera.
4. Use the mouse to outline a desired area in the Dialog window. It will be magnified on the main
screen.

When the specified idle time of zooming is up, PTZ will go back for tracking. If you want to stop the
zooming function before the specified idle time, click the Back to Tracking button in the bottom of the
Zoom In Dialog window. Then PTZ will go back to tracking instantly.

121
3.1.2 Object Zooming

If only one PTZ camera is available, without the stationary camera, you can simply apply it for the
object zooming function. The feature allows you to configure up to 4 critical views for instant
monitoring and zooming.

Setting up a PTZ Camera

Before configuring the Object Zooming function, first configure the PTZ device. Refer to Setting up a
PTZ Camera in Object Tracking earlier in this chapter.

Setting up Object Zooming

After the above PTZ setup, go back to the menu bar.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, select Object Tracking
Application, and select Object Tracking Setup to display the Object Tracking Config dialog box.
Then click the Zoom in Object tab in the upper part to display the following dialog box.

Note: The image on the right will not display until you complete the settings below.

Figure 3-9

122
 3 Video Analysis

2. Click for the PTZ setup. Refer to Object Tracking earlier in this chapter.
3. Choose the camera view of the PTZ. In Figure 3-9, the images of the PTZ camera show in the
camera 2 view.
4. Use the sliders of Pan, Tilt and Zoom to set up the View 1 as shown below. Then click the Add
button to apply the settings. The View 1 will show in the upper-left corner of the right image.

Figure 3-10

5. Click the drop-down menu to set up View 2, 3, and 4, one at a time. Refer to Step 4.
6. Specify Idle Time (sec), indicating the zooming duration in seconds.

Figure 3-11

7. Click the Idle Mode drop-down menu. The seven options included inside are: None, View 1, View
2, View 3, View 4, Tracking and Refresh View.
 None: After zooming, the PTZ camera will remain on the same view until the next zooming
command.
 Tracking: After the idle time, the PTZ camera will start tracking if it is also being applied for
the tracking function.
 View 1, 2, 3, 4: After the idle time, the PTZ camera will go back to the preset View 1, 2, 3, or
4.
 Refresh View: After the idle time, the 4 views will be refreshed.

8. Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule
later in this chapter.
9. Click Test to check your settings. Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views.
The area will be magnified in the left view.
10. Click OK to apply the displayed selections and close the dialog box.

123
 Starting Object Zooming
After the above settings, you can start the object zooming application.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, select Object Tracking
Application, and click Object Tracking View to open the Zoom in Dialog window, overlapping on
the main screen (Figure 3-8).
2. In the Zoom In Type field, select Quad View.
3. In the Camera field, select the assigned PTZ camera. Then the four views you set up before
shows in the Zoom in Dialog window.

Figure 3-12

4. Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views. The area will be magnified on
the main screen.
5. When you click the Go to Idle Mode button in the lower part, your setting in Step 7 of Object
Zooming Setup will be applied. For example, if you choose View 3, the PTZ camera will go to the
preset View 3 when you click the button.

124
 3 Video Analysis

3.2 Advanced Single Camera Tracking

The Advanced Single Camera Tracking can track a moving object using only one PTZ camera. When
an object moves within the view of camera, the PTZ camera will follow its movement. When the object
is out of view, the PTZ camera can be set to return to a designated position. For supported PTZ
models, see Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking in Appendix C.

Note: The Advanced Single Camera Tracking with color-based object tracking introduced in V8.3.2
has been removed. The Advanced Single Camera Tracking in V8.4 or later uses motion-based
object tracking.

Setting up a PTZ Camera

Before setting up the Advanced Single Camera Tracking function, you need to first configure the PTZ
device to enable Object Tracking. Refer to Setting up a PTZ Camera in Object Tracking earlier in this
chapter.

125
 Setting up Advanced Single Camera Tracking
1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Video Analysis, select Object Tracking
Application, select Object Tracking Setup and click the Advance Single Camera Tracking tab.
This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-13

2. Select the camera from the PTZ Selection drop-down list.

3. Select Enable Tracking. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-14

4. Specify the camera brand and its hardware address, and click OK.

5. Move the Speed Level slider to adjust the speed of PTZ movement. The higher the value, the
faster the PTZ moving speed.

126
 3 Video Analysis

6. Select Support Zoom Function to be able to zoom in and out. Select Normal and the camera will
zoom in once on the moving object. Select Deep Zooming and the camera will zoom in three
times on the moving object.

7. Click the button to adjust the direction and zoom level of the camera.

8. To set the camera to return to its home position or a preset position when no motion is detected for
a certain time period, specify Idle Mode and Idle Time in seconds. Click on the button to
preview the designated position. Note that your camera will need to support home position and
preset position.

9. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

10. To outline a mask area where motion will be ignored, draw an area on the camera view and click
Set Mask on the dialog box that pops up. To remove the mask, draw an area bigger than the mask,
and click Remove Mask.

11. Click Test. Move an object through the view of camera and its movement should be tracked. If not,
increase Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to motion in the camera view. If you have
set a mask, you can select Enable Mask to display masked area during the test.

12. Click OK to apply the settings.

13. To begin single camera tracking, click the Configure button, select Video Analysis, select Object
Tracking Application, and select Object Tracking Start.

Note: When multiple objects are moving at the same time, the camera will track the object with the
largest area.

127
3.3 Digital Object Tracking
Without the need of a PTZ camera, the Digital Object Tracking provides you real-time tracking of up to
7 moving objects and automatic magnification of the targeted objects. The digital tracking function
which combines with PIP View or PAP View can be an aid to spot any suspicious activities under the
surveillance area.

3.3.1 Setting Digital Object Tracking

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Advanced Video Analysis, and select
Digital Object Tracking Setting.

2. Select the camera to be configured and click the Configure button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-15

3. Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop-down list.

128
 3 Video Analysis

4. In the Definition section, there are three options:

 Mask Region: Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored.

 Min Object Size: First click the button to pause live images and then use the mouse
to outline the minimum object size for tracking on the image.
 Max Number of Tracked Objects: Use the slider to choose the maximum number of
objects to be tracked. The maximum value is 7. This number also determines how many
navigation boxes would be left free for selecting focus areas of interest in PAP View. See
Object Tracking in PAP View later in this chapter.
 Dwell Time of Motion: After a targeted object stops moving, the image will remain
magnified for the number of seconds specified.

5. In the Option section, selecting Smart Zoom In can focus the upper part of the targeted object
during tracking.

6. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

Note:

1. The function will stop tracking an object when it remains stationary in the camera view for 3
seconds.
2. It takes about 3 to 5 seconds to start tracking after you switch to another channel for object
tracking.

129
3.3.2 Tracking in PIP View

The PIP (Picture-in-Picture) View with Digital Object Tracking can track up to 7 moving objects and
zoom in the first targeted object.

1. On the main screen, click the desired camera name label and select PIP View.

2. The screen automatically switches to one division, and an inset window of the camera view
appears in the bottom right corner. Navigation boxes also appear inside the inset window to focus
the moving objects.

Navigation box

Inset window

Figure 3-16
3. The first object entering the camera view will be highlighted and zoomed in the live view screen.
You can switch the highlight to another tracked object by clicking on its navigation box.

Note: Manually moving or adjusting the navigation box size is disabled in PIP View when Digital
Object Tracking is enabled.

130
 3 Video Analysis

3.3.3 Tracking in PAP View

The PAP (Picture-and-Picture) View with Digital Object Tracking can create split video effects with up
to 7 close-up views on moving objects.

1. On the main screen, click the desired camera name label and select PAP View.

2. The screen automatically switches to one division, and a row of inset windows appears around the
live view screen. The number of inset windows is based on the number set for Max Number of
Tracked Objects.

Figure 3-17

3. When a moving object enters the camera view, it will be highlighted with a navigation box to help
you track the object. An inset window will also display the magnified image of the tracked object.

4. You could also draw the box to select a focus area, and this selected area is immediately reflected
in one inset window. Up to (7 - Max Number of Tracked Objects) boxes can be drawn for focus
areas. For instance, you can draw 5 boxes to be focus areas if you select 2 for the Max Number of
Tracked Objects. See Setting Digital Object Tracking earlier in this chapter.

 To delete a focus area, right-click a drawn box, select Focus Area of PAP Mode and select
Delete.

 To add another focus area when less than seven boxes are drawn, right-click the image,
select Mega Pixel Setting, and select Enable Add-Focus-Area-Mode. Then draw a box on
the image.

131
3.4 Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm
The Object Counting provides bi-directional counting of objects under the surveillance area. When
defined, it could count any objects, such as people, vehicles, animals, etc.

The counter and intrusion alarm can be established with or without an AVP dongle. With an AVP
dongle, you can draw lines to mark the boundary of detection zones. Without an AVP dongle, you draw
boxes to outline the detection zones.

Note:
1. It is not recommended to apply the counter function to Fisheye cameras.
2. You can select a maximum of 32 camera channels for object counting and intrusion alarm.

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, and then select
Counter/Intrusion Alarm Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-18
2. Select the desired cameras for the counter application.
3. Select Update the Log and specify the time interval in minutes to store the counting results to the
System Log.
4. Select Show Object to put a rectangle around the object being tracked.
5. Click the Configure tab to open the Setup dialog box.

132
 3 Video Analysis

3.4.1 Object Counting

To define the counter to count target objects, click the Counter tab.

With an AVP Dongle

Set up the counter by using lines to mark the boundary of detection zones.

Figure 3-19

1. In the Choose Camera section, select a camera from the drop-down list for setup.
2. Select Enable Setting and set up the counter using the options below.
 Define Detection Zones: Select this option and use the mouse to draw lines on the
camera image to mark the boundaries of detection zones.
Switch the direction and scheme of counting. Click this button to add
green or red arrows or both.
The red arrow indicates an in direction. When an object appears in
the camera view and moves along the direction of the red arrow, it
will be counted as 1 in.
The green arrow indicates an out direction. When an object appears
in the camera view and moves along the direction of the green arrow,
it will be counted as 1 out.
Switch to another detection zone and then use button to delete
or the button to edit.

Delete the detection zone.

133
  Define Object Size: Select this option and click the button to pause live images.
Use the mouse to outline a region matching the normal size of the targeted object.

3. To test your counting settings, select Live from the Test Count drop-down list and click the
Test button to start testing. Notice how the number changes in the Counting Result section
when objects move through the detection zone. Use the Sensitivity slider to increase or
decrease detection sensitivity if the passing objects are not counted correctly.
4. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.
5. Click OK to apply the settings.
6. Start monitoring to begin counting.

More options in the Counter dialog box:

 Show Alarm Regions: Displays the detection zones on the preview image.
 Skip Frame: Skips frames when counting objects to lower the CPU loading. The system will
count objects in every other three frames approximately. Note this option may reduce the
accuracy of counting result.
 Embed Counting Results into Recorded Video: Includes counting result in the recorded
file.

134
 3 Video Analysis

Without an AVP Dongle

Set up the counter by drawing boxes to mark the detection zones.

Figure 3-20

1. In the Choose Camera section, select a camera from the drop-down list for setup.

2. Select Enable Setting and set up the counter using the options below.

 Define Detection Zones: Select this option to define the counter.

a. On the live view, draw at least two boxes to mark the in and out detection zones. Each

detection zone is numbered. You can use and to reverse or delete the
detection zone. To switch to another detection zone, click the button.
b. Click the button to define the in and out criteria. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-21

135
 c. In the Set Direction section, select In and define the direction using the drop-down
lists in the Select Detection Zone section.
d. Click the Add button. This setting appears under Detection Zones and Direction table.
e. Select Out in the Set Direction section, define the direction using the drop-down
lists in the Select Detection Zone section, and click the Add button.
f. Click OK. The directions are indicated by arrows on the live view.

You have now set up the object counter with the in and out criteria defined. In the illustrated
example (Figure 3-20), a target object is counted as in when it moves along the direction of the
red arrow through detection zone 0 and 1, and the object is counted as out when it moves
along the direction of the green arrow through detection zone 1 and 0.

 Define Object Size: Select this option and click the button to pause live images.
Use the mouse to outline a region matching the normal size of the targeted object.

3. To complete the counting setting, follow Steps 3 to 6 in With an AVP Dongle above.

Note: Draw the detection zones as closely as possible to avoid omission of counting when target
objects show up from the unmarked area and move only through one of the two boundaries.

136
 3 Video Analysis

3.4.2 Intrusion Alarm

When any object crosses or is inside the defined region, the alarm can be activated for warning. To set
the intrusion alarm, click the Alarm tab.

With an AVP Dongle

Set up the intrusion alarm by using lines to mark the boundary of detection zones.

Figure 3-22
1. In the Choose Camera section, select a camera from the drop-down list for setup.
2. Select Enable Setting and define the targeted objects using the options below.
 Define Detection Zones: See Step 2 in With an AVP Dongle in Object Counting earlier in this
chapter.
 Define Object Size: See Step 2 in With an AVP Dongle in Object Counting earlier in this
chapter.

137
  Define Image Depth: If the objects move toward or away from the camera along a path, a
hallway for example, they will appear larger when getting closer to the camera and vice versa.
You can select With Image Depth to define different object size according to the object’s

proximity to the camera. A line appears.

Figure 3-23

a. Place the line along the path where the objects will be moving by dragging the line. The
larger icon indicates the point closer to the camera and the smaller icon indicates the
point farther away from the camera.

b. Select Define Object Size. Click the larger icon and click the button to pause
live images. Use the mouse to outline the maximum and minimum size of objects when
they are close to the camera.

c. Click the smaller icon and repeat the step above to define the size of objects when
they are far from the camera.

You have now defined two sets of object sizes at the two ends of the line.

3. In the Setting section, there are two kinds of alarm modes:

 Alarm Mode 1: The alarm sets off when the target object moves through the first detection
zone and touches the second detection zone in the defined direction.
 Alarm Mode 2: The alarm sets off when the target object moves through the first detection
zone and its center moves through the second detection zone in the defined direction.
4. To set up alarm devices, configure any or both of the following options.

138
 3 Video Analysis

 Invoke Alarm: Enable the computer alarm when an object enters the defined region. Click
the button next to the option to assign a .wav sound file.
 Output Module: Enable an installed output device when an object enters the defined region.
Assign the output module and pin number.

5. To test your alarm settings, select Live from the Test Count drop-down list and click the Test
button to start testing. When the intrusion object is detected, the configured computer alarm or
output device will be activated. Use the Sensitivity slider to increase or decrease detection
sensitivity if the intrusion is not detected correctly.
6. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.
7. Click OK to apply the setting.
8. Enable monitoring to start intrusion detection.

When the intrusion event is detected, the configured computer alarm or output device will be activated,
and the event will be recorded as Intruder in System Log for later retrieval.

More options in the Alarm dialog box:

 Show Alarm Regions: Displays the detection zones on the preview image.
 Skip Frame: Skips frames when detecting intrusion events to lower the CPU loading. The system
will detect intrusion events in every other three frames approximately. Note this option may reduce
the accuracy of detection.
 Never Recycle: When the option is selected, the alarm-triggered events will not be recycled when
recycle threshold is reached.

139
 Without an AVP Dongle

Set up the intrusion alarm by drawing boxes to mark the detection zones.

Figure 3-24

1. In the Choose Camera section, select a camera from the drop-down list for setup.
2. Select Enable Setting and define the targeted objects using the options below.
 Define Detection Zones: Select this option to set up the counter.
a. On the live view, draw at least two boxes to mark the in and out detection zones. Each

detection zone is numbered. You can use and to reverse or delete the
detection zone. To switch to another detection zone, click the button.
b. Click the button to define the alarm criteria. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-25

140
 3 Video Analysis

c. In the Set Direction section, select 1 Direction for uni-direction or 2 Direction for
dual-direction criteria, and use the drop-down lists in Select Detection Zone section to
define the direction.
d. Click the Add button. This setting appears in the Detection Zones and Direction table.
e. Click OK. The directions are indicated by arrows on the live view.

You have now set up the counter with the intrusion alarm criteria defined. In the illustrated example
(Figure 3-24), when an object moves along the direction of the red arrow through detection zone 0
and 1, the alarm will be activated.

Note: Draw the detection zones as closely as possible to avoid omission of intrusion events when
target objects show up from the unmarked area and only move through one of the two boundaries.

In this case, the alarm will not set off.

 Define Object Size: See Step 2 in Without an AVP Dongle in Object Counting earlier in this
chapter.

3. To complete the intrusion alarm setting, follow Steps 3 to 8 in With an AVP Dongle in Intrusion
Alarm earlier in this chapter.

141
3.5 Object Index
The Object Index feature allows you to view the very first frame of a continuous movement in a video
stream. With Live Object Index, you may view the most recent 50 frames captured. With Object Index
Search, you may easily locate a desired event and instantly play it back by double-clicking on the
image frame.

3.5.1 Setting Object Index

You can select up to 16 cameras to view live video frames.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, and then select Object
Index/Monitor Setup. The Camera Applied Object Index/Monitor dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired cameras for the application.
3. Click the Configure button. The Object Index window appears.

Figure 3-26 Object Index

142
 3 Video Analysis

4. Select one camera from the drop-down list and enable Camera for the following setup.
 Mask Filter: Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored.
 Set Location: Click the button to assign a path to save the file.
 Keep Days: Check the item and specify the days to store the files, from 1 day to 999 days.
 Recycle: When both Keep Days and Recycle are selected, the system applies whichever
condition comes first. For example, if storage space is lower than that is required to hold the
days of data specified in Keep Days, recycle comes first.
 Video Player: Select one of these players for playback function: ViewLog or Quick Search.
 Show Object: When motion is detected, it will be outlined with a blue frame.
 Never Recycle: With the option selected, the event files of object index and face detection
will not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached.
 Noise Tolerance: Use the slider to adjust the level. The higher the level, the more tolerant
the system is to video noise.
5. In the Setup section, select Object Index.

6. Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule
later in this chapter.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

Note: The minimum storage space required for Object Index is 500 MB.

143
3.5.2 Viewing Object Index

After configuring Object Index, you can start to view the most recent frames captured, with 50 frames
at most.

1. Start camera monitoring.

2. Click the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2), and then select Live Object Index to display the
Live Viewer window.
Lock

Time ending without “…”

Time ending with “…”

Figure 3-27

The controls in the Live Viewer window:

 The Lock button: Click to pause the updating process.
 Time ending without “…”: This means the file is a complete one and can be played back with
the ViewLog or Quick Search player. Double-click the frame to play back its related video.
 Time ending with “…”: This means the video can’t be played back since the system is still
recording.

144
 3 Video Analysis

3.5.3 Searching Object Index

You can locate frames within selected cameras and a specific time frame.

1. Click the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2), and then select Search Object Index to display
the following search window.

Figure 3-28 The Search Window

2. Specify a time frame and cameras, and then click OK to start searching. The following window will
be called up.

Figure 3-29 The Moving Object List Window (left) and the Record List (right)

145
 [The Record List] The list contains the search results. Double-click a camera folder to display all
found files. Click one time-segment file (e.g. 10:00) to open its included frames in the Moving
Object List window.

[The Moving Object List window]

 Frames: Double-click any frame in the window to play back its video file with the ViewLog or
Quick Search player.
 : Click the Next Page button for the next page.
 Search: Click the button to launch the search window.
 Exit: Click the button to close the window.

Note: Every time segment is a 30-minute interval, as shown in Record list in Figure 3-29.

146
 3 Video Analysis

3.6 Automatic Video Snapshots

The Video Snapshot allows the system to continuously take 2 snapshots every second as monitoring
starts. This function gives you a choice to keep the surveillance images in still images or JPEG format
when you don’t have enough disk space to store AVI-format videos.

Note: After you start monitoring, the system will continue to take video snapshots whether there is
motion or not.

3.6.1 Setting Video Snapshots

You can select up to 16 cameras to take video snapshots.

1. Click the Configure (No. 14, Figure 1-2) button, select Video Analysis and select Object/Index
Monitor Setup. The Camera Applied Object Index/Monitor dialog box appears.

2. Select the desired cameras to be configured.

3. Click the Configure button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-30

4. Select one camera from the drop-down list and enable Camera.

147
 5. In the Setup section, select Video snapshot.

6. Click […] after Video Snapshot for further setup.

Figure 3-31

 Frames: Specifies the frequency of automatic video snapshot. By default, the system will
take 2 frames every second when the monitoring starts.

 Save as JPEG file: Saves the images in JPEG format and allows you to open the images
with Windows’ default image viewer. See Step 6 in 3.6.2 Searching Video Snapshots.

 Enable I/O Trigger: Takes snapshots only when the assigned input device is triggered.

7. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

8. Click OK to apply the settings

9. Start monitoring to take snapshots.

3.6.2 Searching Video Snapshots

You can locate snapshots within the specified cameras and period of time with Object Index Search.

1. Click the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2), and select Search Object Index. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 3-32

148
 3 Video Analysis

2. Specify a time period, select cameras, and click OK to start searching. The two windows
appear.

Figure 3-33

3. In the Record List window, expand a Camera folder to display all found date folders and
time-segment files.

4. Click one time-segment file to open its included frames in the Moving Object List window.

5. To play images with Quick Search or ViewLog player, double-click the desired frame.

6. To display the image with your default image viewer of Windows, e.g. Paint, select Show
snapshot at the bottom of the Moving Object List window and double-click the desired frame.

Note: The Show snapshot function is only available when you enable Save as JPEG file for
video snapshots. See Figure 3-31.

149
3.7 Face Detection
The Face Detection enables the GV-System to detect and record human faces. This feature captures
human faces only, ignoring other body parts, objects or background views. Moreover, it can capture
each face separately when a group of people comes in the view together.

Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, and then select Object
Index/Monitor Setting. The Camera Applied Object Index/Monitor dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired cameras to be configured.
3. Click the Configure button. The Object Index window appears.
4. Select one camera from the drop-down list and select Camera to enable the following settings.
5. In the Setup section, select Face Detection.
6. If you want to save the captured images in JPEG format, click […] after Face Detection.
a. Select Save as JPEG file to save captured faces.
b. Adjust the sensitivity. The higher the value, the more sensitive face detection is.
7. Select Noise Tolerance and use the slider to adjust the level. The higher the level, the more
tolerant the system is to video noise.
8. Click OK.
9. Start the monitoring of the configured camera(s).
10. On the main screen, click the ViewLog button (No. 13, Figure 1-2) and select Live Object Index.
When the faces are detected, the thumbnail images will appear on the Object Index Live Viewer.

Figure 3-34
11. Double-clicking one of images can play back its related video.

150
 3 Video Analysis

For details on the settings in the Object Index dialog box, see Setting Object Index earlier in this
chapter.

Note:
1. Face contour must be clearly seen.
2. Only faces tilting within the range of 15 vertically and 30 ~ 45 horizontally can be detected.
3. The face to be detected must cover at least 1/10 of the screen.
4. If you enable Save as JPEG file, the JPEG files are saved at the default path: \\GV folder\Jpg.
You can also define the storage page by using the Set Location function on the Object Index
dialog box.

151
3.8 Face Count
The Face Count function allows you to count the number of faces that appear in the image. You can
also select to invoke a computer alarm or trigger an output device when a face is detected or when the
system is unable to detect a face.

The number of faces counted is saved to the GV-Web Report, and the GV-Web Report can analyze
counting data from multiple GV-Systems. For details, see GV-Web Report User’s Manual.

Note: Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this function.

3.8.1 Installing the Camera

1. Install the camera inside an entrance pointing horizontally outward. The Face Count function is
designed to detect front-view faces only, and the area of the detected face must take up 10% to
50% of the live image.

Figure 3-35
2. Avoid installing the camera where it can be subjected to direct sunlight or reflections. The lighting
of the entrance where you set the camera should be sufficient but not be too bright or dark. Light
should be distributed evenly across faces without too much light coming from one side. If sharp
shadow edges are visible in the camera view, the count accuracy might be less than what it
normally is.

152
 3 Video Analysis

3.8.2 Setting Face Count

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Advanced Video Analysis, and click
Face Count Setting.

2. Select the cameras you would like to configure, and click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-36

3. Under Camera Selection, select a camera from the drop-down list to be configured.

4. The following configurations are available:

[Definition]

 Mask Region: Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored.

 Detected Face Size: You can adjust the Minimum Face Size and the Maximum Face
Size to instruct the system to only detect faces within that size range. You must pause the
live image by clicking the button before you can adjust the size.

[Setting]

 Alarm Type

 Face Count: Counts the number of faces. The counting results are only available on
the GV-Web Report. To connect to the GV-Web Report, refer to the Enable Web
Report option below.

 Mask Filter: Detects faces and invokes a computer alarm or triggers an output device.

 Mask Filter (Inverse Alarm): Invokes a computer alarm or triggers an output device
when the system is unable to detect a face after the number of seconds specified in
the Detection Interval.

153
  Reset at: Type a counting reset time between 0 and 23. For example, if you type 23, the
number of faces counted will become zero at 23 o’clock daily.

 Sensitivity: Adjust the detection sensitivity by moving the slider. The higher the value the
more sensitive the system to motion. The default value is 3.

 Detection Interval:

 When Mask Filter and Input I/O Trigger are both selected, the Detection Interval
slider specifies the number of seconds you want the system to detect faces when the
input device is triggered. For example, the input device is a card reader and a door
lock has been set up as the output device. After you swipe the card triggering the
reader, the system starts to detect the face for the interval specified. If the face is
detected within the interval, the door will be open; otherwise the door will remain
locked.

 When Mask Filter (Inverse Alarm) is selected, the system will attempt to detect the
faces for the number of seconds specified. For example, if you set the interval to 15
seconds, the alarm will be triggered if the system cannot detect any faces within 15
seconds after motion is detected.

[Option]

 Enable upon input trigger: The system will begin detecting only when the input device is
triggered. Assign an input module and pin number for the device.

 Saves counting results to GV-Web Report: Saves the face counting results to the
GV-Web Report. When the option is selected, a dialog box appears. Type the Domain
Name or IP Address, Port, UserName, and Password of the GV-Web Report. After
settings, click the Test button to see if the connection is succeeded.

Figure 3-37

 Invoke Alarm: Activates the computer sound alarm when faces are detected under Mask
Filter or when the system is unable to detect faces under Mask Filter (Inverse Alarm).
Click the […] button to designate a sound file to be the alarm sound.

154
 3 Video Analysis

 Output Module: Activates the output device when faces are detected under Mask Filter or
when the system is unable to detect faces under Mask Filter (Inverse Alarm). Assign an
output module and pin number for the device.

 Never Recycle: Prevents recorded events from being recycled when the recycle threshold
is reached.

5. Click the Test button to see if the settings have been configured according to your preference. If
you have set a detection interval, the test will only run for the number of seconds you specified.

6. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

8. Start monitoring to run the application.

Note:

1. Events triggered under Mask Filter or Mask Filter (Inverse alarm) will be recorded to the
System Log, and can be played back in ViewLog. In the System Log, the events are recorded as
Face Count under the Event column.

2. The face counting results will only be saved when Enable Web Report is selected and the
GV-Web Report is connected.

3. It is not recommended to apply the counter function to fisheye cameras.

155
3.9 Unattended and Missing Object Detection
The Object Monitor program can detect any unattended and/or missing object within the camera view
by highlighting its location.

3.9.1 Detecting Unattended Objects

To detect any unattended objects within the camera view, follow the steps below:

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Video Analysis, and select Object
Index/Monitor Setup. The Camera Applied Object Index/Monitor dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired cameras for the application.
3. Click the Configure button. The Object Index dialog box (Figure 3-26) appears.
4. Click the Object Monitor tab. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-38 Object Monitor

156
 3 Video Analysis

5. In the Camera field, select a desired camera for setup.

6. Select Unattended Object from the drop-down list.
7. Click the Accept check box to make other options available.
8. Use the Mask Filter function to ignore any motion detection within a certain area if necessary.
9. Click the Define Object button.
10. Use the mouse to outline the max and min detection regions separately on the screen. Every time
when finishing an outlining, you will be prompted to select Maximum Size or Minimum Size. See
the illustration below.

Figure 3-39 Defining the min. and max. detection size

11. Click the items of Show Max and Show Min in the lower of the window one by one to check your
defined sizes.
12. Click the Done button to finish the defining.
13. Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view.
14. To set up other options, see Other controls in the Object Index window in the section of Detecting
Missing Object later in this chapter.
15. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.
16. Click the OK button to apply the settings.
17. Start camera monitoring for the application.

When an unattended object appears and remains stationary for 9 seconds, its location will be
highlighted in live video, the selected alarm and output will be activated, and the event will be recorded
as Unattended Object in System Log for later retrieval.

157
3.9.2 Detecting Missing Objects

To detect any object missing from the camera view, follow the steps below:

1. Follow the Step 1 to 4 in the above Detecting Unattended Objects section to display the Object
Index dialog box (Figure 3-26).
2. In the Camera field, select a desired camera for configuration.
3. Select Missing Object from the drop-down list.
4. Check the Accept option to make other options available.
5. Click the Define Object button.
6. Use the mouse to outline regions on the object(s) you want to detect. It is recommended to outline
several regions within the object(s) to increase detection sensitivity. Notice that the outlined
regions should not be larger than the object(s). Every time when finishing an outlining, you will be
prompted to select Add Region. See the illustration below.

Figure 3-40 Outlining regions on objects

7. Click the Done button to finish the defining.

8. Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view.
9. To set up other options, see Other Controls in the Object Index Window below.
10. Click the OK button to apply the settings.
11. Start camera monitoring for the application.

When any object, which you have outlined the regions for, disappears from the camera view for 3
seconds, its location will be highlighted in live video, the selected alarm and output will be activated,
and the event will be recorded as Missing Object in System Log for later retrieval.

158
 3 Video Analysis

Other Controls in the Object Index Window:

 Show Reference Image: Click to view the saved reference image.
 Never Recycle: When this option is selected, the events of unattended and missing objects will
not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached.
 Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video: This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in
the recorded files so you can easily find out suspicious events during playback. Note that if you are
used to searching suspicious events with Object Search, do not enable this option. These flashing
boxes can cause false alarms.
Live Disable Alarm Region: When an unattended or a missing object is detected, this option
allows you to close the flashing alert box automatically or manually. Under Delay Time(s), specify
the duration of an unattended or a missing object to invoke a warning message (Figure 3-41). The
range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds.

Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42

 Luminance Change Detection: This option may suspend object detection when the lighting
condition is poor so as to avoid false detection. Use the slide bar to adjust the level of detection
from 1 to 5. The higher the level is, the more sensitive the system is to luminance change. When
luminance change reaches the level you set, the system will stop object detection.
 Sensitivity: Use the slide bar to increase or decrease detection sensitivity if necessary.

159
  Delay Time: This option allows you to specify the duration of an object missing or unattended to
invoke the detection.
Unattended Object: The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds, with 3 seconds as default.
For example, suppose you choose 12 seconds. When an unattended object appears in the
camera view for 12 seconds, its location will be highlighted.
Missing Object: The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds, with 3 seconds as default. For example,
suppose you choose 9 seconds. When a defined object disappears from the camera view for 9
seconds, its location will be highlighted.
 Invoke Alarm: Enables the computer alarm when any unattended and/or missing objects are
detected. Click the […] button next to the item to assign a .wav sound file.
 Output Module: Activates the output device when any unattended and/or missing object is
detected. Click the […] button next to the item to assign an installed output module and a pin
number.
 Demo: Click to see the demonstration from actual DVR applications.

160
 3 Video Analysis

3.10 Privacy Mask Protection

The Privacy Mask can block out sensitive areas from view, covering the areas with black boxes in both
live view and recorded clips. This feature is ideal for locations with displays, keyboard sequences (e.g.
passwords), and for anywhere else you don’t want sensitive information visible.

You can also choose to retrieve the block-out areas during playback. The retrievable areas will be
protected by password.

3.10.1 Setting a Privacy Mask

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Video Analysis, and select Privacy Mask
Setting. The Privacy Mask Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired cameras for setup, and click the Configure tab. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-43 Privacy Mask Setup

3. Select a camera from the drop-down list, and select Enable.

4. Select Un-recoverable and/or Recoverable.
 Un-recoverable: You cannot retrieve the block-out area(s) in the recorded clips.
 Recoverable: The block-out area(s) is retrievable with password protection.
5. Drag the area(s) where you want to block out on the image. You will be prompted to click Add to
save the setting. The Un-recoverable region is marked in black, while the recoverable region is
shown in red.

6. Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule
later in this chapter

7. Click OK to save the settings.

161
3.10.2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas

By default, only a Supervisor account is granted access to see the block-out areas on recorded videos.
To grant access rights to Power Users and Users, follow the steps below.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Password
Setup, and select Local Account Edit. The Password Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select one account, click the Privacy Mask tab, and check Restore Recoverable Video to grant
the privilege.

Figure 3-44

Note: If you open the event files (*.avi) directly from local disks, the valid ID and password are also
required to access the block-out areas. For more information on retrieving the block-out areas in the
exported files, see Merging and Exporting Video in Chapter 4.

162
 3 Video Analysis

3.11 Scene Change Detection

The Scene Change Detection can detect when a camera has been tampered physically. This feature
can generate an alert whenever someone or something has covered the lens of the camera, or when
the camera has been moved, or when it is out of focus.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Video Analysis, and select Scene
Change Detection Setting. The Scene Change Detection Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired cameras to be configured, and then click the Configure tab. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 3-45 Scene Change Detection Setup

 Camera: Select the camera to be configured.

 Mask region: Masks off the areas where motion will be ignored.
 Focus change: Generates an alert when the camera is out of focus.
 View change: Generates an alert when the camera has been moved, or the lens of the
camera has been covered.
 Sensitivity: Adjusts detection sensitivity. The default value is 3.

163
  Delay Time(s): Sets the duration of a scene change before an alarm condition is triggered.
 Invoke Alarm: Activates the computer alarm when a scene change is detected. Click the […]
button beside to assign a .wav sound file.
 Output Module: Activates the output device when a scene change is detected. Click the […]
button beside to assign the output module and pin number.
 Live disable alarm: Choose whether to invoke the warning message when a scene change
is detected. Click the […] button beside to display Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47

Select Auto to close the warning message (Figure 3-42) automatically or select Manual to
close it manually. Under Delay Time(s), you can define the duration of a scene change to
invoke the message. The range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds.

 Never Recycle: When this option is selected, the event files of scene changes will not be
recycled when the recycle threshold is reached.
 Demo: See three examples of Focus Change and View Change. Click the Play button to see
the demonstration.
 Skip Instant Light Change: Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms.
For example, light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly. With the option
selected, the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm
and continue monitoring. See the Note in Crowd Detection later in this chapter for possible
risk.
3. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.
4. Click OK to apply the settings.
5. Start monitoring to run the application.

When a scene change is detected, a warning message will appear on live video (if Live Disable
Alarm is enabled), the selected alarm or output will be activated, and the event will be recorded as
Scene Change in System Log for later retrieval.

164
 3 Video Analysis

3.12 Panorama View

A panorama view splices multiple camera images together and allows you to monitor a large area in
one view. There are two ways to create a panorama view: Stitching camera images together with
overlapping by matching reference points and using the Easy Mode to place camera images next to
each other with no overlapping.

The cameras selected for the panorama view will keep the recording in original format. Up to 4 sets of
panorama views can be created.

To access this feature, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Advanced Video
Analysis, select Panorama Setting, select the desired cameras on be configured, and then click the
Configure button. This dialog box appears.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12
13

14

15

Figure 3-48

165
 The controls on the Panorama View Setup dialog box:

No. Name Description

1 Add Adds an image for automatic splicing.

2 Undo Cancels the settings.

3 Manual Setting Manually splices the images together.

4 Blending Makes the spliced images seamless.

5 Demo Displays the setup procedure.

6 Left / Right Place the selected image to the left or right of the previous image.

7 Top / Bottom Place the selected image on the top or bottom of the previous image.

8 Customize Resolution Sets the width and height of the panorama view in pixels.

9 Save Before Exit Saves the created panorama view and closes the dialog box.

10 Exit Closes the dialog box.

11 Preview Window Displays the selected source image or the spliced images.

12 Easy Mode Places camera views next to each other with no overlaps.

Selects the panorama set for the images to be spliced together.

13 Panorama Selection
Clicks again to rename the panorama set.

14 Source Selects the source image to be spliced.

15 Selected Source Displays the selected image.

166
 3 Video Analysis

3.12.1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping Areas

To stitch images from different cameras together, follow these steps:

1. Select one panorama set (No. 13, Figure 3-48) from the drop-down list. If you want to rename the
selected panorama set, type the name in the field.
2. Select one camera from the Source drop-down list (No. 14, Figure 3-48) and then click Manual
Setting (No.3, Figure 3-48). This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-49
3. From the Reference drop-down list, select one camera as the Reference image. At this step, the
camera you selected at Step 2 will be the only Reference image.
4. From the Source drop-down list, select one camera as the Source image to be stitched with the
selected Reference image.
5. To stitch the two images together, click on a significant point in the Reference image and then look
for the same point in the Source image. A dialog box of point selection will prompt you to confirm.
You need to set up 3 points for stitching.

Figure 3-50

167
 Note: For the best result, position the points in the overlapping areas on both images. Avoid placing
the points in a cluster or lining them up straight.

6. The resulting image is displayed in the Preview window. If satisfied with the result, click OK to exit
the setup dialog box. If not, re-enter the 3 points for stitching.
7. If you want to stitch a third image or more, click Manual Setting and repeat Steps 3 to 5 multiple
times.
8. When you finish stitching images, click the Save Before Exit button (No.6, Figure 3-48) to save
the created panorama view before exiting the Panorama View Setup dialog box.

Note: The resolution of the images to be stitched will be reduced to 320 x 240. A panorama view
has a resolution limit of 1920 x 1080. Once the limit is reached, you cannot stitch more images to
the created panorama view.

3.12.2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area

When you have multiple camera views covering areas right next to each other with no overlaps, the
Easy Mode allows you to simply place camera views together.

Figure 3-51

1. Select Easy Mode (Video source must be the same resolution) (No. 12, Figure 3-48).

168
 3 Video Analysis

2. Use the Source drop-down list (No. 14, Figure 3-48) to select the first camera view to be placed

in the panorama and click the Add button. The first camera view is added to the Preview
Window.

Figure 3-52

3. To add a second camera view, select the camera from the Source drop-down list.

4. To place the camera view on the left or right of the first camera view, click the icon and
select to place the second view on the Left or Right of the first view.

Figure 3-53

5. To place the camera view above or below the first camera view, click the icon and select to
place the second view on the Top or Bottom of the first view.

6. Repeat the steps for any additional cameras.

169
 Note: You will only be able to add additional cameras next to the last camera view added. For
example, when adding a third camera, you can only use the direction buttons in relation to
the second camera. You will not be able to go back and select the first camera.

7. To specify the width and height of the panorama view, click the Customize Resolution icon,
select Enable and type the Width and Height in pixels.

Figure 3-54

8. When you finish stitching images, click the Save Before Exit button before exiting.

170
 3 Video Analysis

3.12.3 Accessing a Panorama View

Click the ViewLog button (No.13, Figure 1-2), point to Live Panorama View, and select the desired
panorama set from the list. This window appears.

Figure 3-55

Panorama View Controls

Right-click the panorama view to have these options:
 Snapshot: Save the current panorama view as an image file.
 Blending: Make the two images smoothly blended together. If this is not set, there can be harsh
edges in the panorama.
 Refresh Rate: When the panorama view is enabled, the system load will increase. Change the
refresh rate for the panorama images to optimize system performance. The refresh rate is from
Speed 1 (Slow) to Speed 5 (Fast).
 PIP View: Move the navigation box around to have a close-up view of the selected area. See
Picture-in-Picture View in Chapter 1.
 PAP View: Specify up to 7 close-up views by drawing navigation boxes on the panorama view.
See Picture-and-Picture View in Chapter 1.

171
3.13 Video Defogging
Smoky environments and bad weather, such as rain, snow or fog, all affect image quality and reduce
scene visibility. This feature helps to enhance image quality for live viewing.

Note: This function takes high CPU and memory usage. Make sure at least 1 GB of RAM is
installed on your system.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Advanced Video Analysis, click Defog
Setting, select up to 32 cameras to be configured, and click the Configure button. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 3-56
2. Use the drop-down list to select a camera and select Enable.
3. When the image enhancement is enabled, the system load will increase. Adjust the Refresh rate
by moving the slide bar to optimize system performance.
4. If you want to view the demonstration of this function, click the Demo button.
Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later
in this chapter.

Note:
1. This function only applies to live view and does not affect the recorded video, but it can also be
applied after a video is recorded. Refer to the Playing Back on ViewLog section in Chapter 4 for
details.
2. If dual-stream IP channels are applied, for better image quality, it is recommended to change the
streaming to single stream before you enable these video analysis effects. This effect does not
support On Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single-channel
division.

172
 3 Video Analysis

3.14 Video Stabilization

Images from a shaky camera are jittery or blurry. This feature helps to reduce camera shake, leaving
you with clear and steady images. Up to 4 cameras can be supported by this function.

Note: This function takes high CPU and memory usage. Make sure at least 1 GB of RAM is
installed on your system.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select Advanced Video Analysis, select
Stabilizer Setting, select cameras to be configured, and click the Configure button. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 3-57
2. Use the drop-down list to select one camera, and check the Enable option.
3. When the image enhancement is enabled, the system load will increase. Adjust the Refresh rate
by moving the slider to optimize system performance.

4. Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule
later in this chapter.

5. If you want to view the demonstration of this function, click the Demo button.

Note:

1. This function only applies to live view and does not affect the recorded video, but it can also be
applied after a video is recorded. Refer to the Playing Back on ViewLog section in Chapter 4 for
details.

2. If dual-stream IP channels are applied, for better image quality, it is recommended to change the
streaming to single stream before you enable video stabilization. This effect does not support On
Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single-channel division.

173
3.15 Wide Angle Lens Dewarping
This feature helps correct distortion towards the edge of the camera view.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure and select Camera
Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-58

2. Use the Camera Lens drop-down list to select Wide Angle.

3. Click the button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-59

4. Move the slider to adjust the degree of warping. The adjusted view is shown on the right.

5. Click OK.

6. On the main screen, right-click the live view, select the camera number and select Wide Angle
Lens Dewarping to apply the setting.

Note:
1. This function only applies to live view and does not affect the recorded video, but it can also be
applied after a video is recorded. Refer to the Adjusting Distorted Views section in Chapter 4 for
details.
2. If dual-stream IP channels are applied, for better image quality, it is recommended to change the
streaming to single stream before you enable wide angle lens dewarping. This effect does not
support On Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single-channel
division.

174
 3 Video Analysis

3.16 Advanced Motion Detection

To avoid false motion detection, the Advanced Motion Detection feature provides five solutions:
 Designate up to 5 levels of motion detection sensitivity for each outlined area
 Mask off unwanted areas for monitoring, such as cloud and tree movement
 Ignore video noise when the lighting condition is poor or changed
 Set a minimum and maximum object size to only detect objects within the size range
 Ignore environmental changes such as rain, snow and tree movement

Note: You can only enable either motion detection by sensitivity or by object size at a time.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Video Analysis, and then select
Advanced Motion Detection Setting. The Advanced Motion Detection Setup dialog box
appears.
2. Select the camera to be configured, and click the Configure button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-60 Advanced Motion Detection Setup

3. Select the desired camera from the drop-down list.

175
 4. To limit motion detection to objects within a size range, select User-defined and select Define
Object. Select Min. Object Size or Max. Object Size from the drop-down list and then drag an
area on the image.
5. To set detection sensitivity in a specific area, clear the selection for User-defined and click Set
region. Select a sensitivity level by moving the slider, and then drag an area on the image. This
setup has sensitivity levels from 1 to 5, with 4 as default. You can create several areas with
different sensitivity levels.
6. If you want to ignore motion in a certain area, click Mask Region, and then drag an area on the
image.
7. If you want to ignore video noise when light changes, select Noise Tolerance and use the slider
to adjust the level. The higher the level, the more tolerant the system is to video noise.
8. If you want to ignore environmental changes such as rain or snow, select Ignore environmental
changes.
9. To set minimum time for motions to be counted as motion detection, select Minimum duration
and specify the minimum number of seconds motions must exceed (Max. 60 seconds),
10. Click OK to save your settings.

Note:

1. This feature must work with the recording mode of Motion Detection: click the Configure button
(No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to System Configure, select Camera Configure, check Rec Video,
and then select Motion Detect (Figure 1-9).

2. If you have set up Motion Sensitivity and Mask Filter in the Camera Configure settings (Figure
1-10), note that the configurations of Advanced Motion Detection have priority over these
settings.

3. When Ignore environmental changes is selected, objects moving steadily and repeatedly in
the same direction for over 1.5 seconds will be filtered out and ignored.

176
 3 Video Analysis

3.17 Crowd Detection

Crowd detection is used to generate an alert when a crowd of people gathers in a specified area and
exceeds the defined time threshold.

Note: Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Advanced Video Analysis, and select
Crowd Detection Setting.

2. Select the desired camera(s) to be configured, and click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-61

3. Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop-down list.

4. By default the whole camera view is set to be the alarm region. Click the button to clear the

default setting. Click the button to freely draw the alarm region. To cancel the previously
drawn area, click the button.

5. Select Ratio of Changes. When the selected ratio of changes in the defined alarm region is
detected, the alarm will be activated. The smaller the ratio of changes, the more sensitive the
system is for changes in the camera view.

6. Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows a crowd to stay before an alarm
condition is activated.

177
 7. Every time when the system detects changes in the background image, you will be prompted for
alert. If you want to close the prompt, select Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog.

8. In the Options section, you can optionally configure these settings:

 Automatically Disable Alarm: Stops all types of triggered alerts, including computer alarm,
flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration. Disabling the alerts will not
disable alert settings and the detection in progress.

 Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video: This option will contain the flashing alert boxes
in the recorded files so that you can easily spot suspicious events during playback. Note that if
you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search, do not enable this option.
These flashing boxes can cause false alarms.

 Skip Instant Light Change: Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms.
For example, light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly. With the option
selected, the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm
and continue monitoring. See the Note below for possible risk.

 Invoke Alarm: Enables the computer alarm when an assemblage is detected. Click the […]
button next to the option to assign a .wav sound file.

 Output Module: Activates the output device when an assemblage is detected. Click the […]
button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number.

 Never Recycle: Prevents the system from recycling the event files of crowd detection when
the recycle threshold is reached.

9. You can click Test to test your settings. If an assemblage cannot be detected, decrease Ratio of
Changes to increase the system sensitivity for detection.

10. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

11. Click OK to apply the settings.

12. Start monitoring to run the application.

When a crowd of people gathers in the alarm region for the specified time, its location will be
highlighted on live video, the selected alarm or output will be activated, and the event will be recorded
as Crowd Detection in System Log for later retrieval.

178
 3 Video Analysis

Note:
For the Skip Instant Light Change option:
1. When it is selected, you may be subject to the risk that the system will not generate an alert
whenever the lens of the camera is covered by malice.
2. If the infrared camera is in use, it is not recommended to select this option.

If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm, you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this
step: Right-click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert, select
Camera, select Crowd Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset Alert.

 Reset Background Model: Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert. The
replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the
camera view to detect changes. The system will accept the crowd from this point on and no
longer generate any alert for it.

 Reset Alert: Disables and resets the triggered alert. After the alert is reset if the crowd remains
gathering over the specified tolerance time, the system will still detect it as a crowd gathering and
keep generating alert.

179
3.18 Advanced Scene Change Detection
Compared to Scene Change Detection that can only be applied in the indoors, the advanced version
of Scene Change Detection can be applied in the outdoors. The Advanced Scene Change Detection
detects and prevents any changes of scene, viewing angle or focus clearness made by malice.

Note:
1. Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application.

2. It is highly recommended not to use Advanced Scene Change Detection and Scene Change
Detection together.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Advanced Video Analysis, and select
Advanced Scene Change Detection Setting.

2. Select the desired camera(s) to be configured, and click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-62

3. Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop-down list, and configure these settings:

 Mask Region: If necessary, mask off the area on the camera view where motion will be
ignored.

 Sensitivity: Adjusts detection sensitivity. The higher the value, the more sensitive the system
is for changes in the camera view.

180
 3 Video Analysis

 Tolerance Time of Alarm: Sets the duration of scene change before an alarm condition is
activated.

 Automatically Disable Alarm: Stops all types of triggered alerts, including sound alarm,
flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration. Disabling the alerts will not
disable alert settings and the detection in progress.

 Skip Instant Light Change: Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms.
For example, light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly. With the option
selected, the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm
and continue monitoring. See the Note in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter for possible
risk.

 Invoke Alarm: Enables the computer alarm when the scene change is detected. Click the […]
button next to the option to assign a .wav sound file.

 Output Module: Activates the output device when the scene change is detected. Click the […]
button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number.

 Never Recycle: Prevents the system from recycling the event files of scene change when the
recycle threshold is reached.

4. You can click Test to test your settings. If the scene change cannot be detected, increase
Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view.

5. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

6. Click OK to apply the settings.

7. Start monitoring to run the application.

When a scene change is detected in the camera view for the specified time, its location will be
highlighted in live video, the selected alarm or output will be activated, and the event will be recorded
as Advanced Scene Change in System Log for later retrieval.

181
 If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm, you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this
step:

Right-click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert, select Camera,
select Advanced Scene Change Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset
Alert.

 Reset Background Model: Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert. The
replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the
camera view to detect changes. The system will accept the scene change from this point on and
no longer generate any alert for it.

 Reset Alert: Disables and resets the triggered alert. After the alert is reset, if the scene change
remains over the specified tolerance time, the system will still detect it as a scene change and
keep generating alert.

182
 3 Video Analysis

3.19 Advanced Unattended Object Detection

Compared to Unattended Object Detection that can only be applied in the indoors, the advanced
version of Unattended Object Detection can be applied in the outdoors. The Advanced Unattended
Object Detection can generate an alert when any unattended object stays within the camera view.

Note:
1. Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application.

2. It is highly recommended not to use Advanced Unattended Object Detection and Unattended
Object Detection together.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Advanced Video Analysis, and select
Advanced Unattended Object Detection Setting.

2. Select the desired camera(s) to be configured, and click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-63

3. Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop-down list.

4. If necessary, use the Mask Region function to mask off the area on the camera view where
motion will be ignored.

5. Select Unattended Object Size, and click the Camera icon to pause live images.

183
 6. Outline Min Object Size on the camera view, and select Max Object Size from the drop-down list
and outline it on the camera view.

7. Select Sensitivity. The higher the value, the more sensitive the system is for changes in the
camera view.

8. Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows any unattended object to stay before an
alarm condition is activated.

9. Every time when the system detects changes in the background image, you will be prompted for
alert. If you want to close the prompt, select Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog.

10. In the Options section, configure these settings:

 Automatically Disable Alarm: Stops all types of triggered alerts, including computer alarm,
flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration. Disabling the alerts will not
disable alert settings and the detection in progress.

 Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video: This option will contain the flashing alert boxes
in the recorded files so that you can easily spot suspicious events during playback. Note that if
you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search, do not enable this option.
These flashing boxes can cause false alarms.

 Skip Instant Light Change: Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms.
For example, light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly. With the option
selected, the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm
and continue monitoring. See the Note in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter for possible
risk.

 Invoke Alarm: Enables the computer alarm when an unattended object is detected. Click the
[…] button next to the option to assign a .wav sound file.

 Output Module: Enables the output device when an unattended object is detected. Click the
[…] button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number.

 Never Recycle: With the option selected, the event files of unattended object detection will
not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached.

11. You can click Test to test your settings. If the unattended object cannot be detected, increase
Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view.

12. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

13. Click OK to apply the settings

14. Start monitoring to run the application.

184
 3 Video Analysis

When any unattended object is detected in the camera view for the specified time, its location will be
highlighted in live video, the selected alarm or output will be activated, and the event will be recorded
as Advanced Unattended Object in System Log for later retrieval.

If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm, you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this
step: Right-click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert, select
Camera, select Advanced Unattended Object Detection and select either Reset Background
Model or Reset Alert.

 Reset Background Model: Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert. The
replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the
camera view to detect changes. The system will accept the unattended object from this point on
and no longer generate any alert for it.

 Reset Alert: Disables and resets the triggered alert. After the alert is reset if the object remains
unattended over the specified tolerance time, the system will still detect it as an unattended
object and keep generating alert.

185
3.20 Advanced Missing Object Detection
Compared to Missing Object Detection that can only be applied in the indoors, the advanced version of
Missing Object Detection can be applied in the outdoors. The Advanced Missing Object Detection can
generate an alert when any object disappears from the camera view.

Note:
1. Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application.

2. It is highly recommended not to use Advanced Missing Object Detection and Missing Object
Detection together.

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), click Advanced Video Analysis, and select
Advanced Missing Object Detection Setting.

2. Select the desired camera(s) to be configured, and click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-64

3. Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop-down list.

4. Click the button to outline the regions on the objects you want to detect. To cancel the
previously drawn area, click the button.

5. Select Sensitivity. The higher the value, the more sensitive the system is for changes in the
camera view.

186
 3 Video Analysis

6. Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows any object missing before an alarm
condition is activated.

7. Every time when the system detects changes in the background image, you will be prompted for
alert. You can disable the prompt by selecting Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog.

8. In the Options section, configure these settings:

 Automatically Disable Alarm: Stops all types of triggered alerts, including sound alarm,
flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration. Disabling the alerts will not
disable alert settings and the detection in progress.

 Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video: This option will contain the flashing alert boxes
in the recorded files so that you can easily spot suspicious events during playback. Note that if
you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search, do not enable this option.
These flashing boxes can cause false alarms.

 Skip Instant Light Change: Ignores sudden illumination changes to avoid false alarms. For
example, light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly. With the option selected,
the system will ignore significant illumination changes and continue monitoring. See the Note
in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter.

 Invoke Alarm: Enables the computer alarm when an object is detected to be missing. Click
the […] button next to the option to assign a .wav sound file.

 Output Module: Enables the output device when an object is detected to be missing. Click
the […] button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number.

 Never Recycle: With the option selected, the event files of missing object detection will not
be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached.

9. You can click Test to test your settings. If the missing object cannot be detected, increase
Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view.

10. To activate the function at certain times only, click the Schedule button and select Active
Schedule. For details, see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter.

11. Click OK to apply the settings.

12. Start monitoring to run the application.

When any object, which you have outlined the regions for, disappears from the camera view for the
specified time, its location will be highlighted in live video, the selected alarm or output will be activated,
and the event will be recorded as Advanced Missing Object in System Log for later retrieval.

187
 If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm, you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this
step:

Right-click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert, select Camera,
select Advanced Missing Object Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset
Alert.

 Reset Background Model: Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert. The
replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the
camera view to detect changes. The system will accept the object missing from this point on and
no longer generate any alert for it.

 Reset Alert: Disables and resets the triggered alert. After the alert is reset if the object remains
missing over the specified tolerance time, the system will still detect it as a missing object and
keep generating alert.

188
 3 Video Analysis

3.21 Video Analysis Schedule

A schedule monitoring is available in most of Advanced Video Analysis and Video Analysis
functions. This feature allows you to maximize the use of cameras and video analysis effects on each
camera. With this feature, you can set multiple video analysis effects on each camera at different
times.

For example, previously when you want to configure Counter Setting to count the number of people
during work hours and also configure Intrusion Alarm Setting for thief detection after work hours, you
will require 2 cameras at the same location for this scenario. But with the feature, you can set a
schedule with just 1 camera to do Counter Setting between 7AM-5PM (working hours) and Intrusion
Alarm Setting between 5PM-7AM (after work hours).

Only a few functions of video analysis do not support the schedule feature. These functions are
Camera Popup Setting, Advanced Motion Detection, Video Lowpass Filter Setting and
Panorama Setting.

To set the Video Analytic schedule:

1. Click the Configure (No. 14, Figure 1-2) button, select Video Analysis or Advanced Video
Analysis, select a supported analysis function, select the cameras to be configured and click
Configure. For this example, Counter/Intrusion Alarm Setting is selected and this dialog box
appears.

Figure 3-65

189
 2. Click the Schedule button in the bottom left corner of the dialog box. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-66

3. Select Enable to apply video analytic schedule.

4. Select Span 1 and specify a time period. The period that you specify is effective from Monday
through Sunday.

5. Set more spans based on your requirements.

6. To have the video analysis function all day on the weekend, select Weekend Apply and define
whether the weekend includes Sunday & Saturday or Sunday Only.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

190
 3 Video Analysis

3.21.1 Privacy Mask Schedule

The schedule setting of Privacy Mask allows you to disable the function during holidays and
weekends.

1. Click the Configure (No. 14, Figure 1-2) button, select Video Analysis, select Privacy Mask
Setting, select the cameras to be configured and click Configure.

2. Click the Schedule button.

Figure 3-67

3. Select Enable to enable video analytic schedule.

4. Select Span 1 and specify a time period. The period that you specify is effective from Monday
through Friday.

5. Set more spans based on your needs.

6. Set the schedule for holidays and weekends by selecting Enable according to time span,
Enable all day or Disable.

7. Use the Priority drop-down list to select whether to use the schedule setting for Holiday or
Weekend when the holiday is on a weekend.

8. Click OK to apply the settings.

191
3.22 Fisheye View
A fisheye camera allows you to cover all angles of a location with just one fisheye camera. The
distorted hemispherical image produced by the fisheye camera will be converted to a conventional
rectilinear projection.

You can choose among four view modes and adjust the PTZ views to different angles.

Quad view: 4 PTZ views 360 degree: 2 PTZ view & 1 360º view

Dual 180 degree: 2 180º views Single view: 1 PTZ view

Figure 3-68

192
 3 Video Analysis

3.22.1 Setting Up a GV-Fisheye Camera

1. Right-click the image of the fisheye camera, select the camera number, and select Geo Fisheye.

2. To customize the fisheye settings, right-click the image and select Fisheye Option. The following
configurations are available:

 Camera Modes: You can choose among four view modes.

 Geo Fisheye: Quad view: Composed of four PTZ views.

 Geo Fisheye: 360 degree: Composed of two PTZ views and one 360º panoramic
view.

 Geo Fisheye: Dual 180 degree: Composed of two 180º views.

 Geo Fisheye: Single view: Composed of one PTZ view. This view mode supports
the advanced Picture-in-Picture (PIP) function, which allows you to have a close-up
dewarped image within the surveillance area without missing the entire view.

 Camera Position: Select Ceiling, Wall or Ground according to where the camera is
mounted.

 Adjust Auto Pan Speed At Top-Left Channel: Select low, medium, or high speed to
enable Auto Pan for one PTZ view at the rotation speed of your choice. This option applies
to Quad view, 360 degree and Single view.

 Zoom: Select Zoom In or Zoom Out and then click on the image.

 Show Source Video At Top-Right Channel: You can display the circular source image in
the top-right quadrant when Quad view is selected.

 Fisheye Settings:

Figure 3-69

193
  Screen Ratio Setting: Sets the display ratio to be 4:3 or 16:9.

 Wide View: Increases the height of the 180 degree view when camera position is set
to wall mount.

Figure 3-70: Wide View Disabled Figure 3-71: Wide View Enabled

 Hardware Acceleration: Dewarps fisheye view processed by GPU to lower CPU

loading. Select Apply All to apply the hardware acceleration to other fisheye views.

 Frame Rate Control: Limits the frame rate of the fisheye live view to the number
specified here. Select Apply All to apply the frame rate control to other fisheye views.

 Show Original Video in Low Resolution: Shows source video when resolution is
low.

Note: The default setting for Hardware Acceleration is enabled for GPU dewarping and it
automatically detects the Screen Ratio Setting. If you clear Hardware Acceleration, it changes to
CPU dewarping and you can select the Screen Ratio Setting.

3. You can drag and drop PTZ view or 180 degree view to adjust the viewing angle.

194
 3 Video Analysis

3.22.2 Setting Up a Third-Party Fisheye Camera

rd
You can also enable dewarping for 3 party fisheye cameras and access fisheye related functions.

1. To set up a third-party fisheye camera, click the Configure button, select System Configure and
select Camera Configure.

 To set up a camera installed with an ImmerVision IMV1 Panorama Lens, under Camera
Lens, select IMV1 Panomorph. On the main screen, click the camera number and select
IMV1 Panomorph to dewarp images. For details see .Step 2 in Setting Up a GV-Fisheye
Camera earlier in this chapter.

 For other third-party fisheye cameras, under Camera Lens, select Fisheye. On the main
screen, click the camera number and select Fisheye to dewarp images. For details
see .Step 2 in Setting Up a GV-Fisheye Camera earlier in this chapter.

Figure 3-72

2. To adjust the image alignment for optimal results, right-click the camera image, select Fisheye
Option and select Image Alignment. In the dialog box, align the dotted circle with the outer edge
of the camera image, and then align it with the inner edge of the image frame.

195
 Outer Edge
Inner Edge

Figure 3-73

3. . To access fisheye related functions, right-click the camera image and select Fisheye Option.

Note:

1. For GV-Fisheye Cameras, the image alignment function is only available on its Web interface.

2. Regardless of the view mode selected here, the hemispherical fisheye source image will be
recorded. When playing back the events in ViewLog, the GV-System will reconvert the source
image to different view modes according to your preference. To see how to play back the events
in fisheye view mode, see Playback Screen Layout in Chapter 4.

3. To enable fisheye functions through WebCam Server, you must first set the fisheye view to
megapixel resolution in WebCam settings. Refer to Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream
in Chapter 8 for more details.

196
 3 Video Analysis

3.22.3 Object Tracking

You can now set up object tracking in fisheye live view to track moving object. The function is only
available when the fisheye camera mode is set to be Geo Fisheye: 360 degree. When motion is
detected in the fisheye, the top-right channel will start tracking the moving object and in the 360 degree
view at the bottom, the moving object will be highlighted.

Figure 3-74

2. Right-click the fisheye view, select the camera number and select Geo Fisheye.
3. Right-click the fisheye view, select Fisheye Option, select Camera Mode and select Geo
Fisheye: 360 degree.
4. Right-click the fisheye view, select Fisheye Option, select 360 Object Tracking and select
Advanced Settings. This dialog box appears.

Figure 3-75

197
 5. Use the options below to customize object tracking.
 Mask Region: Use the mouse to outline a mask region where motion will be ignored.

 Object Size: Click the button to pause the live view and then use the mouse to outline
the maximum and minimum size of the targeted object.

 Dwell Time of Motion: After a targeted object stops moving, the highlighted region and the
top-right channel will remain fixed on the area for the number of seconds specified. Any new
motion detected during the dwell time will be ignored to prevent the camera view from
frequently jumping from one area to another.

 Schedule: Click Schedule to activate object tracking at certain times only. Refer to Video
Analysis Schedule earlier in this chapter for more details.

6. Right-click the fisheye view, select Fisheye Option, select 360 Object Tracking and select
Tracking to enable object tracking.

198
 3 Video Analysis

3.23 Specifications
Feature Notes

 1 GB of RAM minimum required

Panorama View
 4 sets of panorama view for live view monitoring

 9 MB of RAM minimum required for each channel

Defogging
 Maximum of 32 channels
 6 MB of RAM minimum required for each channel
Stabilizer
 Maximum of 4 channels
Crowd Detection  Maximum of 16 channels
Advanced Scene Change Detection /
Advanced Unattended Object Detection /  Maximum of 16 channels
Advanced Missing Object Detection
Scene Change Detection  3 MB of RAM minimum required for each channel
 7 fps and 9 MB of RAM minimum required for each
channel
Object Counting  Maximum of 16 channels
 512 MB of RAM and Pentium 4 Dual Core 2.13 GHz
of CPU required for 8 or more cameras
 3 MB of RAM minimum required for each channel
 Maximum of 250 detection boxes can be set
Privacy Mask
 The overall size of detection boxes cannot exceed
102400 bytes.
Face Count  Maximum of 16 channels
Object Index /  7 fps and 14 MB of RAM minimum required for each
Object Monitor / channel
Face Detection /  Maximum of 16 channels
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Note: To use two or more of the following functions simultaneously, at least 2 GB of RAM is required:
Advanced Video Analysis, Video Analysis, IP Camera and Pre-Record by Memory.

199
 Chapter 4

Video Playback................................... 202

4.1 Playing Back on ViewLog .............................................................. 203
4.1.1 Playback Screen Layout............................................................................ 206
4.1.2 Playback Control Buttons ......................................................................... 207
4.1.3 Recycling Option for Video Files ............................................................ 209
4.1.4 Bookmarking a Frame ................................................................................ 210
4.1.5 Searching a Video Event ........................................................................... 212
4.1.6 Merging and Exporting Video .................................................................. 217
4.1.7 Extracting Frames from a Video Event ................................................ 224
4.1.8 Saving Images............................................................................................... 225
4.1.9 Printing Images ............................................................................................ 226
4.1.10 Setting Face Mask .................................................................................... 227
4.1.11 Displaying GPS Data................................................................................. 228
4.1.12 Adjusting Distorted Views ..................................................................... 229
4.1.13 Object Tracking in Fisheye View ......................................................... 230
4.1.14 Event Search Limitation.......................................................................... 232
4.1.15 Advanced Settings .................................................................................... 233
4.2 Object Search.................................................................................... 240
4.3 Advanced Log Browser................................................................... 243
4.3.1 Filter Settings ............................................................................................... 245
4.4 Quick Search ..................................................................................... 247
4.4.1 Event Query Settings.................................................................................. 249
4.4.2 Advanced Search Settings ....................................................................... 250
4.5 Address Book .................................................................................... 251
4.5.1 Creating a Host Account........................................................................... 251
4.5.2 Creating a Group .......................................................................................... 252
4.5.3 Creating a Folder Link................................................................................ 252
4.5.4 Connecting from Address Book .............................................................. 253
4.5.5 Importing and Exporting the Address Book ....................................... 253
4.6 Remote ViewLog Service .............................................................. 254
4.6.1 Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host .......................................... 254
4.6.2 Retrieving Images of Object Index ........................................................ 255
4.6.3 Resuming Backup ........................................................................................ 256
4.7 Single Player ...................................................................................... 257
4.7.1 Single Player Window ................................................................................. 257

200
4.8 GPS Tracks Playback...................................................................... 259
4.9 Touch Screen Support .................................................................... 261
4.10 Fast Key Reference ....................................................................... 262
4.11 Specifications ................................................................................. 262

201
 4
CHAPTER

Video Playback
Recorded files can be played back using different software applications offered by the system –
ViewLog, Quick Search, Remote Playback System and Remote Playback System WebCam version.
Following is a comparison table for these applications. This is not a complete comparison table,
because many of these features are discussed in details throughout the manual. However, this table
may help you to decide which application to use under a given situation.

Application Description

A full-function player, allowing you to play back video, search a video

ViewLog event, merge and export video and etc. See 4.1 Playing Back on
ViewLog.
A more convenient tool that allows you to search video files recorded
Object Search
on motion or alarm. See 4.2 Object Search.

Quick Search Searches and plays back POS events. See 4.4 Quick Search.

Remote Playback Server No additional software installation is necessary. Just play back using
WebCam version your Web browser. See Remote Viewing in Chapter 8.
Plays back the backup recorded files. Provides simple and easy
Single Player
playback functions. See 4.8 Single Player.

202
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1 Playing Back on ViewLog

The ViewLog plays back recorded video files without affecting recording. There are two ways to launch
ViewLog:
 Start VideoLog from the GV folder (Windows Start menu/Programs)
 On the Main System, click the ViewLog button (No.13, Figure 1-2) and then select Video/Audio
Log. Or press [F10] on the keyboard.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

9
10

11

12
13
21

19 18 17 16 15 14 20

Figure 4-1 The ViewLog Window

Without further settings you can play back the event by clicking the Play button on Playback Panel.
Click the View Mode button (No. 8, Figure 4-1) to switch the current view mode to a multi-channel view.
Use controls on Playback Panel to view the event in the way you want. Move the slider in Playback
Meter (No. 12, Figure 4-1) forward and backward to navigate video frames.

To play back multiple events, keep pressing [CTRL] on the keyboard and highlight the desired events
on the Video Event List (No. 6, Figure 4-1). Then click the Play button to play these events. To select
events from different dates, click the date from the Date Tree (No. 4, Figure 4-1). Events of that date
will be listed in the Video Event List.

203
 The controls in the ViewLog window:
No. Name Description
1 Camera Name Indicates the given camera name.
2 Camera View Displays the playback video.
3 Arrow Switch Switches between List Mode and Line Mode. Sets up MDB filter.
4 Date Tree Displays date folders.
5 Display Option Specifies the event type to display in List Mode or Line Mode.
6 Video Event List Displays video events within a certain date folder.
7 Camera Select Sets a desired camera for display.
Sets screen divisions: Single View, Panorama View, Quad View or
Multi View. Single View also includes these options: Standard,
8 View Mode
Thumbnail, Mega Pixel (PIP), Mega Pixel (PAP), Geo Fisheye and
IMV1 Panomorph.
Accesses basic search, advanced search and bookmark. Reloads
9 Advanced
video event list.
10 Normal Displays or closes the Timeline or Video Event List.
11 Function Panel Provides various settings for ViewLog.
12 Slider Moves the slider to rewind or forward the video during playback.
13 Audio Playback Enables audio playback.
14 Playback Panel Contains typical playback control buttons.
A highlighted icon indicates an enabled function. From left to right are
the wide angle lens dewarping, defogging function, stabilizer function,
reconnection to Remote ViewLog, A to B Mode, auto playing of next
15 Function Icons
events, the contrast and brightness function, the light enhancement
and equalization function, the sharpness and smoothness function
and the grayscale function.
16 Playback Speed Indicates the playback speed x1 represents normal playback speed.
17 Time Display Indicates the time of the playback video.
18 Date Display Indicates the date of the playback video.
19 Exit Closes or minimizes the ViewLog window.
20 A to B Mode Plays repeatedly the set frames A to B.
Plays back video frame by frame, on real time, with smooth playback
21 Playback Mode
or with just key frames.

204
 4 Playing Back Video Files

Figure 4-2 Function Panel

The controls in the Function Panel:

No. Name Description
Adds effects to the images. The effect options include:
Contrast/Brightness, Light Enhancement, Equalization, Sharpen,
Smooth, Grayscale, Undo to Prev. Action, Undo All Effects, Copy Image
1 Effects
to Clipboard, Sample, and Advanced Video Analysis (Defog, Stabilizer,
Wide Angle Lens Dewarping).
See Adjusting Distorted Views later in this chapter.
Save a video file as avi or exe format.
2 Save As AVI
See Merging and Exporting Video later in this chapter.
Save a video image as bmp, jpg, gif, png, or tif format.
3 Save As Image
See Saving Images later in this chapter.

4 Print Specifies various settings for printing.

Accesses system settings of ViewLog.

5 Setting
See Advanced Settings later in this chapter.
Brings up these options: Object Search, Advanced Log Browser, Delete
Log, Remote ViewLog Service, Remote Storage System, Address Book,
6 Tools Display GIS Window, Select Map API, and Tool Kit.
See Object Search, Advanced Log Browser, Remote ViewLog Service
later in this chapter.
7 Backup Backs up video files. See Chapter 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair.

205
4.1.1 Playback Screen Layout

Click the View Mode button (No. 8, Figure 4-1) any time when you want to change the current view
mode.
 Single View: Includes the following types of layouts:
Standard: Displays one playback channel only.
Thumbnail: Reviews images frame by frame in thumbnails,.
Mega Pixel (PIP): For details, see Picture-in-Picture View in Chapter 1.
Mega Pixel (PAP): For details, see Picture-and-Picture View in Chapter 1.
Geo Fisheye: Displays the recorded fisheye images in different view modes. For details,
see Fisheye View in Chapter 3.
IMV1 Panomorph: Displays the fisheye images recorded with an ImmerVision IMV1
Panorama Lens in different view modes.
 Panorama View: For details, see Panorama View in Chapter 3.
 Quad View: Plays back in a quad layout. For details, see [Quad View] in Advanced Settings later
in this chapter.
 Multi View: Plays back up to 16 camera recordings. For details, see [Multi View] in Advanced
Settings later in this chapter.

The option of Thumbnail View is disabled while a video file is playing back. Wait until the video ends or
click the Pause button to make the option available.

In a thumbnail view, a video file is divided into a set of frames. The frames are displayed in 25
playback windows, shown as follows. This helps to locate required frames you may otherwise miss by
other viewing methods.

Figure 4-3

206
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.2 Playback Control Buttons

Real Time /
Frame by Frame /
Playback Scroll Audio Playback Just Key Frame /
Smooth Playback

Home Rewind Stop Next Frame Speed A to B Mode

Previous Frame Play / Pause End Zoom

Figure 4-4

Playback Mode Option

By default, the ViewLog is set to play back video in real time mode. To change playback modes, find

the button on the Playback Control Panel.

 Frame by Frame (without audio): Plays back video frame by frame without audio. This method
delays playback depending on bandwidth and computer performance, but all video frames are
fully played back. When the view mode is set to be Panorama View, Quad View or Multi View, this
is the default play mode.

 Real Time: Plays back video on real time. This method saves waiting time for rendering, but drop
frames to give the appearance of real-time playback. When the view mode is set to be Single, the
default play mode is Real Time.

 Just Key Frame: Plays back the most representative frames of video. When your network
bandwidth is limited, select this option to enhance the playback smoothness.

 Smooth Playback: When the playback appears choppy, select this option to enhance the
smoothness.

Note:
1. For the MJPEG codec, every frame is key frame.
2. The Key Frame function only works on V8.3.3 or later.

207
 Zoom Function

When you zoom in, the video will be automatically switched to Picture-in-Picture (PIP) mode if the
video resolution exceeds the ViewLog panel. For recordings higher than D1 resolution, you can zoom
up to 32 times the original image size; for recordings lower than D1 resolution, you can zoom up to 8
times the original image size.

A to B Playback Mode
When playing video events, you can set a starting and an ending frame for auto-playing:

1. To set the starting frame A, click the A to B Mode button (Figure 4-4). The message A to B Mode
(Set A) appears on the screen.
2. To set the ending frame B, click the A to B Mode button. The message A to B Mode (Set B)
appears on the screen.

ViewLog will start playing the set frames A to B repeatedly. To stop the playing, click the A to B Mode
button; the message A to B Mode (Cancelled) will appear.

208
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.3 Recycling Option for Video Files

You can choose whether to recycle your video files. To apply this function, follow the steps below.

1. Select a desired video event from Video Event List (No. 6, Figure 4-1), and then right-click it to call
up a menu as shown below.

The never-recycling flag

The never-recycling option

Figure 4-6
2. Select the Mark Never Recycle option. A never-recycling flag will appear next to the video event.
3. To disable the never-recycling function, right-click the video event again and select Unmark
Never Recycle.

Unmarking All Never-Recycling Flags

The above step 3 illustrates how to unmark never-recycling flag one by one. When you like to unmark
all the never-recycling flags in certain cameras, follow the steps below.

1. Shut down ViewLog and Main System if they are running.

2. Go to the Windows Start menu, select Programs, point to the GV folder, and then click
RepairLog500.exe. A valid ID and a password are required.

3. When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears, select the cameras of video
files that you want to unmark their never-recycling flags.

4. Click OK to open the Repair Database dialog box. See Figure 5-8 in Chapter 5.

5. Clear the selection of Reserve Never-recycle Flag.

6. Click the Use Default Path button to unmark all the never-recycling flags.

Reserving Never-Recycling Flags

If you like to reserve all the never-recycling flags you marked on video events even after repairing the
database, select Reserve Never-recycle Flag on the Repair Database window before making repairs.
See Figure 5-8 in Chapter 5.

209
4.1.4 Bookmarking a Frame

You can create a bookmark for a video frame and later return to that frame quickly or resume a video
from where you bookmarked.

Creating a Bookmark

1. Click the Pause button at the frame you want to bookmark.

2. Right-click the frame and select Add to Bookmark. The Bookmark Description dialog box
appears.

Figure 4-7

3. Type the text for the bookmark label.

Note: By default, bookmarked frames are saved at :\GVxxx\Bookmark and are in JPEG format.

210
 4 Playing Back Video Files

Viewing a Bookmark

1. Click the Advanced button (No. 9, Figure 4-1) and select Bookmark. The Bookmark window
appears.

Figure 4-8

2. In the Camera drop-down list, select a desired camera to display its bookmarks, or select All to
display all the bookmarks.

3. To change a bookmark displayed at the front, click the desired bookmark behind the one at the
front. You can also select List Mode to display all bookmarks in the thumbnail view.

4. To resume playback from a bookmark, double-click the bookmark. The bookmarked frame is
displayed on the ViewLog window. Click the Play button to play the video for up to 5 minutes.

5. To rename, delete or import the bookmark, right-click the desired bookmarked frame to have
these options.

211
4.1.5 Searching a Video Event

ViewLog offers four search methods: Basic Search, Advanced Search, List Mode and Line Mode. The
four methods allow you to locate a video event recorded by a specific camera and during a specific
time period.

Basic Search
1. Click the Advanced button (No. 9, Figure 4-1) and select Basic Search. This dialog box appears.
Alternatively, press [CTRL] + [F8] on the keyboard to call it up.

Figure 4-9

2. If you want to search the video events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period, select
Search event in DST.
3. Specify a desired date and time.
4. Click the Search button for the search. If the specified time can’t be found, a prompt will appear
for you to select a next or previous video event available.

212
 4 Playing Back Video Files

Advanced Search
1. Click the Advanced button (No. 9, Figure 4-1) and select Advanced Search. This dialog box
appears. Alternatively, press [F8] on the keyboard to call it up.

Figure 4-10

2. If you want to search the video events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period, select
Search event in DST.
3. Specify the desired date, time period, and cameras for search.
4. Click OK to start searching.
5. In the Video Event list, the events matching the search criteria will be highlighted in gray color.
Click the Play button to play back the highlighted events.

213
 List Mode and Line Mode

The List Mode and Line Mode allow you to see video events listed by date and to search events by
event types or a POS item. The List Mode displays events in an Event List, while the Line Mode
displays events in a timeline. To switch between the two modes:

1. Click the Normal button. The List Mode or the Line Mode window appears.

2. Click the arrow on the top left corner.

Figure 4-11

3. Select Switch Time Mode, and select List Mode to see the Video Event List or Line Mode to
see the Event Timeline.

List Mode

1. Select a camera from the drop-down list.

2. Click the date tree to see video events recorded on that day.

3. To choose what information to display in the Video Event List or to search by event types or a
POS item, select one of the following display options from the drop-down list.

Figure 4-12

214
 4 Playing Back Video Files

 Event Only: Lists the video events only.

 Event + Total Frame: Lists the video events and their total number of frames.

 Event + Total Time: Lists the video events and their total time length.

 Event + Total Size: Lists the video events and their total file size.

 Never-Recycle Events: Lists the never recycle video events only.

 Monitor Table: Lists the types of video events selected in MDB filter. See the section below
on how to set up the MDB filter.

 POS Table: Lists the video events with the item specified in MDB filter for each POS device.
See the section below on how to set up the MDB filter.

Line Mode

Figure 4-13

1. To see video events on a particular day, click the date tree.

2. Move the mouse pointer on the desired blue block of that camera, and right-click it to have the
sub Timelines of hour mode and minute mode. Three types of timeline modes are available:

 Change to day mode: The default mode displaying at which hour the events have been
recorded.
 Change to hour mode: Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which minute the events have
been recorded.
 Change to minute mode: Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which second the events
have been recorded.

3. To display the audio information for each camera on the timeline, select Display Audio
Information.

215
 4. To search events by event types or a POS item, select Display MDB Information and click the
Arrow button. Select Monitor Table to see the events types selected in the MDB filter and select
POS Table to see the POS item specified in the MDB filter. The selected event types or POS
item are marked in orange. See the section below on how to set up the MDB filter.

Setting up the MDB filter:

1. Click the arrow on the top-left corner of the event search window.

2. Select MDB Filter. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-14

3. Select the types of events or type the POS item you want to search.

4. Click OK.

Note: The MDB filter only sorts out the events recorded in the System Log. To record motion
detection events in the System Log, ensure to select Register Motion Event (Configure button >
System Configure > Camera Configure).

216
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.6 Merging and Exporting Video

You can merge several video files into a single file and export it in AVI format. You can also choose to
export the file in EXE format which allows you to play video with any multimedia player.

Simple Merge
Simple Merge allows you to merge several video files into a single file.

Note: The maximum size of the merged file is 2 GB. If the merged file is over the limit, it will be split
up into another file.

1. From the Video Event list (No. 6, Figure 4-1), select one event or several events by using Ctrl +
left click.

2. Select the screen division from the View Mode button (No. 8, Figure 4-1).

3. Click the Save As AVI button (No. 2, Figure 4-2). This dialog box appears.

Alternatively, press [S] on the keyboard to call it up.

Figure 4-15 Save AVI File

217
 4. Drag the timelines to define a starting and ending time of the file.

5. If the video event has the Privacy Mask settings, and you want to retrieve the recoverable
block-out area(s) in the exported file, type a valid ID and password in the Remove Recoverable
Privacy Mask region(s) field. If you want to remain the recoverable block-out area(s) in the
exported file, leave the field blank.

6. If you want to add more Privacy Masks onto the video, follow the instructions in Privacy Mask
Settings later in this chapter.

7. If you want to save the video file in the codec type that it was originally recorded in, enable Direct
Merge (Higher Speed).

Note: Once the Direct Merge (Higher Speed) is enabled, you will not be able to customize settings
such as codec selection, privacy mask recoverability and digital watermark, but the time required for
conversion is significantly reduced.

8. To configure the saving path and format of the exported video, click the Setting tab. For details
see AVI File Settings later in this chapter.

9. Click OK to export and save the file.

218
 4 Playing Back Video Files

Advanced Merge
Advanced Merge allows you to merge several AVI files into a big single file or into a number of files of a
set duration.

1. On the function panel, click the Save as AVI button (No. 2, Figure 4-2) and select Advanced
Merge. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-16

2. In the Time Period section, specify Start and End time to locate files. The number of video and
audio files for each camera found within the specified time is displayed on the left camera list. For
example, “Camera 9 18+0” means the Camera 9 has created 18 video files and 0 audio files
within the specified time. By default you can only merge the files of one day.

3. In the Merge Mode section, select one of the merging methods:

 Single File: Merges several AVI files into a single file. The maximum size of the merged file is
2 GB for FAT32 and NFTS file systems. If the merged file exceeds the limit of Windows file
system, it will be split up into another file.
 Multiple Files: Merges AVI files into several files of a specific duration. After specifying the
duration, you can see the number of merged files will be created.
 Direct Merge (Higher Speed): The merging method only joins video files together without
the inclusion of their video effects, such as privacy masks, watermarks, time stamps, GPS
data and etc.

219
  Using the Direct Merge to merge several AVI files into a single file, also select Single
File.
 Using the Direct Merge to merge AVI files based on the specified duration, also select
Multiple Files.
 To merge audio and video together, click the arrow button and select Include Audio.
Since the exclusion of video effects, the Direct Merge is faster than the other two merging
methods.

4. In the Output Location section, specify the storage location of merged files, and select whether
to save merged files in EXE format.

5. In the Advanced Operation section:

 If you select Single File at the step 3, click the button to configure video effects to
merged files. For details, see Merging and Exporting Video earlier in this chapter.
 If you select Multiple File at the step 3, you can define different video effects for each time
segment. Select a period of time and click the button to define the video effects to the
specific time segment.

6. Click Start to begin merging files.

220
 4 Playing Back Video Files

Exporting PIP / PAP View

You can apply PIP (Picture-in-Picture) or PAP (Picture-and-Picture) view to a recorded video and then
export the video. The video will be played back in PIP or PAP view.

1. Select a recorded video, click the View Mode button, select Single View and select Mega Pixel
View (PIP) or Mega Pixel View (PAP).

2. For PIP View, adjust the navigation box to have a close-up view of the selected area. For PAP
View, drag up to 7 areas to see the close-up views.

3. Click the Save as AVI button and select Save as AVI. The PIP or PAP view you have set appears.

Figure 4-17

4. Click OK to export the video. When you play back the video, the PIP or PAP view will be applied.

Note: If the frame of the PIP / PAP navigation box is partially invisible, click the Setting tab, click the
arrow next to Video Effects and clear the selection for De-Interlace.

For more details on PIP or PAP view, see Picture-in-Picture View or Picture-and-Picture View in
Chapter 1.

221
 Privacy Mask Settings
In case you forget to set the Privacy Mask at the Main System or need to add more Privacy Masks
onto the video for special requirements, you can do that in ViewLog.

1. In the Export with New Privacy Mask Region(s) section (Figure 4-14), select Un-recoverable
and/or Recoverable.
 Un-recoverable: The block-out area(s) in the recorded files cannot be retrieved.
 Recoverable: The block-out area(s) is retrievable with password protection.
2. Drag the area(s) where you want to block out on the image. You will be prompted to click Add to
save the setting.

Using a valid ID and Password, you can retrieve the recoverable block-out area(s) in the exported file.
For details on the Privacy Mask, see Privacy Mask Protection in Chapter 3.

AVI File Settings

To configure the format of exported video, follow these steps:

1. Click the Setting tab in the Save AVI File dialog box. Note that when you save the AVI file in single
view mode, the window looks slightly different.

Figure 4-18

222
 4 Playing Back Video Files

[Set Location] Click the […] button to assign a saving path.

[Normal]
 Time Merge: Select whether to save a full-length video with recorded and non-recorded
periods. The non-recorded period will display a blank blue screen. This option is designed
to accurately reflect your recording status.
 Save as EXE: Select whether to save files in EXE format. Enable this feature if you want to
play back video at the computer without installing GV-System. This format allows you to
auto-play the files with any third-party player.
 Add digital watermark: Select whether to include the watermark in the exported video.
This option is only available when the watermark has been applied on the recorded video.
 Date/Time: Select whether to include date and/or time stamps. You can also select the font
type and size, stamp position and color on the images.
 Video Effects: Select whether to include the special effects in the exported video. To
include the effects of De-Interlace, Defog, Stabilizer, Overlay’s Camera and Time and
Overlay’s POS, you must have applied these functions on the recorded video.
 Audio Export: Select Denoise to remove audio noises from the video, or select Channel
for audio exporting.
 GPS Export: Select Channels to export the GPS data recorded on the GV-System. .

[Codec Selection]
 Geo H264: This codec is created by GeoVision. It provides better image quality, higher
frame rates and smaller files size than any other. If the codec is selected, you must play the
exported files on the computer with the Geo codec installed. Otherwise you can export the
files in EXE format in order to play the video at any computer.
 WMV9: This code is created by Microsoft. It allows you to play the video with Windows
Media Player directly without using GeoVision codec. If the codec is selected, the Privacy
Mask you created using the ViewLog will be disabled.

2. Click OK to apply above settings.

223
4.1.7 Extracting Frames from a Video Event

You can extract certain frames of a video event and save them as another event.

1. Click the Save As AVI button (No. 2, Figure 4-2), and select Display Merging List. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 4-19

2. Select a desired video file from the Video Event list.

3. Click the Play button on the Playback Panel to play the video.
4. To set the start frame, click the A to B Mode button ● in the Merging List dialog box. The button

turns black. If you want to reset the start frame, click the Cancel button and then click the A
to B Mode button ● again to set a new start frame.
5. To set the end frame, click the A to B Mode button ●. The system starts extracting the specified
frames from the file. When the extract is complete, the Status field displays “Complete”.
6. To view the extract, click the arrow button on the list, and select Play.
7. To view where the file is located, click the arrow button on the list and select Open Path.

Note: If you want to clear the entries on the Merging List, click the arrow button beside the desired
entry, and select Clear. The entry will be deleted, but the saved file is still kept in the storage
location.

224
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.8 Saving Images

You can save the current camera view as an image file.

1. Click the Save As Image button (No. 3, Figure 4-2). This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-20

[Stamp Text on the Image]

Select whether to include host name, camera name, date and/or time stamp on the image.
Selecting Transparent Text will create the stamp on the transparent background.
Selecting Watermark and Deinterlace will include the two features in the saved image.
[The image] Click on the image at the bottom to preview the stamp text. Click on the image
again to close the preview window.
2. Name the file, select a file format, and then assign the location to save the image file.

225
4.1.9 Printing Images

You can print images in three layout styles: single view, quad view or multi view.

1. Click the View Mode button (No. 8, Figure 4-1) to decide the screen layout. Note that Thumbnail
is not available for print.
2. Select an event in the Video Events list (No. 6, Figure 4-1), and click the Print button (No. 4,
Figure 4-2). This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-21

3. Change the aspect ratio and position of the image on the page (only for Single View model) and
select whether to include the host name, camera name, date and/or time stamp on the printed
image.

226
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.10 Setting Face Mask

You can change the account privileges of Power User, User and Guest to apply Face Mask, which
blurs the human faces detected in recorded videos for privacy purposes.

Figure 4-22

Note:
1. The Face Mask function is able to detect front-view faces only, and the area of the detected face
must take up 10% to 50% of the live image. For other limitations, see Note, Face Detection in
Chapter 3.

2. When the Face Mask function is enabled, the Speed Up button will be grayed out.

To enable the Face Mask for an account:

1. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure, select Password
Setup, and select Local Account Edit. The Password Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select a Power User, User or Guest account and click the Viewlog tab at the bottom.
3. Clear the selection for Display detected faces, and click OK to blur human faces when the user
watch recorded events in ViewLog.

Figure 4–23

227
4.1.11 Displaying GPS Data

If the recorded video includes GPS data, you can enable GPS data display to see the coordinates and
the average speed of the vehicle on the playback video.

1. Click the Setting button (No.5, Figure 4-1), click the Display tab and select Display GPS
positions.

Figure 4-24
2. The coordinates and the average speed of the vehicle will be displayed in the top-left corner on
the playback video.

Figure 4-25

228
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.12 Adjusting Distorted Views

When viewing videos through the ViewLog player, images may be curved near the corners. Use the
Wide Angle Lens Dewarping feature to correct image distortion.

1. Click the Effect button, select Advanced Video Analysis and select Wide Angle Lens
Dewarping. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-26
2. Select the cameras to apply Wide Angle Lens Dewarping.
3. Click the button to adjust the level of dewarping. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-27
4. Move the slider at the bottom to adjust the degree of warping. The adjusted view is shown on the
right.
5. Click OK.

229
4.1.13 Object Tracking in Fisheye View
You can apply 360° object tracking to video recorded by fisheye cameras.

1. Select a video recorded by a fisheye camera.

2. Click the View Mode button, select Single View, select Geo Fisheye and select Geo Fisheye:
360 degree.

Figure 4-28
3. Right-click the fisheye image, select Fisheye Option, select 360 Object Tracking and select
Advanced Settings. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-29
4. Configure the object tracking settings. See Setting Up a GV-Fisheye Camera in Chapter 3.
5. To enable object tracking, right-click the fisheye image, select Fisheye Option, select 360 Object
Tracking and select Tracking.

230
 4 Playing Back Video Files

6. Click the Play button to see object tracking applied to the video.

Figure 4-30

231
4.1.14 Event Search Limitation

You can change the account privileges of Supervisor and User accounts to restrict them from
accessing all available events and only view the events of a specified duration in ViewLog. Follow the
steps below to prohibit users from changing the event search duration settings.

1. To set the accessible duration of events, click the Setting button on the Function Panel (No. 5,
Figure 4-2) and click Database / Cache tab. For details on duration setting options, see
Database / Cache in Advanced Settings later in this chapter.

Figure 4-31
2. To prevent users from changing the event duration, on the Main System, click the Configure
button, select System Configure, select Password Setup, and select Local Account Edit. The
Password Setup dialog box appears.
3. Select a Power User or User account and click the ViewLog tab.

Figure 4-32

4. Clear the selection for Enable duration setting for event search, and click OK. The duration
setting options for loading database upon ViewLog startup will be grayed out and unchangeable
for the selected account.

232
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.1.15 Advanced Settings

The Setting button on the Function Panel (No. 5, Figure 4-2) allows you to configure (1) Quad View, (2)
Multi View, (3) Thumbnail View, (4) Play Setting, (5) Display and (6) Database / Cache. Click this
button to open the System Configuration dialog box.

[Quad View]
You can configure up to 10 sets of Quad Views for simultaneous playback of up to 4 camera
recordings. Drag up to four cameras from the right side to the desired number of Quad View.

Figure 4-33

233
 [Multi View]
You can configure up to 10 sets of Multi Views for simultaneous playback of multiple camera
recordings. In each Multi View you can select the maximum of 16 cameras for playback. Drag up to 16
cameras from the right side to the desired number of Multi View.

Figure 4-34

[Thumbnail View]

Figure 4-35
 Frame Interval: Specify the number of frames between each video thumbnail. Set the interval
between 1 and 600.
 Show frame time: Displays time stamp on each thumbnail.

234
 4 Playing Back Video Files

[Play Setting]

Figure 4-36

[General Play Method]

 Audio De-noise: Improves the audio quality during playback without affecting the files.
 Auto play next event: Puts the next events in sequence for automatic playing.
 Auto switch to full screen for playback: Switches to the full screen when a video is started
playing.
 Auto Play the latest event when Viewlog starts: Plays the latest event when ViewLog starts.
 Default view mode when Viewlog starts: Select the desired view mode at startup.
 Auto close when ViewLog is idle: Exits ViewLog automatically after the user remains inactive
over the specified timer period. Specify the idle time between 10 to 300 seconds.

235
 [Display]

Figure 4-37

[User Interface]
 Aspect Ratio: Select the ratio between the width of the image and the height of the image.

[Camera/Image Setting]
 Apply De-interlace Render: Enable the De-interlace function, and then restart ViewLog to apply
it.

Note: This function requires DirectX 9.0C. The De-interlace only works in single view with the
resolution of 640 x 480 and 704 x 480.

 Apply Scaling Render: Select to smoothen mosaic squares when enlarging a playback video.
Restart ViewLog to take effect.

Note: This function requires DirectX 9 and VGA card with the video scaling support. And the scaling
only works in single view.

236
 4 Playing Back Video Files

 Using Colorful Mode: Click the Arrow button beside the Apply Scaling Render option, click the
DirectDraw Scale tab, and select Use Colorful Mode. During playback, you can enhance the
coloring to have more vivid and saturated images. Note this function does not affect the original
files.

 Apply deblocking render (single view only): Select to remove the block-like artifacts from
low-quality and highly compressed video, greatly increasing the overall quality of video.

 Apply text overlay’s camera name and time render: Displays the overlaid information of
camera ID, location name, date and time on the recorded files. For details, see POS Data Overlay
in Chapter 7.

 Apply text overlay’s POS / GV Wiegand render: Displays the overlaid information of POS or
GV-Wiegand Capture on the recorded files. For details, see POS Data Overlay in Chapter 7.

 Apply camera name render: Displays the camera number and name on the screen.

 Display GPS positions: Displays GPS coordinates on the images when playing the video events
recorded with GPS tracks. For details, see Displaying GPS Data earlier in this chapter.

[Use image instead of blue screen]

 Replace blue screen during playback or merging video clips: Select a customized image
in .jpeg or .bmp format to replace the blue screen. Note the image size is limited to 704 x 576.
The blue screen is the default setting for no image in the recording.

237
 [Database / Cache]
Specify the duration of event files to be loaded at ViewLog startup.

Figure 4-38
 Display all available events: Load all recorded event files.
 Display the last [Time] of the available database: Specify a time period of the last recorded
event. For example, if you select 10 Minutes, user accounts with limited event search privileges
will only be able to load the events during the last 10 minutes before the last recorded event file.
 Display the events for the previous [Time] of the user login time: Specify a time period of
events available to access. For example, if you select 10 Minutes, user accounts with limited
event search privileges will only be able to load the events during the last 10 minutes before the
account’s login time.

Note:
1. If you select the Display the last or Display the events for the previous option, the Event List
will not be refreshed as the latest event is recorded. To refresh the List, click the Advanced button,
select Reload Database, select DVR, and then select
 Default Setting to reload the specified time length of the event files, or
 Read All to reload all record event files.
2. For setting event search privilege for user accounts, refer to Event Search Limitation in Chapter 4.

238
 4 Playing Back Video Files

[Path for Cache] A cache is memory location that is used to store data temporarily, when you are
using the function of Save AVI, Export DVD or Network Buffering. If the default path does not have
sufficient space for this temporary storage, assign another path by clicking the […] button.

[Playback Log] Select Register Event if you want to register the event to the playback log. Click the
View Playback button to see historical playback activities of recorded video events and export them to
a CSV file.

239
4.2 Object Search
This feature allows you to perform two functions: 1. Detect motion, missing objects or unattended
objects within a certain region of a recorded file. 2. Perform the counting function within certain regions
in a recorded file. The following gives an example of motion detection. For details on missing objects,
unattended objects and counting, refer to Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm and Unattended and
Missing Object Detection in Chapter 3.

1. Select a desired video file from the Video Event list for the search. Or select multiple files by
clicking on each file while keeping pressing [CTRL] on the keyboard.
2. Click the Tools button (No.6, Figure 4-2) on the function panel, and then select Object Search to
display the following window.

Save Image

Setup

Show

Search Open View Log

Figure 4-39 Object Search

3. In the Video Process drop-down list, select Alarm.

240
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4. Click the Setup button for further settings. The following window will appear.

Figure 4-40
5. Use the mouse to outline a region for motion detection. You will be prompted to enter Alarm
Region.
6. Keep detection Sensitivity as defaults or adjust it if needed.
7. Click OK to finish the settings and close the window.
8. In the Option section, you have several options:
 Play All Events: Plays back the video segments found as a continuous series of images.
 Show Mask: Shows masks on the detection regions.
 Find and Stop: (recommended) Pauses the search process when motion is detected.
9. In the control panel, click the Search button for the search.
10. When any video segment matches the search criteria of motion detection, the Show button will be
available. Click Show to display the Event List window.

Figure 4-41

241
 11. Expand the event folders to see the video segments inside. Or, enable Show Small Pictures at
the upper of window to access the thumbnail view.
12. Select one video segment, and then click the Play button in the Object Search window to play it
back. Or, click the Open ViewLog button to play it with ViewLog.

242
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.3 Advanced Log Browser

With the Advanced Log Browser, you can search for log data of monitored events, system activities,
user activities, Object Counting and POS events. For details on the log types, see System Log in
Chapter 1.

1. Click the Tools button (No. 6, Figure 4-2) and select Advanced Log Browser. The Open
Database dialog box appears.
2. Specify a time range and click OK. All events within the specified range are displayed on the
Advanced Log Browser window.

Controls on the Advanced Log Browser

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Figure 4-42

243
 No. Name Description
1 Open Opens an event log.
Select Reload All Table or Reload Current Table to refresh
2 Reload
loaded data.
Defines the search criteria. See Filter Settings later in this
3 Filter
chapter.
Select All Tables to back up all log data, or selects Current
4 Backup
Table to back up the current log table you are at.
5 Print Prints the current log table.
6 Monitor Table Displays the monitor log.
7 System Table Displays the system log.
8 Login Table Displays user’s login/logout log.
9 Counter Table Displays the counter log.
10 POS Table Displays the POS log.
11 POS List Accesses one POS channel for log data.
12 Exit Exits the browser.
Appears to indicate the filtering process is being performed.
Filtering /
13 You can click it to cancel the filtering. After the filtering is
Cancel Filtering
complete, this icon appears dimmed.

244
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.3.1 Filter Settings

You can define filter criteria to search the desired log data. You can also import pre-defined filter
settings for log search, or save current filter settings for future use.

1. On the toolbar, click the desired log table button (Monitor, System, Login, Counter or POS), click
the Filter button (No. 3, Figure 4-42), and select Default Filter. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-43

2. Define the filter criteria, such as a specific camera and a period of time.
3. If you want to search the log data recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period, select DST
Rollback.
4. You can click Export to save the current settings to another location, or Import to apply other filter
settings.
5. Click OK to display the filter results.

Tip: Next time when you want to use the same exported settings, just click the Filter button, select
Favorites, and select the name of the export file.

Note:
1. The Import and Export features are only available in version 8.1 or later, therefore it is not
applicable to export the filter settings to the older version of GV-System.
2. The default Export path is :\GV folder\Syslog_Favorites\Monitor. If you change the saving path,
the name of the export file will not be listed in the Favorites option.

245
 The POS Filter dialog box has a slightly different look, as illustrated below.
 Filter the conditions in below to the selected POS table: Apply the filter settings to the

selected POS devices.

 Period between: Set the employee IDs or names for filtering.

 Import / Export: Import or export the POS Filter settings.

Figure 4-44

246
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.4 Quick Search

Quick Search is a useful tool for searching and playing back POS events. In Advanced Log Browser
(Figure 4-41), double-click any POS event in the POS table. The Quick Search window will appear.

Note: If the Quick Search window doesn’t appear, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2) on
the Main System, select General Setting and select System Log Setting. Then in the POS Table
drop-down list, change the video player from ViewLog to Quick Search.

2
3
4
5

6
7

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Figure 4-45 Quick Search

247
 The controls on the Quick Search window:
No. Name Description
Displays video associated to the event. Right-click on the window to have
1 Monitoring Window
the options of Play Mode, Render and Tools.
2 Camera Select Use the drop-down list to select camera

3 Day Select Use the drop-down list to select date

4 Time Select Use the drop-down list to select time

5 Go Button Click to search files that match to the parameters set above.
Click to specify event query. See Event Query Settings later in this
6 Event Query
chapter.
7 Transaction Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next transaction event.

8 Void Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next void event.

9 Transaction Window Displays POS transaction

10 320<->640 Click to switch between 640 x 480 and 320 x 240 display.
Expand / Select Expand/Shrink Dialog to display the Transaction window or
11 Shrink Dialog select Advanced Search to display the Advanced Search panel. See
Advanced Search Settings later in this chapter.
12 View by ViewLog Click to open ViewLog player.
13 Time Period Use these buttons to search event within the specified time.
Includes Play, Pause, Previous 10 frames, Home, Next 10 frames, End
14 Playback Panel
buttons.
15 Exit Click to close Quick Search screen

248
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.4.1 Event Query Settings

Click the Event Query button (No. 6, Figure 4-45) on the Quick Search window, and the following
dialog box will appear. Use this function to find POS events by a specific item, transaction, or date.

Figure 4-46

[Find Text] Enable this option to find video events that match to the key word.
[POS Event] Enable this option to find video events that match to the specified transaction type.
[Start Time] Enable this function and use the drop-down list to specify date and time
[Rule] Specify to search forward or backward from the set date.

249
4.4.2 Advanced Search Settings

To decide the size of Quick Search monitoring window and set up a list of favorite texts for search,
follow these steps:

1. Click the Expand/Shrink Dialog button (No.11, Figure 4-45), and select Advanced Search. The
Advanced Search panel appears.
2. Click the Setting button on the right side of the panel. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-47

[Default Layout]
 View Size: Selects 320 x 240 or 640 x 480 for the monitoring window size when the Quick
Search is opened.
 Show Advanced Search Panel: Displays the Advanced Search panel when the Quick
Search is opened.
[Favorite Search Text]
Click the Add button to create a list of favorite texts for search. When you use the Find Text
drop-down menu on the panel, this list is available for use. Up to 100 kinds of texts can be added
to the list.

250
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.5 Address Book

With Address Book, you can save the connection information of multiple hosts and quickly access
them for video playback in the future. The host you can remotely connect includes GV-System, GV-IP
Devices, GV-Backup Center, GV-Storage System, GV-Recording Server, GV-Failover Server and
GV-Redundant Server.

4.5.1 Creating a Host Account

To create a host account in Address Book, follow the steps below.

1. On the functional panel, click the Tools button and click Address Book. This window appears.

Figure 4-48

2. To add a host account, click the Add Host button . This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-49

251
 3. Type the connection information of the host, including Host Name, IP address, Port number, and
login ID and Password. You can optionally select Remember Account, or you can enter ID and
Password each time you connect the host using Address Book.

4. Select Server Type.

5. Click the Update button to request the number of cameras installed from the host.

6. Click OK to create the host account.

If you want to assign a group for the host, type a group name in the Group Name box. The group
name will be added to the Host List and also to the Group Name drop-down list. Next time when you
add a host, you can optionally select the created groups from the Group Name drop-down list.

To create a host account of GV-Recording Server, GV-Failover Server and GV-Redundant Server, click
the Add GV-Device Server buttons. To create a host account of GV-Backup Center and GV-Storage
System, click the Add GV-Backup Center and Add GV-Storage System buttons respectively. The
Add a Host dialog box may look a bit different among these hosts.

Tip: Right-clicking the created host on the Address Book and selecting Connect can connect with
the host and display its events on the ViewLog.

4.5.2 Creating a Group

You can customize a group to pull up the maximum of to 32 camera videos from different hosts directly.

1. Click the Add Group button.

2. Drag the desired cameras form Host List to the created group.

Tip: By right-clicking the created group and selecting Connect, images from the selected cameras
will appear on the ViewLog player.

4.5.3 Creating a Folder Link

You can create a link to the folder that contains recordings from the local computer. This function has
the same effect as Reload Database accessed from the Advanced button (No. 9, Figure 4-1).

 To add a folder, click the Add Folder button, and select the video folder on the computer. The
folder link is created under Group List.

252
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.5.4 Connecting from Address Book

To quickly access a host, group or folder by using Address Book:

1. Right-click a host/group/folder on Address Book, and select Connect.

2. Select a host/group/folder on Address Book, and select the Connect button .

Ensure the Remote ViewLog function has been enabled at the remote host to allow access from the
GV-System.

For more remote playback functions, also see Resuming Backup and Retrieving Images of Object
Index in Remote ViewLog Service later in this chapter.

4.5.5 Importing and Exporting the Address Book

You can import or export the address book by clicking the Import/Export button.

Figure 4-50

 To import the address book, select Import a file to import a single database file of the address
book. Or select Import a folder to simultaneously import all database files stored in the same
folder.

 To export the address book, click the Export button, and select a folder on your computer to
export all database files.

Note: The database files will be divided into different types of file extensions listed as below when they
are exported. You can place all the database files in the same folder, and select Import a Folder to
import those files all at once.
File Type Description File Type Description
.hd DVR and IP Device .sd Storage database
database
.gd Group database .db Database of version earlier than V8.3.2
.rd Backup Center database .dat Database of Remote Playback

253
4.6 Remote ViewLog Service
Through the network, you can retrieve the files from a remote GV-IP Device, GV-System,
GV-Recording Server, GV-Failover Server, GV-Redundant Server or GV-Backup Center and play back
video. This feature is made possible through the Remote ViewLog Service. The Remote ViewLog
Service features:

 Most of the functions provided by ViewLog are available, such as Backup, Save as AVI, Object
Search, Export to DVD Format, Database Files Backup, and so on.
 Capability of disabling certain camera connections under heavy network load
 Resuming file transfers for backup

Before you can review video recorded on a remote GV-IP Device, GV-System, GV-Recording Server,
GV-Failover Server, GV-Redundant Server or GV-Backup Center, the Remote ViewLog function must
be enabled to allow access.

4.6.1 Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host

1. On the function panel, click the Tools button (No. 6, Figure 4-2), and select Remote ViewLog
Service. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-51

2. Enter the IP Address, ID and Password of the remote video device. Keep the default port as 5552
or modify it if necessary.

3. In the Host Type, select DVR, GV IP Device or GV-Server. The GV-Server option is for
GV-Recording Server, GV-Failover Server, GV-Redundant Server and GV-Backup Center.
4. Click the Connect button.

254
 4 Playing Back Video Files

When the connection is established, you will see the events of the remote video device appearing on
the Event List. Then you can use ViewLog features for playback.

Note: Using Address Book, you can access the video files of up to 32 cameras from multiple hosts of
GV-Systems (DVRs) and GV-IP Devices. For details, see Creating a Group earlier in this chapter.

4.6.2 Retrieving Images of Object Index

The images of Object Index include the Object Index, Face Detection and Video Snapshot. Through
the Remote ViewLog Service, you can retrieve all the Object Index images from another GV-System
on the network.

1. Build the connection to another GV-System on the network using the Remote ViewLog Service.
See Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host earlier in this chapter.
2. Click the Advanced button and select Object Index.

Figure 4-52

3. On the Object Index Search window, select the desired camera and file date for playback.

255
 4. To play images with the ViewLog player, double-click the desired frame on Object Index List.

Figure 4-53

5. If you retrieve the images of Video Snapshot, you can select Show Snapshot at the bottom of
the dialog box and double-click the desired frame to display it with the default image viewer of
Windows, e.g. Paint.

4.6.3 Resuming Backup

Using the Remote ViewLog Service, you can back up files from a remote GV-System (DVR) or a GV-IP
Device. When the file transfer is interrupted by a network error, you can even resume backup.

1. When the backup is interrupted, this message will appear: There are x file(s) couldn’t be backup.
Do you want to keep a log file and backup them later?

2. Click Yes. You will be prompted to save the partial backup file as *lv format.

3. To resume backup, click the Resume button in the Backup dialog box, and then locate the partial
backup file to continue.

For details on backing up files, see Chapter 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair.

256
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.7 Single Player

When backing up the recorded files, you can choose to include the player of ViewLog or Single Player
(see 5.2 Backing up Recorded Files). Compared to ViewLog, the Single Player provides simple and
easy playback functions. To play back the recordings using the Single Player, open the backup folder
and run GVSinglePlayer.exe.

4.7.1 Single Player Window

To play back a recoded file, click Files and click Open File to select the file you wish to play back. To
play back multiple recorded files together in up to 16 screen divisions, click Files and click Open
Folder to select the folder that collects several camera recordings.

Move to prev 1 min

Playback scroll Move to prev 5 min

Play
Pause Move to next 1 min
Stop Move to next 5 min
Home End
Backward Forward

Figure 4-54

257
 Right-clicking the playback window can change the play mode and create special effects when you
play video back.

Name Functions
Includes these options:
 Frame by Frame: Plays back video frame by frame.
 Real Time: Plays back video on real time. This mode saves waiting time for
rendering, but drop frames to give the appearance of real-time playback.
Play Mode  Key Frame: Plays back video with key frames only.
 Smooth Playbacks: Evenly distributes 30 frames per second. When the
playback appears choppy, select this option to enhance the smoothness.
 Auto Play Next 5 Minutes: Plays back video up to 5 minutes.
 Audio: Turns on or off the video sound; audio denoise.
Includes these options:
 Deinterlace: Converts the interlaced video into non-interlaced video.
 Scaling: Smoothens mosaic squares when enlarging a playback video.
 Deblocking: Removes the block-like artifacts from low-quality and highly
compressed video.
 Defog: Enhances image visibility.
 Stabilizer: Reduces camera shake.
 Text overlay’s camera name and time: Overlays camera name and time
onto the video.
Render  Text overlay’s POS/GV-Wiegand: Overlays POS or GV-Wiegand Capture
data onto the video.
 Wide angle lens dewarping: Corrects distortion toward the corner of the
camera view.
 Fisheye: Select Geo Fisheye to choose a camera mode.
 Mega Pixel View: Enables PIP or PAP view.
 Display GPS: Shows the location on the map where the video is taken
through GPS.
 Select GPS Map (Apply after restart): Select a type of GPS map to apply.
 Full Screen: Switches to the full screen view.
 Snapshot: Saves a video image.
 Save as AVI: Saves a video as avi format.
Tools
 Download: Downloads the video clip from the DVR or video server to the
local computer.

258
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.8 GPS Tracks Playback

Since GV-Video Server and GV-Compact DVR support GPS tracking, GPS tracks are recorded along
with video on these devices. On the GV-System, you can retrieve GPS tracks from these devices and
play them back in Google Maps, Microsoft Virtual Earth and even user-defined maps.

1. The GV-IP Device must allow the remote access with ViewLog Server activated. See ViewLog
Server in its user’s manual.

2. To remotely connect to the GV-IP Device from GV-System, click the Tools button and select
Remote ViewLog Service. The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears.

3. Enter the connection information of the GV-IP Device, and click Connect. Once the connection is
established, the video events will be displayed on the Video Event list.

4. To select a map API (Application Program Interface), click the Tools button and click Select Map
API. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-55

5. In Please Select a Map API, select a Map API.

6. To play back GPS tracks, click the Tools button and select Display GIS Window. The first-time
user will be prompted for a License Agreement. Read through the license terms before you click I
understand and agree to continue.

259
 7. Select the events with GPS tracks from the Video Event list, select the desired video mode, and
click the Play button to start.

Figure 4-56

Note:

1. If you like to use the maps created yourself, overwrite the files at :\GV folder\GIShtm-User, and
select User Defined from the “Please Select a Map API” drop-down list (Figure 4-55).

2. You can also attach the USB mass storage device with the recorded files to GV-System for
playback. For this kind of playback, first load the data to ViewLog by following the instructions in
the section of Playback Using USB Mass Storage Device in GV-Video Server or GV-Compact
DVR User’s Manual. Then follow Steps 4-7 above to play back GPS tracks.

260
 4 Playing Back Video Files

4.9 Touch Screen Support

By the touch of a finger, the touch screen panel allows you to change screen divisions, switch to full
screen and close the ViewLog screen.

1. Click the Tools button (No.6, Figure 4-2), point to Tool Kit, select Touch Screen Panel, and click
Panel Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 4-57

2. Click Active to have these options:

 Active when enter Full-Screen Mode only: Launches automatically the panel when the full
screen view is applied.
 Always Active: Always displays on the ViewLog screen.
 Layout: Select a vertical or horizontal panel.
3. Click OK for the above settings.
4. At the upper left corner of the screen, an information window indicating date, time and storage
space will appear. Left-click it to open this touch panel.

Figure 4-58

261
4.10 Fast Key Reference
To view the fast key list, click the Tools button (No.6, Figure 4-2), select Took Kit, and select Fast Key.
The ViewLog fast key list appears.

4.11 Specifications
Feature Notes
Support for Defogging Yes (32 channels)
Support for Stabilizer Yes (32 channels)
Support for PIP View Yes
Support for PAP View Yes
Support for Panorama View Yes (4 sets of Panorama View )
Videos Exported as .AVE Files Yes
Object Search Yes
Support for Fisheye View Yes

262
Chapter 5

Backup, Deletion and Repair.............. 264

5.1 Backing Up Log Data....................................................................... 264

5.2 Backing Up Recorded Files........................................................... 265

5.3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple Discs .............................. 268

5.3.1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Files............................................ 268
5.3.2 Including the Player in the Backup Files............................................. 269

5.4 Deleting Recorded Files ................................................................. 270

5.5 Repairing Damaged File Paths ..................................................... 272

5.6 Repairing Damaged Video Files................................................... 273

263
 5
CHAPTER

Backup, Deletion and Repair

This chapter explains how to back up and delete video/audio files on the hard disk. Video files can be
copied to external storage media, such as CD-R, DVD, MO, or ZIP drives.

5.1 Backing Up Log Data

Using the System Log, you can back up all log data or filtered data based on criteria.

1. To open the System Log, click the ViewLog button on the main screen (No.13, Figure 1-2), and
select System Log.
2. Click the icon at the top left corner on the System Log window, and select Advanced Log
Browser. The Advanced Log Browser appears.

Figure 5-1
3. Select a time period of logs to be loaded to the Advanced Log Browser.
4. Click the Backup button on the toolbar. The Customer Database Export dialog box
appears.
[Table Option] Select All Tables to back up all log data, or Current Table for the log table you are
currently at.
[Export with Video/Audio data] Backs up video/audio attachments with log data.
5. Click OK. The Backup dialog box (Figure 5-2) appears.
6. In the Media section, select the method and destination to back up the log files, and click OK to
back up.

264
 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair

Note:
1. To back up the filtered data, use the Filter function to define search criteria first. See Filter
Settings in the section of Advanced Log Browser in Chapter 4.
2. To open the backup data, run EZSysLog.exe from the backup file.

5.2 Backing Up Recorded Files

Using ViewLog, you have three backup options:
 Back up to hard disk
 Create CD/DVD using a third-party software, e.g. Nero, Roxio, etc.
 Create CD using Windows inbuilt burning software.

1. On the function panel, click the Backup button (No. 7, Figure 4-2). This dialog box appears.

Figure 5-2

2. Select a destination media to back up files.

[Media]
 Using Hard Disk: Click the […] button to select the desired hard disk.
 Backup Folder Name: Enter a desired name for the backup folder.
 Using CD/DVD: Click to back up files to the CD or DVD media using the third-party software.
 Click the […] button to assign the desired burning software (.exe file). After clicking OK

265
 on the Backup dialog box (Figure 5-2), the system will ask you to paste the backup files
to the CDR-Writer program, and call up the assigned burning software for you to paste
and backup files.
 If Nero software of version 6.6.0.14 or later is installed, you can directly burn the files
onto CD/DVD without assigning the burning software and pasting the backup files to the
CDR-Writer program.
 If Nero software of version 7.0 or later is installed, you can directly burn the files to
blue-ray media.
 Using OS-Burning: It burns files using the inbuilt software of the operation system onto the
DVD, CD or blue-ray disc. Note that your hard disk needs at least 1 G buffer space.
[Media Information] Indicates free and used space on CD/DVD media or the local disk.

3. Click the Add Time Frame button to define a time period for backup.

Figure 5-3

[Time Period] Specify the time periods for backup.

[Select Camera(s)] Click to select the camera(s) for backup. The number of video and audio
files of each camera is indicated respectively, e.g. “Camera 1 1+0” means Camera 1 has 1 video
file and 0 audio file.
 Video + Audio drop-down list: Select the types of video events for backup.

266
 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair

[Information]
 Database Files: Click to back up the files from System Log.
 Object Index: Click to back up the Object Index files.
 Only Never-Recycle Event: Click to only back up the never-recycle events.
 Unmark these events to be recycled after the backup is complete: After the backup is
complete, the never-recycle events will be unmarked for recycling. Please note if the first file
in the database has been marked and then unmarked in this condition, the first file will be
deleted automatically.
 Include daylight saving rollback events: Click to back up events recorded during Daylight
Saving Time.
 Bookmarked Files: Click to back up the bookmarked frames in JPEG format.
 The Status and Search End section: Indicates the number of backup files and their total
size. (Total MDB refers to the System Log files.)

4. Click OK to add the schedule. You can repeat step 3 to create up to 10 periods of time.
5. To include the player to the backup files, select Include Player at the right bottom of the Backup
dialog box and select ViewLog or Single Player. By default, ViewLog is selected. If no player is
selected, you can only play the backup files at the computer installed with GV-System or Geo
Mpeg4 codec.
6. Click OK on the Backup dialog box to start the backup.

Tip: If you just want to back up a specific event or several events of one day, select the event or
multiple events on the Video Event list, and right-click to select Backup. The Select Backup Time
dialog box will then appear, and you can follow the steps described above to back up files without
setting up the time period.

Note:
1. If you are unable to record a CD, make sure the CD recording is enabled in your CD burner:
open My Computer, right-click the CD Drive icon, click Properties, click the Recording tab,
and then check Enable CD recording on the drive.
2. The Export to DVD Format option, at the right bottom of the Backup dialog box (Figure 5-2),
outputs your files in DVD movie format, meaning that it will play in any DVD player that supports
writable DVD disks. To enable this option, MPEG2 files recorded by the GV-2004 Card /
GV-2008 Card need to be selected first (see the Select Camera(s) option), and a DVDRW disk
is required as well.
3. For ViewLog and Single Player, see Chapter 4 Video Playback.

267
5.3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple Discs
When the size of the backup files exceeds the disc space limit, the ViewLog can automatically split the
files to be burned onto multiple discs. For this feature to work, Nero 6.6.0.14 or later is required to be
installed on your system.

Note: This feature is not available when

1. the Export to DVD Format option is enabled to back up files to DVD, or
2. the CD Using OS-Burning option is enabled to back up files using the inbuilt burning software of
the operating system.

To back up files, click the Backup button (No. 7, Figure 4-2), and follow the instructions in the Backing
Up Files Using ViewLog section earlier in this chapter. When the system splits backup files into
multiple discs, two backup modes are selectable. The backup modes change when you exclude or
include the player in the backup files. For details on the two backup modes, see the following sections.

5.3.1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Files

If you choose not to include the player in the backup files, there are two backup modes:

 Mode 1: This mode intelligently burns files onto CD/DVD by shifting the complete event(s) to a
new CD/DVD if space is not enough on the current CD/DVD. You may see some blue screen
images at the beginning or the end of each CD/DVD.

1. When you start burning, a dialog box appears.

Figure 5-4

268
 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair

2. For Mode 1, select No. A dialog box indicating the number of required discs for burning
appears.

Figure 5-5

3. Select Yes to start the backup.

 Mode 2: This mode will keep some buffers at the end and beginning of each CD/DVD, thus
overlapping some videos in the beginning of each CD/DVD from the end of the previous CD/DVD.

1. When you start burning, a dialog box (Figure 5-4) appears.

2. For Mode 2, select Yes. A dialog box indicating the number of required discs for burning
(Figure 5-5) appears.
3. Select Yes to start the backup.

5.3.2 Including the Player in the Backup Files

If you choose to include the player in the backup files, the Model 2 backup method will be applied. You
will see some overlapping videos in the beginning of each CD/DVD from the end of the previous
CD/DVD.

1. To include the player in backup files, select Include Player at the right bottom of the Backup
dialog box, and select ViewLog or Single Player.

Figure 5-6

2. When the backup process starts, a dialog box indicating the number of discs required for backup
appears.

3. Click Yes to start the backup.

269
5.4 Deleting Recorded Files
1. To delete files using ViewLog, on the function panel, click the Tools button (No. 6, Figure 4-2), and
select Delete Log. This dialog box appears.

Figure 5-7

2. Define the time period for file deletion.

3. Uncheck the cameras, which you don’t want to delete the files of.
4. Use the drop-down list to select the types of events to be deleted, e.g. video, audio or both
together.
5. To delete the never-recycle events, select Include Never-Recycle Event.
6. To delete the events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period, select Included Day Light
Saving Time Rollback Event.
7. Click the Delete button.

270
 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair

Tip: If you just want to delete a specific event or several events within one day, select the event or
multiple events on the Video Event list, and right-click to select Delete. The Delete dialog box will
then appear, and you can follow the steps described above to delete files without setting up the time
period
.
Note:
1. If you want to view the history of file deletion, click the View Delete Log button on the Delete
dialog box.
2. To view the information of files from a desired camera, right-click the camera and select Event
View on the Delete dialog box.

271
5.5 Repairing Damaged File Paths
The only way to correctly delete video and audio files is through the operation you’ve just performed in
the previous section. If you move or delete a video file using Windows Explorer or Windows File
Manager, the GV-System will not know what you have done. In this case, the Repair Database Utility
can repair misplaced or missing recorded files that are not identified by the ViewLog player. As long as
these files still exits on the hard drives and detectable by Windows operating system, the Utility will
restore these recorded files back to their default paths and allow them to appear under ViewLog. This
Utility comes with the installation of Main System. Follow these steps to repair the paths:

1. Go to the Windows Start menu, select Programs, select the GV folder, and select the Repair
Database Utility. A valid ID and password are required.
2. When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears, select the cameras that require
database repair.
3. Click OK. This dialog box appears.

Figure 5-8

4. If your recorded files exist only in the predefined recording path, click the Use Default Path button
to rebuild file paths in the predefined recording hard drive only.
5. If your recorded files scatter across different hard drives, click the Search Hard Disk button to
allow more time to rebuild file paths in all hard drives connected to the GV-System.

272
 5 Backup, Deletion and Repair

Note:
1. The repair and the search function will not apply to the files that have been renamed manually.
2. Use this Utility to repair the database if encountering any of the following scenarios in ViewLog:
a. A question mark appears right before a video file in the Video Event list.
b. When you click the Playback button, no video is displayed even a file is selected.

5.6 Repairing Damaged Video Files

If the computer has been shut down improperly, e.g. due to power failure, use this function to repair the
damaged video files.

Tip: When a computer has been shut down improperly, the first thing you do before starting the
GV-System is to run Repair Database Utility. After running the Utility, go to ViewLog and view Video
Events. You should be able to play back all video files at this step. However, if you only see a
question mark after clicking on the file, the problem may be that the recording process was
interrupted. To repair the file, run the AVI Repair Utility and follow the steps below.

1. Double-click AVIRepairAPI.exe in the GV folder. This dialog box appears.

Figure 5-9

273
 2. Click the Browse button to find the damaged video file.
3. If you know the codec and resolution of the file, select Manual, select Compression Type and
type Resolution. Alternatively, you may select Auto and the system will run all combinations for
you. Please note it takes longer time to repair with this selection.
4. Click the Repair button to start.
5. You may see the distorted image or No Image on view screen if an incorrect codec and resolution
were chosen. Click No for the next combination until a complete image appears.

Distorted Image No Image Complete Image

Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11 Figure 5-12

6. When a complete image is displayed, click the arrow button to preview the file.
7. Click Yes to start the repair.
8. Click Yes to overwrite or No to save this file to another path. Note if you choose No in this step,
remember to run Repair Database Utility again after exiting this program.

274
Chapter 6
I/O Applications .................................. 276
6.1 I/O Device Setup................................................................................ 277
6.1.1 Latch Trigger................................................................................................. 279
6.1.2 Keeping Last Toggle Status..................................................................... 281

6.2 I/O Control Panel ............................................................................... 282

6.3 Advanced I/O Applications............................................................. 283
6.3.1 Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trigger ................................................ 283
6.3.2 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input Trigger..... 285
6.3.3 Setting Momentary and Maintained Modes ........................................ 286
6.3.4 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input Trigger........... 286
6.3.5 Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger ............... 287

6.4 Input State Detection ...................................................................... 288

6.5 I/O Enable Setting ............................................................................. 289
6.6 Advanced I/O Panel .......................................................................... 290
6.6.1 The Advanced I/O Panel ............................................................................ 290
6.6.2 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers ............................................... 291
6.6.3 Configuring the Advanced I/O Panel...................................................... 294
6.6.4 Setting Up Mode Schedule ....................................................................... 295
6.6.5 Quick Link ...................................................................................................... 297
6.6.6 Forcing Output .............................................................................................. 297
6.6.7 Editing Background Image ....................................................................... 298
6.6.8 System-Wide Triggers ................................................................................ 298
6.6.9 The “Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam” Option ............ 299
6.6.10 Managing a Group of I/O Devices......................................................... 300

6.7 Visual Automation ............................................................................ 301

6.8 Virtual I/O Control ............................................................................. 302
6.8.1 Setting a I/O Module.................................................................................... 303

275
 6
CHAPTER

I/O Applications
This chapter discusses how you can set up and control the I/O devices connected to GV-System. I/O
applications include these features:
 Configure I/O devices
 Move PTZ to a preset location on input trigger
 Support access control systems of Momentary and Maintained modes
 Arm and disarm I/O devices without interfering with the monitoring
 Centrally manage I/O devices across the wide area by the Advanced I/O Panel

276
 6 I /O Applications

6.1 I/O Device Setup

To connect the I/O device to the computer of GV-System, you may need the additional device: GV-Net,
GV-Net Card, GV-NET/IO Card or GV-I/O Box..

To install the I/O device on the GV-System, on the main screen, click the Configure button (No. 14,
Figure 1-2), select Accessories, select I/O Device and click I/O Device Setup. This window appears.

Figure 6-1

[Select I/O Device] Adds an I/O device to the system:

1. Select the device from the Device drop-down list.
2. Click the Format Addr. button to assign an address to the device. The Format Address dialog box
appears.
3. Start your first device with New Address set to 1. Click the Write button to write the address to the
device. Click OK to apply the setting.
4. Click the Add button. You should see the device listed in the display window.
5. Repeat above steps to add more devices once at a time. Each device should have its own address;
therefore, in step 3 you should assign a different address for the new device.

Note: For GV-Net/IO Card V3.1 (Net/IO Card Mode), select the GV-NET/IO Card option; for
GV-Net/IO Card V3.1 (I/O Box Mode) and GV-I/O Box 4 Ports, select the GVIO-USB(4) option; for
GV-IO Box 8 Ports, select the GVIO-USB(8) option, and for GV-I/O Box 16 Ports, select the
GVIO-USB(16) option.

[Input X] Click the Arrow buttons to select an Input to set up.

277
 Select Input

Apply to all Inputs

Figure 6-2

 Name: Specifies a name for the input device in the Name field.

 Signal Type: Select a signal type for your input device: NO (normally open), NC (normally close)
or Latch Trigger.

For details on Latch Trigger, see Latch Trigger later in this chapter.

[Output X] Click the Arrow buttons to select an output.

Select Output

Apply to all Outputs

Keep Last Toggle Status

Figure 6-3

 Name: Specifies a name for the output device in the Name field.

 Force Output: Click to test signal to the selected device.

 Signal Type: There are six signal types available: N/O (Normal Open), N/O Toggle, N/O Pulse,
N/C (Normal Closed), N/C Toggle, and N/C Pulse. Choose the one that mostly suits the device
you’re using. For Toggle output type, the output continues to be triggered until a new input trigger
ends the output. For Pulse output type, the output is triggered for the amount of time you specify
in Sec field.
 Keep Last Toggle Status: See Keeping Last Toggle Status later in this chapter.

Note: PTZ camera and I/O devices cannot be assigned to the same port at the same time.

278
 6 I /O Applications

6.1.1 Latch Trigger

Instead of constant output alarm in N/O and N/C, the Latch Trigger option provides a momentary alarm,
and allows you to set the alarm duration.

Setting up Latch Trigger:

On the main screen, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), point to Accessories, click I/O
Device, and select I/O Device Setup to select the Latch Trigger option. See the red square in the
dialog box below.

I/O Device Setup I/O Application Setting

Figure 6-4

Application Example:
In the above scenario, Input 4 is set to N/O and Latch Trigger as well. When Input 4 is triggered:
 The camera starts recording for 30 seconds and stops itself until the next input trigger (see the
Rec Video option in the blue box).
 Computer Alarm sounds once (see the Invoke Alarm option).
 The output (Module 3, Pin 7) is triggered simultaneously based on the Latch Trigger mode (see
the illustrations below).

279
 The following illustrations can help you understand different output signals (see Purple Square in the
above dialog box) working with the Latch Trigger option.
1. N/O (Normal Open) + Latch Trigger
Once the input triggers the output, the output will be triggered for a short moment and then turn off
itself.

N/C N/C N/C N/C

Input
Output
N/O N/O N/O N/O N/O N/O

2. N/O Toggle + Latch Trigger

Once the input triggers the output, the output will keep triggering until a new input trigger.

N/C N/C N/C N/C

Input
Output
N/O N/O N/O N/O

1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger

3. N/O Pulse + Latch Trigger

Suppose you set the Pulse time to 60 second. Once the input triggers the output, the output will remain
ON for 60 seconds before turning off itself.

N/C N/C N/C N/C

60 60
sec sec

Input
Output
N/O N/O N/O N/O

280
 6 I /O Applications

6.1.2 Keeping Last Toggle Status

This feature can memorize the current output state when the monitoring is stopped or the system is
restarted. For example, suppose the output is lights. When remaining on the premises, you stop
monitoring but the triggered lights remain ON, not affected by the system state.

Setting up “Keep Last Toggle Status”:

In the I/O Device dialog box (Figure 6-1), select N/O Toggle or N/C Toggle, and click the Arrow button
beside to check Keep Last Toggle Status.

Figure 6-5

Application Example:
Following two illustrations help you understand how the input works with the output set to Keep Last
Toggle Status.

1. Input (N/O) + Output (N/O Toggle + Keep Last Toggle Status)

The triggered output remains ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system.

N/C N/C N/C

Input
Output N/O N/O N/O

1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger

Stop monitoring /
Restart the system

281
 2. Input (N/O + Latch Trigger) + Output (N/O Toggle + Keep Last Toggle Status)
When “Latch Trigger” works with “Keep Last Toggle Status”, the output only has a momentary trigger
but also needs to remain ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system. Therefore under
the two conditions, the output turns off until a new input trigger.

N/C N/C N/C

Input
Output N/O N/O N/O

1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger

Stop monitoring /
Restart the system

6.2 I/O Control Panel

The I/O control panel is used to control I/O devices that are added to the system. This control panel will
not appear, unless at least one I/O device is connected to the system.

After a device is added to the system, click the I/O button on the main screen and select one I/O

module to bring out the following I/O control panels.

Module No.

Input Control Panel Output Control Panel

Figure 6-6
 Input Control Panel: Displays the status of current input sensors. The “walking man” icon
indicates the sensor is being triggered.

 Output Control Panel: Displays the status of current output devices. You can force the output
device to be triggered by clicking on its icon.

282
 6 I /O Applications

6.3 Advanced I/O Applications

In the I/O Application dialog box, you can configure the advanced applications, such as setting alarm
notification, defining a PTZ camera movement upon input trigger, setting momentary or maintained
mode, and deactivating alarm and alert settings. Click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2),
select Accessories, click I/O Application, and select I/O Application Setting to bring up the setting
dialog box.

6.3.1 Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trigger

This section helps you set up the actions to be taken after the input device is triggered and whether to
recycle input-triggered events or not.

Figure 6-8

Select an Input from the left-side list to be set up. Clicking the Finger button can apply the same
settings to all inputs.
[Monitor Input]

 Rec Video: Select this option to use the input (sensors or detectors) to trigger recordings on
multiple cameras. Specify the recording duration and click the Arrow button to select which
camera to record upon input trigger.

 Invoke Alarm: Select this option to activate computer alarm when the input is triggered. You can
select the alarm sound from the drop-down list.

283
  Invoke to Send Alerts: Select this option to send out the predefined alert (E-Mail/Hotline/SMS)
when the input is triggered. For e-mail alerts, see E-Mail Notification in Chapter 1; for hotline alerts,
see Hotline Notification in Chapter1; for SMS alerts, see Short Message Service in Chapter 10.

1st Right Arrow button: Appears when E-Mail is the predefined alert. Click the button to select
the camera(s) to take a snapshot upon input trigger. The snapshot will be sent out by E-Mail.

2nd Right Arrow button: Sets the time to delay the activation of assigned alerts
(E-Mail/Hotline/SMS).

 Output Module: Triggers the specified output module when the input is activated. Use the
drop-down lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function.

Right Arrow button: Sets the time to delay the activation of the specified output module.

 Register Input Event: This option logs the I/O trigger events into System Log. Each event is
labeled with ID, time, device name (camera or I/O input), corresponding module of the device, and
event for later retrieval. For details on System Log, see System Log in Chapter 1.

Note: The Delay Time in Invoke to Send Alerts and Output Module allow you time to turn off the
input device before the system triggers alerts or the output device. The Delay Time will not work if you
stop monitoring or enable the function “Deactivate notification when selected pin ON" in I/O
Application window (Figure 6-7).

[Never Recycling Input-Triggered Events] When the item is checked, the recorded files of
input-triggered events won’t be recycled by the system when disk space is full.

284
 6 I /O Applications

6.3.2 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input

Trigger

you can define how the PTZ camera and the GV-System will respond to an input trigger event.

Figure 6-9

Select an Input from the left-side list to be set up. Clicking the Finger button can apply the same
settings to all inputs.
 Preset Go by I/O: Enable the option and select your PTZ camera from the drop-down list.
 Addr: Specify the address of the PTZ camera.
 Alarm On: Turns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the input is triggered.
 Alarm Off: Returns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the triggered input is off.
 Alarm On Dwell Time: Specify the amount of time the PTZ camera stays at “Alarm On” preset
point, before returning to the “Alarm Off” preset point.

Note: Depending on the capability of the PTZ camera, up to 256 PTZ preset points (ranging from 1 to
256) and addresses (ranging from 0 to 255) can be programmed.

285
6.3.3 Setting Momentary and Maintained Modes

This section introduces the momentary and maintained modes.

Figure 6-10
[Momentary Mode] Push button switches that are normally open and stay closed only as long as the
button is pressed. Momentary switches allow turn-on or turn-off from multiple locations. For example,
certain premises have a designated entry/exit door. When the staff enters the entry door, the system
starts monitoring. When the staff leaves from the exit door, the system stops monitoring.
[Maintained Mode] Push-on/push off button switches that stay open until thrown, and then stay closed
until thrown again. Maintained switches are convenient for only one switch location. For example, in
the business hour when the door is opened, the system stops monitoring; in the non-business hour
when the door is closed, the system starts monitoring.

6.3.4 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input

Trigger
The option lets you instantly deactivate all the prior alarm and alert settings (Output, Wave Alarm, Send
Alerts), when an assigned input module is triggered.

Figure 6-11
 [Deactivate notification when selected pin is ON] When an assigned input module is activated,
all designated alarms and alerts will be disabled. Assign an installed input module and a pin
number for the application.
[Deactivate Notification]
 Triggered by: Select an alert condition from the drop-down list for the application. For example, if
you choose Motion, all designated alarms and alerts upon motion detection will be deactivated
when the assigned input module is activated.
 Deactivate Selected Notification: Select the alarms and alerts you want to be deactivated, such
as Output, Wave Alarm and/or Send Alert, when the assigned input module is activated.

286
 6 I /O Applications

6.3.5 Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger

You can overlay the name of an input device on live video for alert or save the input name to video files
whenever the input is triggered.

Figure 6-12

1. Select an Input from the left-side list to be set up.

2. Select Input Overlay and click Arrow button to display the following dialog box. Use the drop-down
lists to select the input module and pin number, and select camera(s) associated with the input
device.

Figure 6-13
3. To overlay the name of a triggered input on video, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2),
select General Setting, select Text Overlay Setting, and select Print on screen (Only for I/O
alarm) and/or Print on video file.

Note: Up to 5 input names can be stamped on one camera channel when inputs are triggered.

287
6.4 Input State Detection
This feature is designed to monitor all inputs for a change of state whenever you start I/O monitoring. A
change from the defined state (N/O to N/C or N/C to N/O) can activate an alarm condition, e.g. a
warning light or buzzer.

1. On the main screen, click the I/O button (No. 7, Figure 1-2), and select Detect Input Status.
This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-14
2. Check the Input(s) you want to monitor.
3. For any state change, you can trigger an alarm output by checking Force Output when one or
more inputs are abnormal, and assigning the output module and pin number.
4. When the state change is detected, a warning message will pop up on the screen. In the Auto
close abnormal notify after x sec field, you can define the duration of the message to close itself
automatically.

After settings, you can manually detect all input states by selecting Detect Input Status. Or, you can
just start I/O monitoring. When the system detects any change of input state, you may see the
following window pop up for alert.

Figure 6-15

288
 6 I /O Applications

6.5 I/O Enable Setting

You can manually arm or disarm any I/O devices without interrupting the monitoring. For example,
when an output alarm is triggered at the front door, you can turn off the output while the system keeps
on recording and I/O monitoring.

1. On the main screen, click the I/O button (No. 7, Figure 1-2), and select I/O Enable Setting.

2. Check or uncheck Input and Output options to arm or disarm the device(s), and click Apply to
verify the changes.

Figure 6-16

289
6.6 Advanced I/O Panel
The Advanced I/O Panel provides a centrally managing solution for I/O devices installed across a wide
area. It simplifies the process of configuring and managing many I/O devices. Its major features are:
 Trigger I/O devices without starting I/O monitoring
 Group I/O devices for cascade triggers
 Monitor different I/O cascade configurations at different times of the day
 Quickly access triggered I/O devices by a Quick Link window

6.6.1 The Advanced I/O Panel

To open the panel, click the I/O button on the main screen, and then select Advanced I/O Panel.

1 2 3 4 5 6 9

7
8

Figure 6-17

The controls on the Advanced I/O Panel:

No. Name Description
1 Configure Accesses Panel and Schedule settings.
2 Mode Schedule Starts/stops Mode Schedule.
3 Toggle Quick Link Displays the Quick Link window for quick access to triggered I/O devices.
4 Advanced I/O List Style Displays the Advanced I/O List in various styles: View/Edit, Icon and Detail.
5 Expand Tree Row Expands tree branches.
6 Collapse Tree Row Collapses tree branches.
7 Mode Configures various cascade modes.
8 Standard I/O List Displays connected I/O modules.
9 Advanced I/O List Groups I/O devices in cascade mode.

290
 6 I /O Applications

6.6.2 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers

You can group I/O devices by function or geography. Further, the group allows cascade triggers,
meaning that the trigger actions of one trigger can activate another trigger.

For example, you might have a group called “Entrance” that contains all I/O devices installed at
entrances. The “Entrance” group might contain other sub groups, each of which contains just the
related I/O devices in various geographic locations:

Group containing all I/O devices installed at entrances

Input 2 installed at the front entrance
Output 1 sub group at the kitchen

Output 3 sub group at the garage

Figure 6-18

When Input 2 is triggered, it will trigger the sub groups of Output 1 and Output 3, and Output 1 will
trigger Output 2 in a cascade series.

Creating a Group:
1. Right-click on Advanced I/O List, and then select Add A Group. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-19

 Group Name: Names the group.

 Invoke Alarm: Invokes the computer alarm on I/O trigger. Select a sound from the drop-down
list.
 Enable advanced logical input in Multicam: See The “Advanced Logical Input Status in
Multicam” Option later in this chapter.

2. Click Save to apply the settings, and return to the panel.

3. To create a cascading hierarchy, drag the desired inputs/outputs from the left Standard I/O List to
the group.

Note: In the cascading hierarchy, each input can only be used once while the same output can be
used repeatedly.

291
 Editing a Group:
To modify group settings, right-click a group, and select View/Edit. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-20

[Group Name] As described in Figure 6-19.

[Group Notify Setting] As described in Figure 6-19.
[Current Pin Setting] To enable this option, highlight an I/O device from the group list at the bottom.
 Trigger Associated Outputs: Triggers outputs in cascade mode. Click the Finger button to apply
the change to all I/O devices at the same group.
 Change Icon: To enable this option, select one of two displayed icons: Normal or Trigger. Click
the Change Icon button to change an icon. Click the Finger button to apply the change to all I/O
devices at the same group.

292
 6 I /O Applications

Editing an I/O Device

In addition to editing groups, you can also edit the settings of individual I/O device. Right-click an I/O
device, and select Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-21

[Display Setting] You can define the nature of I/O devices by colors. Note that the setting only affects
the Detail style of the Advanced I/O List (No. 4, Figure 6-17).
 Alarm Level: Click the Alarm Level drop-down list, and select one of the six default colors: Fire,
Smog, Vibration, Intruder, Motion and Emergency. For the Level Undefined option, select Text
Color or Background Color, and then click the Input/Output drop-down list to change its color.

[Trigger Setting]
 Trigger Associated Outputs: Triggers outputs in cascade mode (see Creating a Group for
Cascade Triggers above).

293
6.6.3 Configuring the Advanced I/O Panel

On the panel toolbar, click the Configure button, and select Panel Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-22

[Startup]
 Show Quick Link: Opens the Quick Link window at panel startup.
 Start Schedule Monitoring: Starts Mode Schedule at panel startup. For details, see Setting up
Mode Schedule below.
[Layout]
 Show Host Name: Displays the host name of each I/O device on the Advanced I/O List.
 Use User-defined Text: Allows you to modify the text of Alarm Level (Figure 6-21).

294
 6 I /O Applications

6.6.4 Setting Up Mode Schedule

The Mode Schedule allows you to monitor different I/O cascade configurations at different time. For
example, you may want I/O cascade triggers one way during business hours and another way for
non-business hours. Modes can be switched automatically at a scheduled time.

Creating a Mode:
1. Click the Mode drop-down list (No. 7, Figure 6-17), and select More Edit. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-23

2. Click Add, and name the created mode. You can create up to 100 modes.
3. You can also apply the settings of the existed mode to the newly created mode. Click Copy, and
select from Default to create a mode of default settings, or select from selected Mode to create
a mode using the settings of the previously created mode.
4. Click Save to return to the panel.
5. Select the created mode from the Mode drop-down list, and create the groups in the Advanced I/O
List. For details, see Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers earlier in this chapter.

295
 Creating a Mode Schedule:
Define the times and days you like the panel to switch modes.

1. On the panel toolbar, click the Configure button, and select Schedule Setting. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 6-24

2. Click Add to create a schedule. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-25

 Name: Type a name for the schedule.

 Mode: Select a mode from the drop-down list.
 Time: Define a time period you want the mode to run.
 Days: Check the day(s) you want the mode to run.

3. Click OK to apply the settings, and click Save to return to the panel.
4. To start the mode schedule, click the Mode Schedule button (No. 2, Figure 6-17), and then select
Mode Schedule Start.

296
 6 I /O Applications

6.6.5 Quick Link

The Quick Link provides a quick access to triggered I/O devices. It is a separate window to display all
group icons. The group icon flashes when any included I/O device is triggered. Clicking the flashing
icon will bring you to the I/O location in the Advanced I/O List.

 To open the Quick Link window, click the Toggle Quick Link button. (No. 3, Figure 6-17).
 To set the Quick Link window at panel startup, see the Show Quick Link option in Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-26

6.6.6 Forcing Output

To manually force an output, click one output, and select Force Output.

 In the Standard I/O List, you can force the output individually.
 In the Advanced I/O List, considering cascade triggers, you can only manually force the output at
the top level, e.g. Figure 6-27. Other outputs at sub levels cannot be forced manually, e.g. Figure
6-28.
However, if the output is not in a cascading hierarchy, you can definitely force it manually, e.g.
Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-27 Figure 6-28 Figure 6-29

297
6.6.7 Editing Background Image

With the Background Image feature, you can import a floor plan to lay out the locations of triggered I/O
devices. This feature works in the Icon style of the Advanced I/O List.

1. To switch to the Icon style, click the Advanced I/O List Style button (No. 4, Figure 6-17) and then
select Icon.
2. Select a group in the Advanced I/O List. The I/O icons of this group will be displayed.
3. Right-click on the right screen, and select Background Image to import a graphic file.
4. Right-click on the right screen, and uncheck Auto Arrange. Now you can freely drag the I/O icons
to the desired locations on the imported map.
5. To add images to another group, repeat the steps 2 to 4.

Figure 6-30

Note: Highlighting Advanced I/O List in the Advanced I/O List, you can import another image.

6.6.8 System-Wide Triggers

The System-Wide feature gives privileges to remote applications, such as Center V2 and VSM, to
force the outputs in the Main System for cascade triggers.

For this example, the System-Wide feature is enabled in Output 1. When the VSM operator manually
forces Output 1, Output 2, 3 and 4 will be triggered in a cascade series. If the System-Wide feature is
disabled, the operator can only force Output 1 without cascade triggers.

Figure 6-31
To enable this feature, right-click an output at the top level, and then select System-Wide Output.

298
 6 I /O Applications

6.6.9 The “Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam”

Option
If you already set a specific input to trigger a specific output in the Main System, you can decide
whether to apply the simple input-trigger-output setting in the Advanced I/O Panel.

For example, you have set a simple access system in the Main System: Input 2 (card reader) triggers
Output 3 (the door opens).

I/O Device Setup I/O Application Setting

Figure 6-32

But to tighten security, you may set a group “Garage” in the Advanced I/O Panel. Both Input 1 (power
switch) and Input 2 (card reader) should be activated together to trigger Output 1 (light), Output 2
(alarm) and Output 3 (the door opens) in a cascade series. Simply activating Input 2 (card reader)
shouldn’t cause any output triggers in the cascading hierarchy.

power switch
card reader Output 3 door opens
light
alarm
door opens
Figure 6-33
So now you have the options:
 At default, the simple input-trigger-output setting is applied at the Advance I/O Panel when I/O
monitoring is activated. For this example, Input 2 will trigger Output 3.
 To only apply the cascade triggers set in the Advanced I/O Panel and ignore the simple
input-trigger-output setting, enable Use adv. Logical input result as input status from the I/O
icon on the main screen and Enable advanced logical input in Multicam from a certain group
(see Figure 6-19) together.
 To switch to the simple input-trigger-output setting, just disable Enable advanced logical input in
Multicam.

299
6.6.10 Managing a Group of I/O Devices
With groups of I/O devices set up on the I/O Advanced Panel, you can enable or disable these I/O
devices by groups.

Enabling a Group
On the I/O Advanced Panel, right-click a desired group and select Start Monitoring. All input devices
of this group are now enabled. When inputs are triggered, outputs will be activated in cascade mode.

Disabling a Group
On the I/O Advanced Panel, right-click a desired group and select Stop Monitoring. All input devices
of this group are now disabled. No cascade triggers will occur.

Pausing the Triggered Inputs

This feature is designed for a group of outputs set to be Toggle mode. When inputs activate outputs in
cascade triggers, right-click this group and select Pause Monitoring. The inputs of the group will be
reset, but the outputs keep on alarming.

Note: With the System-Wide Output option (see System-Wide Triggers above) activated, you
cannot use these three options to manage a group of I/O devices.

300
 6 I /O Applications

6.7 Visual Automation

The Visual Automation helps you automate any electronic device by triggering the connected output.
You can intuitively click on the image of the electronic device to change its current state, e.g. light ON.

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, and
select Visual Automation Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-34
2. Select the desired camera from the drop-down list, and check Enable.
3. Drag the region on the image of the desired device. A dialog box appears.
4. Select the connected module and output device. Type a Note to help you manage the device.
5. To change the frame color of the set region, click the Set Color button.
6. To emboss the set region, select Float Up or select Normal to keep it flat.
7. Click OK.

To use Visual Automation, on the main screen, click the desired camera name, and select I/O
Automation to bring up a separate window. Click the set regions to trigger the connected output
devices. To change the style of the set region, right-click the I/O icon .

Figure 6-35

301
6.8 Virtual I/O Control
Through TCP/IP connection, the GV-System can remotely control the I/O devices connected from the
GV-I/O Box with Ethernet module, GV-Wiegand Capture and GV-IP Devices.

On the main screen, click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select Accessories, click I/O
Application and select Virtual I/O Setting. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-36

For details on the settings in the Virtual I/O Device Setting dialog box, see I/O Device Setup earlier in
this chapter.

Note: The Enable option in the Signal Type section of the dialog box can turn on or off the I/O device
of the added IP device.

302
 6 I /O Applications

6.8.1 Setting a I/O Module

Up to 16 connected I/O devices can be combined to be one module for the GV-System to use.

Note: I/O devices from GV-Video Server, GV-Compact DVR and GV-IP Camera can be combined to
build a module. However, I/O devices of GV-Wiegand Capture or GV-I/O Box can only combine with
those of another GV-Wiegand Capture or GV-I/O Box to set up a module.

1. Ensure the GV-IP Device, GV-Wiegand Capture or GV-I/O Box of Ethernet module has added to
and recognized by the GV-System.
2. In the Virtual I/O Device Setting dialog box (Figure 6-36), select one device, e.g. GV IP Device,
and click the Add button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 6-37

3. The connected devices appear on the IP address list. Select the desired devices and click the [>>]
button to add their I/O devices to the Mapping list. The total number of added I/O devices is
displayed at the bottom of the Mapping list. Click OK.
4. Select the added module from the list, and define the input status in the Monitor Input section. For
details, see [Input x] in I/O Device Setup earlier in this chapter. Click OK.
5. On the main screen, click the I/O button (No. 7, Figure 1-2). This module is available from the
selection list.

303
 Chapter 7

Point-Of-Sale (POS) Application .................305

7.1 POS Device Setup ............................................................................ 306
7.2 POS Data Overlay ............................................................................. 308
7.3 POS Field Filter ................................................................................. 309
7.4 Abnormal Transaction Alerts ....................................................... 311
7.4.1 Setting Alarm Frequency .......................................................................... 312

7.5 Codepage Mapping .......................................................................... 313

7.6 POS Data Search .............................................................................. 314
7.7 POS Live View ................................................................................... 315
7.7.1 The POS Live View Window ..................................................................... 315
7.7.2 Setting Live View......................................................................................... 316

7.8 POS Color Text .................................................................................. 317

7.8.1 Setting POS Color Text .............................................................................. 318

304
 7
CHAPTER

Point-Of-Sale (POS) Application

A POS device can be integrated to GV-System with transaction data overlaid on video channels.
Transaction alerts can be sent to notify you of transaction events. Video searches can be performed
based on a specific transaction item or a desired time period.

GeoVision provides three POS solutions to meet a variety of needs:

1. Direct POS Integration
2. GV-Data Capture Box Integration
3. Graphic Mode POS Integration

Please check the flowchart to find out which solution is suitable for you:
http://classic.geovision.com.tw/english/faq/POSflowchart/posflow-1_new.htm

305
7.1 POS Device Setup
To set up a POS device in GV-System, follow these steps:

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, click POS Application
Setting, and select POS Device Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-1

2. Click the New button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-2

306
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

 Printer Type: Select Serial Port, Parallel Port or TCP/IP Port depending on the type of
connection between GV-System and the POS device.
 Device: Select the number of the POS device if multiple POS devices are connected, and
rename it if necessary.
 Mapping Camera: Assign the POS device to a camera screen to display POS data.
 POS Module: Select the printer attached to the POS device.
 If Epson POS device is connected, select Epson; otherwise, select General.
 If the POS device is of graphic mode, select Graphic Mode.
 COM Port: Select the COM port on GV-System used for RS-232 connection if the connection
method is used. Click the button under the COM port to configure Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity
and Stop Bits of the POS device.
 Data Capture IP Address Settings:
When the network connection is used between the POS device and GV-System, type the IP
address or domain name of the POS device, the device port and password that were set on
GV-Text Sender, GV-POS SW Capture or GV-Data Capture Box. By default, the device port is
4000.
3. Click Add. The POS device is added to GV-System.

Additional functions available on the setting dialog box:

 Cash Drawer Open Signal: Only available when an input module is configured in GV-System.
Assign the input module connected to the cash drawer. Every time when the cash drawer is
opened, a signal will be sent to GV-System and recorded in System Log for later retrieval.
 Use Codepage Mapping: This feature is to support special characters and symbols display. For
details, see Codepage Mapping later in this chapter.
 Trace Mode: Select this option only when recommended by our technical support staff.

307
7.2 POS Data Overlay
To change the text overlay of the transaction data on the live view and recorded files, on the POS
Server Setup window (Figure 7-1), select the Text Setup button.

Figure 7-3

[Camera Name] Select a camera to be configured.

[Text] Select to display POS data on the recorded video file, the live video and/or the POS Live
View window (see POS Live View later in this chapter).
[Alignment] Select the position of text overlay on the live video.

[Photograph]
 Print text on video file or on screen with photograph: Overlays the photos with access
text onto the live video and recorded file.
 Print on POS Live View: Displays the photos on the POS Live View window. See POS Live
View later in this chapter.
 Alignment: Select the position of photo overlay on the screen.

[Enable clean time] Specify the amount of time in seconds after which GV-System has not
received the transaction data from the POS device, i.e. the cashier stops entering the transaction
data. The already-displayed POS data will be hidden from the live view..
 Transaction end dwell time: Specify the amount of time in seconds that POS data stays on
the live view before the next transaction.

308
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

7.3 POS Field Filter

POS Field Filter allows you to create a separate column for a transaction item in System Log. The
feature filters the transactions and highlights the price of the item under the created column.

For this example, the transaction item is “Golden Pineapple” which transaction data stands out in the
System Log to gain your attention.

Figure 7-4

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, select POS Application
Setting, and select POS Field Filter Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-5

309
 2. Click the New button and select Caption Data. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-6

[Key Word] Type a keyword that matches exactly a transaction item in the receipt. The field is
case sensitive.
[Capture Data Type] Select the type of data followed by the specified transaction item: Numeric,
Currency or Alphabetic. If the transaction item is followed by a price amount, select Numeric or
Currency. If it is followed by alphabets, select Alphabetic. Any defined amount or text after the
keyword will be brought out.
 With Comma: If there are commas in a price amount, e.g. $1,000, select the option.
 With Decimal Sign: If there are decimal signs in a price amount, e.g. 10.5, select the option.
 With Space: The option is only available when you select Alphabetic. If there is space
among letters, select the option.

[MDB File Entry Name] Name the file to store the data.

3. Click OK.
4. Open the System Log (ViewLog > System Log) to see the filtering results.

310
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

7.4 Abnormal Transaction Alerts

When an abnormal price of a particular transaction item occurs, this function can automatically activate
the output device and send out assigned E-Mail/SMS/Pager alerts. To set up this function, follow these
steps:

1. Follow the instructions in POS Filed Filter earlier in this chapter to define a transaction item first.
2. In the POS Capture Data Setting dialog box (Figure 7-6), click the Loss Prevention Setting
button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-7

[Alarm Conditions] Select this option and define the price range for an alarm condition. For this
example, when the price of a particular transaction item is great than or equal to (>=) 10000
dollars and less than or equal to (<=) 100000 dollars, the assigned alarm will be activated.
[Alarm Output] Assign an installed output module. When the defined alarm condition is met, the
output alarm will be triggered.
[Alert Message] Type an alert message. When the defined alarm condition is met, the message
will be sent through e-mail, hotline or SMS based on your setting. And the alert message will also
be noted in the System Log.

311
7.4.1 Setting Alarm Frequency

You can set up alarm frequency to eliminate false alarms. In the Loss Prevention Setting dialog box
(Figure 7-8), click Advanced.

Figure 7-8

 Frequency Condition: Set up the number of event occurrences within a time period to trigger the
alarm.
 Number of Occurrences: Specify the number of event occurrences.
 Time Frame: Select one of the time periods: one hour, 12 hours, one day, one week or one
month.
 Return to the configured frequency conditions: After the alarm is triggered by the set
frequency, the system starts counting frequency again from zero. If this option is disabled,
every event will trigger the alarm.

In System Log, the events matching the alarm frequency settings will be marked with “Alarm.”

Figure 7-9

312
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

7.5 Codepage Mapping

The feature is to support the display of special characters and symbols. When transaction text
incorrectly appears on the screen, a wrong character code may be used. To change a character code,
follow the steps below.

Note: When you cannot find a proper “Script” in the Set Font option (Figure 7-3), you may use the
Codepage feature to fix the display issue of transaction text.

1. To verify the character code you selected, click the […] button to preview its codepage.

Figure 7-10

2. In the From field, select one symbol or character that are not displayed correctly. In this example,
you can see its previous character code (From side: Ox9C) has been transferred to the default
equivalent (To side: OxA3).

313
7.6 POS Data Search
You can locate any desired POS data and videos during a transaction. On the main screen, click the
ViewLog button and select Search POS Data to display the Quick Search window. When the Quick
Search starts, the latest transaction video and data will be displayed. For details on this feature, see
Quick Search in Chapter 4.

Note: When IP cameras are installed with POS devices, the following two conditions may occur.
 Over Internet, the POS data and live view could not match properly. In this case, it is not
recommended to install IP cameras with POS devices.
 Over LAN, live view may delay about 3 fps before or after the POS data displayed.

314
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

7.7 POS Live View

The POS Live View can display transaction data in a separate window instead of overlaying data on
the main screen. The POS Live View is designed for 1280 x 1024 screen resolution, allowing to
juxtapose the main screen of 1024 x 768 with the POS Live View.

7.7.1 The POS Live View Window

On the main screen, click the ViewLog button, and select POS Live View.

Figure 7-11

The controls in the POS Live View Window:

No. Name Description
1 Previous Transaction Goes to the previous transaction data.
2 Next Transaction Goes to the next transaction data.
Suspends the current transaction data display. Clicking this button
3 Freeze
again will restore to the live display.
4 Live View Menu Accesses the settings of POS Live View.
5 Exit Closes the POS Live View window.

315
7.7.2 Setting Live View

To change the display status on the POS Live View window, click the Live View Menu button (No.4,
Figure 7-22) and select Live View Setup.

Figure 7-12

[View Setting]
 Max Transactions in Each View: Enter the number of transactions you want to keep on the POS
Live View window. For example, if you enter 99, there are always 99 transactions kept on the
window. When the 100th transaction is entered, the oldest transaction data will be deleted and the
max. transaction number remains to be 99.
 Max Rows in Each View: Enter the number of transaction rows you want to keep on the POS
Live View window, which includes any materials printed by the POS device, e.g. data and time.

[Mode Setting]
 Single View: Displays only one POS Live View window on the screen.
 Multi View: Displays multiple POS Live View windows on the screen.
 Save User Define Arrange Position: Allows you to freely place the multiple windows on the
screen.
To use this feature:
(1) Drag the windows to the desired places on the screen.
(2) Open the Live View Setup dialog box, and click this option. Click Yes to save your
arrangement when this warning message appears: Are you sure to save User Define Arrange
Position?
Whenever you want to place the POS Live View windows as your previous arrangement, click the
Live View Menu button, point to Arrange Views, and select Custom View.

316
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

7.8 POS Color Text

You can highlight a desired transaction item in any color. When the transaction item is identified, its text
will have an outstanding color than others on the live view, and the alarm and e-mail alerts can be
triggered. For example, if the liquor is prohibited for sale in the midnight, a seller can use this feature to
prevent from any unintentional sale.

The identification will be recorded in the System Log for later retrieval as well. In this example, the
transaction item “Strawberry” is colored red, “Golden Pineapple” is orange, and “Ice Cream” is pink
whenever these transaction items appear.

Figure 7-13

317
7.8.1 Setting POS Color Text

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, click POS Application
Setting, and select POS Field Filter Setup. The POS Capture Data Setting dialog box appears.
2. Click New and select Color Keyword. This dialog box appears.

Figure 7-14

[Key Word] Type the keyword to be identified in the transactions. The field is case sensitive.
[Color] Specify a color to highlight the keyword.
[Only work between] Specify the time period of transactions to identify the keyword.

Note: You can set up to 32 keywords for identification.

3. To trigger an alarm when the keyword is detected during the transactions, click the Loss
Prevention Setting button in the POS Capture Data Setting dialog box. This dialog box appears..

4.
Figure 7-15

 Enable Alarm: Enable the alarm when the defined text is detected. To configure alarm
frequency, click the Advanced button. For details, see Setting Alarm Frequency earlier in this
chapter.

318
 7 Point-of-Sale (POS) Application

 Alarm Output: Assign an installed output module. When the defined alarm condition is met,
the output alarm will be triggered.
 Alert Message: Type an alert message. When the defined alarm condition is met, the E-mail
or SMS alerts will be sent.
5. Click OK.

6. When the keyword is identified in the transactions, the identification appears not only on the live view
but also on the POS Live View window. It is also recorded in the System Log.

319
 Chapter 8

Remote Viewing..........................................322
8.1 Remote Viewing Using a Web Browser......................................323
8.2 WebCam Server Settings ................................................................326
8.2.1 General Settings .......................................................................................... 326
8.2.2 Server Settings ............................................................................................. 327
8.2.3 Video Settings............................................................................................... 328
8.2.4 SDK Settings ................................................................................................. 329
8.2.5 Audio Settings............................................................................................... 330
8.2.6 JPG Settings .................................................................................................. 331
8.2.7 3GPP Settings ............................................................................................... 332
8.2.8 Mobile Settings............................................................................................. 333
8.2.9 Multicast Settings ....................................................................................... 334
8.2.10 P2P Setting .................................................................................................. 335
8.2.11 UPnP Settings............................................................................................. 336
8.2.12 FTP Server Settings.................................................................................. 337
8.2.13 Network Port Information ...................................................................... 338

8.3 Single View Viewer...........................................................................339

8.3.1 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream .................................... 341
8.3.2 Control Panel................................................................................................. 342
8.3.3 Configuring Single View Options............................................................ 343
8.3.4 PTZ Control .................................................................................................... 347
8.3.5 Visual PTZ Control Panel .......................................................................... 348
8.3.6 I/O Control ...................................................................................................... 348
8.3.7 Visual Automation ....................................................................................... 349
8.3.8 Picture-in-Picture View.............................................................................. 350
8.3.9 Picture-and-Picture View .......................................................................... 350

8.4 2-Window Viewer...............................................................................351

8.5 Multi-Window Viewer .......................................................................351
8.6 Multi View Viewer .............................................................................352
8.6.1 Installation of Multi View.......................................................................... 352
8.6.2 Channel Status Information ..................................................................... 355
8.6.3 Host List.......................................................................................................... 356
8.6.4 Creation of a Host ....................................................................................... 357
8.6.5 Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host ........................... 358

320
 8.6.6 Video Recording ........................................................................................... 360
8.6.7 Camera Polling.............................................................................................. 360
8.6.8 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream .................................... 360
8.6.9 PTZ Control .................................................................................................... 361
8.6.10 Visual PTZ Control Panel........................................................................ 361
8.6.11 Output Control ............................................................................................ 362
8.6.12 Remote ViewLog........................................................................................ 362
8.6.13 System Configuration .............................................................................. 363
8.6.14 Camera Status............................................................................................ 364
8.6.15 Host Information........................................................................................ 365
8.6.16 Icon Image Change ................................................................................... 366

8.7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast ....................................................367

8.7.1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings ................................. 367
8.7.2 Sending Audio Broadcast.......................................................................... 369
8.7.3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast .......................................... 370

8.8 JPEG Image Viewer..........................................................................372

8.9 Remote Playback ..............................................................................373
8.10 Remote ViewLog .............................................................................374
8.11 Event List Query..............................................................................375
8.12 Download Center.............................................................................376
8.13 Mobile Phone Applications ..........................................................377

321
 8
CHAPTER

Remote Viewing
With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you can remotely view live video, download and play back video files,
manage systems within the security network, control PTZ camera and I/O devices through the
WebCam server.

The remote computer used to access live video must meet the following minimum requirements:
OS 32-bit Windows 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10, Windows Server 2008
64-bit Windows 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 / 2012 R2
CPU Pentium 4, 2.0 GHz
Memory 2 x 1 GB Dual Channels
Hard Disk 80 GB
Graphic Card AGP or PCI-Express, 800 x 600 (1280 x 1024 recommended),
32-bit color
AGP or PCI-Express, 1024 x 768, 32-bit color (for Multi View
Viewer only)
Network TCP/IP
Web Browser IE 7.0 or later
DirectX 9.0c

With non-IE browsers, the below browsers are supported for remotely viewing live view, playing back
videos and listing the event query only:
Google Chrome V31.0.1650.63 or earlier
Mozilla Firefox V26.0 or earlier
Apple Safari V5.1.7 or earlier

322
 8 Remote Viewing

8.1 Remote Viewing Using a Web Browser

The GV-System has a built-in WebCam Server that allows you to remotely view and manage the
camera images from GV-System using a Web browser. Different browsers have slightly different user
interfaces.

Note:

1. For Internet connection, the GV-System must have an IP address or domain name from ISP. If
the IP address is dynamic, you may use the DDNS service to direct changing IP addresses to
the GV-System. For the service, see Dynamic DNS in Chapter 11.

2. Make sure the remote PC is going to access the GV-System meets the minimum system
requirements mentioned above.

3. If a router or firewall is installed with the GV-System server, ensure the following
communication ports required by WebCam Server are open: Command Port (4550), Data Port
(5550), Audio Port (6550) and HTTP Port (80).

1. To start the WebCam server on GV-System, click the Network button. The Server Setup dialog
box appears. The first-time user can click OK without making any configuration to close the
dialog box and start. When the WebCam server is started, “Web” and “CCS” signs appear on the
main screen as illustrated below.

Figure 8-1

323
 2. On any remote computer, open a Web browser and type the IP address or domain name of the
GV-System. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-2

3. Type a user ID and a password created on the GV-System.

4. Click Login. When the connection is established, this Single View page appears.

Figure 8-3

324
 8 Remote Viewing

Web Server’s features vary between IE and non-IE browsers. The following features will be introduced
later in this chapter:

WebCam Server Features on IE Browsers

Name Description
Accesses different types of live view viewers.
Live View See Single View Viewer, 2-Window Viewer, Multi-Window Viewer, Multicast and
Audio Broadcast, and JPEG Image Viewer later in this chapter.
Accesses remote playback options.
Remote Play Back
See Event List Query later in this chapter.
DMMultiView Accesses the Multi View Viewer. See Multi View Viewer later in this chapter.

Remote ViewLog Accesses the Remote ViewLog. See Remote ViewLog later in this chapter.
Accesses E-Maps remotely set up at the GV-System.
Remote E-Map
See E-Map Application in Chapter 9.
Accesses the Download Center. This function offers optional viewing programs
Download to be downloaded to the local PC.
See Download Center later in this chapter.
Home Returns to the Login page.

325
8.2 WebCam Server Settings

To enable and configure the GV-System’s built-in WebCam Server, click the Network button and select
WebCam Server.

8.2.1 General Settings

Figure 8-4

[WebCam Options]

 Enhance network security: If enabled, a word verification step is required for each WebCam
Server’s login.
 Enable Remote Control: Select to remotely configure the GV-System, PTZ cameras or I/O
devices through the WebCam server.
 Run Viewlog Server: Select to remotely play back video files through the WebCam server.
 Run Bandwidth Control Server: Select to enable the Bandwidth Control Server. For details,
see Bandwidth Control Application in Chapter 11.

[Frame Page Title Color] Select the color of date, time and camera stamps on the frame.

Note: When Enhance network security is enabled,

 the users using earlier version than 8.0 cannot access WebCam Server anymore, and
 JPEG/3GPP/Mobile applications will be disabled.

326
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.2 Server Settings

Figure 8-5

[Run GeoHTTP Server] Enable Geo-developed HTTP server. Command Port is used to access
WebCam, and Data Port is used to transfer data over Internet.

[Enable SSL] Enable the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol to ensure the security and privacy of
Internet connection. To use your own generated Certificate and Private Key or ones verified by SSL
authority, click the […] buttons and select the files stored at your computer. Note that the system will
enable both SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0 as its default; to further enable TLS 1.0 protocol when using SSL
protocol, select Enable TLS 1.0.

[Detect UPnP] For details, see UPnP Settings later in this chapter.

Note: If you want to enable SSL 3.0 on a computer running Windows Vista, it is required to upgrade
your system to Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2.

327
8.2.3 Video Settings

Figure 8-6

 Max. Channel(s): Specify the number of channels allowed to access the WebCam server, with
the upper limit of 200 channels.

 Max Image size: Select a maximum resolution on the WebCam server. The default resolution on
the WebCam is Normal (320 x 240).
 For DVR video source, if you want to view the image of Middle (640 x 480 (De-interlace),
704 x 480 (De-interlace)) or Large (640 x 480 or 704 x 480) size on the remote site, you also
need to configure a corresponding Video Source on the GV-System. Click the Configure
button on the main screen, select A/V Setting, and select Video Source. In the Video
Resolution field, select 640 x 480 or higher resolutions, and then click OK to apply.
 For IP video source, you can have larger size than DVR’s. Besides normal, middle and large
size, select Actual Size of that IP video. Refer to Hardware-Compressed and Megapixel
Stream in Single View Viewer and Multi View Viewer later in this chapter.
 Allowed PTZ camera: Controls PTZ cameras at a remote computer. Click the button and select
the desired PTZ cameras to allow for remote access.

Note: To specify the time length allowed for a guest user to access the WebCam server, click the
Configure button on the main screen, select System Configure, select Password Setup, and select
Local Account Edit. On the WebCam tab, select the Limit Connection Time option and specify the
time length. The time range is between 10 and 3600 seconds.

328
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.4 SDK Settings

Figure 8-7

This feature is only used for SDK users to prevent overloading on slower networks.

 Max. Channel(s): Specify the number of channels allowed to be downloaded to a client PC.

 Bandwidth Control: Enable and specify the rate of data to be transferred over network. The
option effectively controls the bandwidth being used by the WebCam server.

329
8.2.5 Audio Settings

Connecting Audio Devices

Through the WebCam server, you can access live audio on a remote PC and talk to the server site.
Before performing the two-way audio, make sure all the necessary hardware is in place:

1. To record audio, connect microphones to the audio inputs on GV-Video Capture Card.

2. Make sure the sound card is functioning properly on the remote PC to receive the audio.

3. Connect a microphone to the remote PC to talk to the server site.

Audio Setup

Figure 8-8
[Server to Client] Allows a remote computer to access live audio from the GV-System server.

 Max. Channel(s): Enter the maximum number of channels allowed to access live audio, with the
upper limit of 40 channels.

[Client to Server] Allows a remote computer to speak to the GV-System server.

 Max. Channel(s): Enter the maximum number of channels allowed to speak to the server site,
with the upper limit of 20 channels.

 Port: The default audio port is 6550.

330
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.6 JPG Settings

These settings allow you to send JPEG or GIF files over Internet.

Figure 8-9

 Create JPEG/GIF file(s): Allows you to view the JPEG/GIF images remotely, and adjust image
quality. Bigger number results in better image quality and bigger image file size. You can use the
JPEG Image Viewer of the WebCam server to access the JPEG images over Internet. Enabling
this function also allows you to use GV mobile applications i-Mode, GV-Remote View, GV-iView
and GV-AView to access the JPEG images on your mobile phone.

 FTP Transfer JPEG file: Downloads JPEG images from the FTP server. For details, see FTP
Server Settings later in this chapter.

331
8.2.7 3GPP Settings

These settings allow you to stream video and audio on 3G-enabled mobile phones.

Figure 8-10

 RTSP/TCP Port: The default communication port is 8554.

 Max. Connections: Specify the maximum number of users connecting to this server. Set the
number between 1 and 100.

 RTP/RTCP/UDP Port: The default port range is from 17300 to 17380 with the limit of 80 ports.

332
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.8 Mobile Settings

These settings allow you to perform mobile phone applications. For details, see Mobile Phone
Applications later in this chapter.

Figure 8-11
 Port: The default communication port is 8866.
 RPB port: This port is used to allow remote playback. The default value is 5511. For remote
playback, Run ViewLog Server (Network > WebCam Server) must be enabled too.
 Max. connection: Specify the maximum number of users connecting to this server. Set the
number between 1 and 20.

333
8.2.9 Multicast Settings

These settings allow you to perform multicast and audio broadcast functions. For details, see Multicast
and Audio Broadcast later in this chapter.

Figure 8-12

 Multicast: By default the IP address is 224.1.1.2, and port number is 8300 to send the video and
audio stream. Optionally, you can specify a Password for hosts to activate the Multicast. Click the
Camera and Audio buttons to select which camera and audio are accessible through multicast.

 Receive Broadcast Audio: By default the IP address is 224.1.1.3, and port number is 8400 to
receive audio broadcasting.

 Network Card: Select another network card, if available, to run the Multicast on a different
network. Since the Multicast can take a lot of bandwidth when enabled, separating it from the
main network is advised whenever possible.

334
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.10 P2P Setting

After installing GV-Eye V2.7 or later on your mobile device, you can scan the QR code here to connect
with GV-DVR / NVR for live viewing. For details on using the app, see the GV-Eye Installation Guide.

Figure 8-13

335
8.2.11 UPnP Settings

WebCam Server supports UPnP technology (Universal Plug and Play) to allow automatic port
configuration to your router. UPnP must be enabled both on your operating system and your router.

Enabling UPnP on the WebCam Server:

1. On the main screen, click the Network button, select WebCam Server, and click the Server tab.
The Server Setup dialog box appears.

2. Click Detect UPnP. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-14

3. Click Searching to search the UPnP-enabled routers.

4. If your server is installed with multiple routers, select a desired one from the UPnP Router
drop-down list.

5. If you server is installed with multiple network adapters, select a desired one from the IP Address
drop-down list.

6. Click Configure to automatically configure the communication ports on the router.

Tip: If you don’t use the default ports, modify the related ports in the Server Setup dialog box (Network
> WebCam Server > Server tab). Re-open the dialog box and follow above steps to configure your
router.

336
 8 Remote Viewing

8.2.12 FTP Server Settings

To access the recorded images in JPEG format from a remote computer installed with the FTP server,
select the FTP transfer JPEG file option (Network > WebCam Server > JPG tab), and click the FTP
Setup button to display the following dialog box.

Figure 8-15

1. In the Server Host Name field, type the IP address or domain name of the FTP server. Modify the
default port value 21 if necessary.
2. Type a login username and password of the FTP server.
3. Specify a file path to save the recorded images on the FTP server.
4. Click the Transfer Camera button and assign which camera’s files to be transferred to the FTP
server.
5. In the Send File Delay field, specify the frequency to upload recorded images from the
GV-System to the FTP server. The time range is from 0.1 to 600 seconds.
6. In the Connection Retries field, specify the number of retries when the FTP connection fails (Max:
999). In the Retry Delay field, specify the interval between each connection retry (Max: 9999
sec.).
7. Click OK to apply above settings.

337
8.2.13 Network Port Information

To view and manage all the network ports used for remote applications, on the main screen, click the
Network button, and select Network Port Information.

1 2 3

Figure 8-16

The controls on the Port Settings:

No. Name Description
1 Modify Changes the port settings.
2 Save Saves the port settings.
Employs UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) to allow automatic port
3 Port Mapping
configuration to the router.

338
 8 Remote Viewing

8.3 Single View Viewer

After you log into the WebCam server successfully, you can see the single live view from the
GV-System.

1 2 3

4
5
6

15

14
13 12 11 10 9 8 7

Figure 8-17

The controls in the Single View Viewer:

No. Name Description

Indicates the remaining time when you log in as Guest. When time is up,
1 Countdown Timer
you will be logged out automatically.
2 Control Panel See Control Panel later in this chapter.
Brings up these options: Alarm Notify, Video and Audio Configuration,
Remote Config, Change Server, Show Camera Name and Image
3 Option Enhance.
See Alarm Notification, Video and Audio Configuration, Remote
Configuration, Server List, and Image Enhancement later in this chapter.
4 Change Camera Selects the desired camera for display.
Displays the PTZ control panel.
5 PTZ Control
See PTZ Control and Visual PTZ Control Panel later in this chapter.
6 I/O Control Displays the I/O control panel. See I/O Control later in this chapter.

339
 Switches to full screen view. The maximum video resolution configured
7 Full Screen on the GV-System will be applied. See Video Settings in WebCam
Server Settings earlier in this chapter.
Saves live video in the local computer. See Video Recording later in this
8 File Save
chapter.
Adjusts video quality with three options: Geo H264 , Geo MPEG4, and
Actual Size.
9 Change Quality
For hardware-compressed and megapixel quality, see
Hardware-Compressed and Megapixel Stream later in this chapter.
10 Snapshot Takes a snapshot of the displayed live video.
Enables live audio from the remote GV-System.
11 Speaker
See Video and Audio Configuration later in this chapter.
Enables speaking to the remote GV-System.
12 Microphone
See Video and Audio Configuration later in this chapter.
13 Stop Terminates the connection to the remote GV-System.

16 Play Connects to the remote GV-System.

Right-clicking on live video allows you to instantly access some useful
14 Live Video functions. The Resolution option can display a resolution indicator at the
bottom right corner of the video.

Displaying Full Screen Live View on Another Monitors

Using the IE browser, you can display up to 10 full-screen channels with multiple monitors installed.
Right-click the live view and select a designated monitor to bring full screen live view. The full screen
live view appears on the designated monitor immediately.

Note: The full-screen display closes at the designed monitor if its Web interface window is
minimized.

340
 8 Remote Viewing

8.3.1 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream

If your video source is of hardware compression or megapixel, you can choose better video quality on
the WebCam server. The following conditions can produce a hardware-compressed or megapixel
video stream:
1. GV-4008 Card is installed on the GV-System.
2. Video sources of the GV-System are from IP video devices.

To receive hardware-compressed or megapixel stream through the WebCam server:

1. Select Actual Size on the GV-System. Click the Network button, select WebCam Server, click
the Video tab and select Actual Size in the Max Image Size option.

Figure 8-18
2. On the Single View, click the Change Quality button (No. 9, Figure 8-16). You will have the option
of megapixel resolution now.

Note:
1. The hardware-compressed and megapixel video stream requires a lot of bandwidth. It is highly
recommended to enable this function in a LAN environment.
2. To enable fisheye functions through WebCam server, you must first follow the steps above to set
fisheye camera to megapixel resolution. Next, right-click the camera view and select Geo Fisheye
to see the fisheye settings. For details on the fisheye settings, see Fisheye View in chapter 3.

341
8.3.2 Control Panel

A control panel can be opened next to the live view by clicking the Menu button and selecting any of
the options. To change the pages of the control panel, use the right and left arrow buttons on the panel,
or click the Menu button to directly make selection

Figure 8-19
The functions on the control panel:
Name Description
Displays the current version, local time, host time and number of channels
Information
currently accessing WebCam.
Video Displays the current video codec, resolution and data rate.
Displays audio data rates when the microphone and speaker devices are
Audio
enabled.
Preset Go Remotely moves the PTZ to the preset points.
Provides a graphic display of the input and output devices from the
I/O Control
GV-System.
Displays the captured images by sensor triggers and/or motion detection.
Alarm Notify
See Alarm Notification later.
Camera Adjustment Remotely adjusts image quality by moving the slider to the desired values.
Displays POS transactions or cardholder data along with live video. If the
POS/Wiegand monitoring is activated on the GV-System, double-clicking any transaction
items or cardholder data can have an instant playback.
Displays the counting results of Object Counting along with live view. Once the
People Count counts are logged into the GV-System, In and Out counts will become zero
and the system will start counting those numbers again.

342
 8 Remote Viewing

8.3.3 Configuring Single View Options

To access the Single View Viewer options, click the Option button located on the right of the live view.

Figure 8-20

Alarm Notification
Up to four captured images can be shown in the control panel upon motion detection or input trigger.

Pop-up live video Captured images

Figure 8-21

1. Click the Option button, and select Alarm Notify. The Alarm Notify dialog box appears.
 Motion Notify: The captured images are displayed in the control panel of the Single View
upon motion detection.
 I/O Alarm Notify: The captured images are displayed in the control panel of the Single View
upon input-triggered detection.
 Alert Sound: Activates the computer noise alarm on motion and input-triggered detection.
 Auto Snapshot: The program will take a snapshot every 5 seconds on motion and
input-triggered detection.
 File Path: Assigns a path to save the snapshots.

343
 2. Click OK to apply the above settings.

Video and Audio Configuration

To change the video and audio configurations of the connected camera, click the Option button, and
select Video and Audio Configuration.

Figure 8-22

[Camera]
Change the video codec, quality and frame rate. The resolution options are corresponded to the
maximum image size set on the connected GV-System. For details, see Video Settings in WebCam
Server Settings earlier in this chapter. The Defog and Stabilizer options are only available after being
activated on the connected GV-System.

[Audio Configure]
Enable the microphone and speaker for two-way audio communication. Select Speaker to access live
audio from the server site, and select Microphone to speak to the server site. Ensure the speaker and
microphone are properly installed in the local computer, and the audio settings (Network > WebCam
Server > Audio tab) are activated on the WebCam server too. There are three options for audio
quality:

 Normal: The default value which has the audio and video effects between Real-Time and Smooth.

 Real Time: Transmits simultaneously audio and video but may create sound interruption
depending on your network condition.

 Smooth: Has a smooth sound quality but without audio and video synchronization.

344
 8 Remote Viewing

Remote Configuration
Remote Configuration allows you to start/stop recording, enable/disable I/O monitoring and
activate/deactivate schedules to the remote GV-System. For this function to work, Enable Remote
Control (Network > WebCam Server) is required to be enabled on the remote GV-System.

Click the Option button and select Remote Config to display the following dialog box.

Figure 8-23

[Record] Check the desired cameras to start or stop recording to the remote GV-System.
[Monitor] Enable I/O and Schedule monitoring to the remote GV-System. Click the Send button to
apply the settings.

345
 Server List
You can add the connection information of multiple GV-Systems to the WebCam server for quick
access later. Click the Option button, and select Change Server to display the following dialog box.

The Host
drop-down list

Figure 8-24

To add a server to the drop-down list, click the New button. In Host Name field, type a name to identify
the GV-System. Type the IP address or domain name of the GV-System. Type a valid username and
password to log in to the GV-System. Leave all port settings as defaults at 4550, 5550, and 6550
respectively unless otherwise necessary. Click the OK button. Then the created GV-System will
appear in the drop-down list.

Show Camera Name

To show camera name on top-left corner of the live view, click the Option button and select Show
Camera Name.

Image Enhancement
To enhance the image quality of live video, click the Option button and select Image Enhance.

 De-Interlace: Converts the interlaced video into non-interlaced video.

 De-Block: Removes the block-like artifacts from low-quality and highly compressed video.

 Enable DirectDraw: Enabled by default. Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can
produce distorted frames. Clear this option to disable the DirectDraw function.

346
 8 Remote Viewing

8.3.4 PTZ Control

Click the Camera Select button to select one PTZ camera, and click the PTZ Control button (No. 5,
Figure 8-16) to bring up the PTZ control panel.

Figure 8-24

One PTZ camera only allows one user to control at a time. If several users are trying to control the
same PTZ camera simultaneously, the Single View viewer will give the priority to the first login user and
then to the next user in queue. Each user will be given 60 seconds to control the PTZ camera. The
Timer at the upper right corner informs the user of the remaining time of control or the total waiting
time.

Click the button to access more functions of the PTZ camera such as changing PTZ speed,
starting Auto Scan and setting preset points. The available functions are subject to PTZ models.

Note:

1. To configure preset points for the PTZ camera, ensure the following two settings are enabled first:
A. Map the PTZ camera to a camera channel (Configure > Accessories > PTZ Device >
Camera Mapping PTZ Dome).

B. Enable Remote Control (Network > WebCam Server).

2. The supervisor is not restrained by 60-second time limit. When the supervisor logs on the
WebCam server, the Timer shows 999.

347
8.3.5 Visual PTZ Control Panel

Other than the PTZ control panel, you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image.

To access this feature, click the PTZ Control button (No.5, Figure 8-16) and select Visual PTZ. For
details on using the Visual PTZ Control Panel, see PTZ Automation in Chapter 1.

8.3.6 I/O Control

The control panel provides real-time graphic displays of camera and I/O status, and alarm events. You
can trigger outputs, as well as enabling and disabling I/O devices connected to the remote GV-System.
Click the I/O Control button (No. 6, Figure 8-16) to bring out the I/O control panel.

Figure 8-25

The alarm status is displayed in three levels. The first level indicates date, second indicates time, and
the third indicates alarm ID. Clicking the Reset button will clear the alarm list.

To initiate an output device, click the Enable button, highlight an output and then click the Output
button. The Timer functions the same as in the PTZ control panel. Each user will be given 60 seconds
of control time while the supervisor has 999 seconds. Clicking the Stop button will stop the operation
and turn over the control privilege to the next user waiting online.
If you want to enable or disable I/O devices connected to the remote GV-System, click the

348
 8 Remote Viewing

Enable/Disable I/O button. For this function to work, Enable Remote Control (Network > WebCam
Server) is required to be enabled on the remote GV-System

8.3.7 Visual Automation

You can remotely change the current status of the electronic device by simply clicking on its image.
Moreover, you can manage the settings of Visual Automation.

This feature is only available when the Visual Automation is configured ahead on the GV-System.

 To access this feature, click the I/O Control button (No. 6, Figure 8-16), and select Visual
Automation.

 Right-click the green I/O icon on the left corner to manage the alert areas, such as displaying,
embossing and changing colors to alert areas.

 Click the alert areas on the image to trigger the outputs remotely.

Figure 8-26

349
8.3.8 Picture-in-Picture View

With the Picture in Picture (PIP) view, you can crop the video to get a close-up view or zoom in on the
video. This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the
surveillance area.

To access this feature, right-click on the screen and then select PIP. For details on usage, see
Picture-in-Picture View in Chapter 1.

8.3.9 Picture-and-Picture View

With the Picture and Picture (PAP) view, you can create a split video effect with multiple close-up views
on the image. A total of 7 close-up views can be defined. This function is useful for megapixel
resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the surveillance area.

To access this feature, right-click on the screen and then select PAP. For details on usage, see
Picture-and-Picture View in Chapter 1.

350
 8 Remote Viewing

8.4 2-Window Viewer

On the 2 Windows, you can drag and drop the camera, PTZ and I/O icons to the desired window for
performing the following functions: video display, activating the Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image,
activating the Visual Automation function

To access the 2 Windows, click Live View on the left panel of the Single View page, and then select 2
Windows.

Figure 8-27

8.5 Multi-Window Viewer

The Multi Windows displays at most 16 channels at a time and supports up to 32 channels.

To access the Multi Windows, click Live View on the left panel of the Single View page, and select
Multi Windows.

Figure 8-28

351
8.6 Multi View Viewer
Multi View is a multi-channel viewer, allowing users to view up to 32 live cameras simultaneously.
Because multiple channels require a large amount of data to be transferred over Internet, this function
is limited to broadband users only.

8.6.1 Installation of Multi View

You can install the Multi View over the Internet or from the Software DVD. The following is an example
of installing and running the Multi View over the Internet.

1. On the left panel of the Single View page (Figure 8-3), select DMMultiView and select the desired
resolution. The first-time user will be prompted to specify a folder to install the Multi View program.
When the installation is complete, the Login page appears.

Figure 8-29

2. Type the login User Name and Password of the GV-System.

3. Click OK. The Multi View window appears.

352
 8 Remote Viewing

1 2 3

4 5 6

27 26 25 24 23 22 21
8 7

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 28

Figure 8-30

The controls in the Multi View:

No. Name Description
Displays live video. Right-clicking on live video allows you to instantly
1 Monitoring Window access some useful functions. Selecting Resolution displays a
resolution indicator at the bottom right corner of the video.
Displays the connected GV-Systems and their available cameras.
2 Host List
See Host List later in this chapter.
Displays all hosts on the same LAN.
3 Auto Search
See Host List later in this chapter.
Select the desired camera for display. If a panorama view is created
4 Show Camera Menu
at the GV-System, it is also included in this menu.
Displays the PTZ control panel.
5 PTZ Control
See PTZ Control, and Visual PTZ Control Panel later in this chapter.
Displays the I/O control panel.
6 I/O Control
See I/O Control earlier in this chapter.
Indicates the general information of the selected channel.
7 Channel Status
See Channel Status Information later in this chapter.

353
 Plays back recorded files of the remote GV-System by using the
8 ViewLog video player ViewLog.
See Remote ViewLog later in this chapter.
Accesses system settings of the Multi View.
9 Configure
See System Configuration later in this chapter.
Adds, deletes or modifies a host.
10 Edit Host
See Creation of a Host later in this chapter.
Displays the camera status of the connected GV-System.
11 Camera Status
See Camera Status later in this chapter.
Displays the general information of the connected GV-System.
12 Host Information
See Host Information later in this chapter.
13 Zoom in and out Zooms in or out the selected channel.
Adds or deletes the frames for video polling. Click the Add or
14 Add/Remove Frame Remove Frame button and then click the desired channel to add to
or remove from the video polling.
15 Next Goes to the next page of Screen Division buttons.
Accesses the Multicast function.
16 Multicast
See Multicast and Audio Broadcast later in this chapter.
Switches to a full screen view. The maximum video resolution set on
17 Full Screen the GV-System will be applied. See Video Settings in WebCam
Server Settings earlier in this chapter.
Rotates through the selected channels.
18 Video Polling
See Camera Polling later in this chapter.
19 Screen Division Sets screen divisions to 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 16 or 32.
20 Exit/Minimize Closes or minimizes the Multi View window.
21 Speaker Enables live audio from a remote GV-System.
22 Microphone Enables speaking to a remote GV-System.
23 Play Establishes the connection to a GV-System.
24 Stop Terminates the connection to a GV-System.
Saves live video.
25 Save
See Video Recording later in this chapter.
Adjusts video quality with these options: Auto Scale (using the
original resolution and quality of video sources), Geo H264 and Geo
MPEG4. Display both stream 1 and 2 from GV IP camera, GV-Video
26 Quality
Gateway and GV-Recording Server hosts.
For hardware-compressed and megapixel quality, see
Hardware-Compressed and Megapixel Stream later in this chapter.

354
 8 Remote Viewing

27 Snapshot Takes a snapshot of the selected channel.

Saves the selected cameras and creates a Multiple Host.
28 Save Camera to Multiple Host See Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host later in this
chapter.

8.6.2 Channel Status Information

When choosing a camera from the Host List or the monitoring window, the general information of the
selected camera will be displayed in the Channel Status Window as shown below.

Host name

Camera name

IP Address of the host

Bandwidth used for delivering this video

Displayed frame rate of the video

Status

Figure 8-31

355
8.6.3 Host List

The Host List displays a list of available hosts. The host icons indicate available hosts and the camera
icons indicate all cameras included in the selected host. To connect to a host:

1. Click a monitoring window, which will be highlighted in red frame.

2. Double-click on a camera icon, and then its corresponding video will be loaded to the selected
monitoring window.

First-time users will only see one host icon as no additional hosts are created yet. To create connection
to other hosts, see Creation of a Host later in this chapter.

Host Icon

Camera Icon

Figure 8-32

Detecting Hosts on the Same LAN

With UPnP technology, Multi View can detect all hosts on the same LAN, without the need of user
configuration.

1. On the Host List, click the Auto Search tab for detection. A list of hosts within the same LAN
appears.
2. Double-click one host for connection. A valid ID and password are required.

Note: For UPnP detection, it is required to open TCP port 5201 on the host and UDP port 5200 on
the Multi View site.

356
 8 Remote Viewing

8.6.4 Creation of a Host

The Multi View allows video streaming from multiple GV-Systems and GV-IP Devices. Follow the steps
below to create several host accounts for later connection use.

1. Click the Edit Host button (No. 10, Figure 8-30). This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-33

2. All created hosts are forced to be grouped. Click the New button and select Group to create a
group first. Then click the New button again and select Host to create a host.

3. In the Host Name field, type a name to identify the host.

4. Select a device type for the host.

5. Type the IP address or domain name of the host. Type a valid username and password to log into
the host. Modify the default ports if necessary to match the corresponding ports on the host.

6. Click the Save button. The host will appear in the Host List with the given ID name.

357
8.6.5 Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host

You can combine multiple hosts into a single host including the camera channels all from different IP
addresses. There are two methods to combine multiple hosts: the manual creation of Multiple Hosts;
the quick creation of Multiple Hosts.

Manual Creation of Multiple Hosts

1. Click the Edit Host button (No. 10, Figure 8-30) to display the Edit Host window. Click the New
button and select Group to create a group first. Then click the New button again and select Host
to create a host.

2. Select Multiple Host. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-34

3. In the Host Name field, enter a desired name to identify the Multiple Hosts.

4. To set up each camera channel of the Multiple Hosts, click the Edit tab one at a time.
Alternatively, you can click and drag the created camera channel from the Host List (Figure 8-33)
to each Edit tab. Note that all created camera channels must be added to each Edit tab in the
order of 1 to 32.

358
 8 Remote Viewing

5. Click the Edit tab. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-35

6. Select the device type of the host.

7. Enter the IP address, username and password to log into the host.

8. In the Camera No. drop-down list, select one desired camera channel from the host.

9. Keep the port settings as defaults; otherwise modify them if necessary.

10. Click OK.

Quick Creation of Multiple Hosts

1. Click on a desired monitoring window, which will be highlighted in the red frame.

2. Click and drag a camera from the Host List to the monitoring window. The selected camera then is
displayed.

3. Repeat the step 1 and 2 to configure other monitoring windows for different cameras.

4. Click the Save Camera to Multiple Host button (No. 28, Figure 8-30) to create the Multiple Hosts.

359
8.6.6 Video Recording

You can save live videos in a client computer. The files in AVI format are playable at the third party
viewer. Click the Save button (No.25, Figure 8-30) and then select all or several cameras to start
recording. For the recorded folder, see [Video and Audio] in System Configuration later in this chapter.

8.6.7 Camera Polling

To add cameras to the polling group:

1. Click the Add Frame button (No. 14, Figure 8-30), and then click the monitoring windows. The
selected windows will be framed in red color.
2. Click the Video Polling button (No. 18, Figure 8-30). The application will rotate the selected
cameras in the specified time. To configure the polling time, see Figure 8-38.

To remove one camera from the polling group, click the Remove Frame button (No. 14, Figure 8-30),
and then click its monitoring window.

8.6.8 Hardware-Compressed or Megapixel Stream

To receive the hardware-compressed and megapixel stream from the GV-System or to enable fisheye
functions through WebCam server, refer to the same topic in the section of Single View Viewer.

360
 8 Remote Viewing

8.6.9 PTZ Control

1. Select a PTZ capable camera from the monitoring window, or double-click it on the Host List
(Figure 8-36).
2. Click the PTZ Control button (No. 5, Figure 8-30).
3. Turn the switch to the ON position.
4. Use the directional, zoom-in, zoom-out, focus-in, focus-out buttons to control the PTZ camera.

The Timer has the same functions as the one in the Single View Viewer. The supervisor is given the
highest priority to control PTZ in Multi View and won’t be restrained by 60-second time limit. When the
supervisor logs in Multi View, the Timer will show 999.

The Option button lets you direct the PTZ camera to a preset position and configure the speed of the
PTZ camera up to five levels.

Switch
Timer

Option

Figure 8-36

8.6.10 Visual PTZ Control Panel

Other than the PTZ control panel, you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image.
To access this feature, click the PTZ Control button (No.5, Figure 8-30) and select Visual PTZ. For
details on using the Visual PTZ Control Panel, see PTZ Automation in Chapter 1.

361
8.6.11 Output Control

1. Click the I/O Control button (No. 6, Figure 8-30).

2. Turn the switch to ON position.
3. Select a module from the drop-down list. Each module provides 4 to 16 connected relay output
devices.
4. Click the Output (x) button to enable the output device.

Switch Timer

Figure 8-37

8.6.12 Remote ViewLog

The Remote ViewLog function allows you to have full access to the ViewLog features of the connected
GV-System.

Note: For the first-time users, it is required to install the Remote ViewLog on the PC. Install the
program from the Software DVD, or from the Download page (see Download Center later in this
chapter).

1. On the Multi View window, click the ViewLog button (No. 8, Figure 8-30). The Connect to Remote
ViewLog Service dialog box appears.

2. Type the IP Address, ID and Password of the remote GV-System. Keep the default port as 5552,
or modify it if necessary.

3. In the Host Type field, select DVR.

4. Click the Connect button.

When the connection is established, you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen.
Then you can access all ViewLog features for playback.

362
 8 Remote Viewing

8.6.13 System Configuration

Click the Configure button (No. 9, Figure 8-30) to display the following window. At the left panel, select
General Display, Video and Audio or Network to start your configuration.

Figure 8-38

[General Display]
 Resolution: Select the Multi View screen resolution. The options available here depend on the
monitor resolution of your PC.
 Initial Screen: Select screen divisions at startup.
 Polling Time: Specify the camera polling time from 1 to 60 seconds.
 Server Status Refresh Time: Specify the frequency to update the host information.
 Camera Status Refresh Time: Specify the frequency to update the camera information.
 Active Camera: Select the maximum number of screen divisions allowed on the Multi View.
 Fast Key: Click the View button to display the fast key table of the Multi View.

363
 [Video and Audio]
 Folder Path: Specify a path to save recorded files.
 Max Video Clip: Specify the maximum time length of each recorded file.
 Audio: Select the audio quality to be Normal, Real Time or Smooth. For the details of the three
quality options, see [Audio Configure] in Video and Audio Configuration in the section of Single
View Viewer earlier in this chapter.
 Enable DirectDraw: See the same features in Image Enhancement in the section of Single View
Viewer.
 Enable DirectDraw for resolution of 320 x 240 or higher: Select this option to apply the
DirectDraw on the live Images of 320 x 240 or higher resolution. The option conserves the
system’s CPU resources since the DirectDraw is not applied on the resolution lower than 320 x
240.
 Enable DirectDraw for all resolutions: This is the default setting. Select this option to apply
the DirectDraw on all live images in any resolution.
 Caption: Select what kind of caption to display on the monitoring window.

[Network] Displays the communication ports of the Multi View.

8.6.14 Camera Status

To show the camera status of the selected GV-System, click the Camera Status button to display the
following window. “Camera ON” indicates the camera is active. “No Privilege” means you’re not
authorized to view this camera. Clicking the View button will bring up a small window displaying the
selected camera’s video. Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the information in this window.

Figure 8-39

364
 8 Remote Viewing

8.6.15 Host Information

To show the host information of the selected GV-System, click the Host Information button (No.12,
Figure 8-30) to display the following window.

Figure 8-40

[Alarm List] Displays a list of alarm events occurred in the selected GV-System. Clicking the Reset
button will clear the listed events. New events will be generated until the alarms of the remote site are
invoked.

[Host Information] The upper section shows the general information of the connected GV-System.
The lower section shows the number of MPEG4, RPB, and audio channels currently serving over the
Internet.

[Log List] Displays a history of login and logout information.

365
8.6.16 Icon Image Change

The icons displayed on the Host List can be replaced with icons of your choice. For example, the figure
below has the original Host icon replaced with the icon drawn with a red line across it.

Figure 8-41

Under the DMMultiview folder there are 2 subfolders named, CommonIcon and CustomIcon (Figure
8-42). Depending on the icons you wish to change, just create a new image icon in CustomIcon and
rename it to the icon name you wish to replace from CommonIcon. To revert back to the original icons,
just delete the images in CustomIcon. For details on image size restriction and file naming, see
Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View in Appendix G.

Figure 8-42

366
 8 Remote Viewing

8.7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast

Multicast sends a single video and audio stream to multiple hosts using the same multicast IP address
and within the same LAN. Multicast can greatly increase the bandwidth efficiency when multiple hosts
access the same video and audio stream.

As for audio broadcast, it allows a host to speak to other hosts using the same broadcast IP address
and within the same LAN.

Note: To perform multicast within a LAN with different IP sequence numbers, e.g. 192.168.1.1 and
192.168.2.1, you need a router supporting Multicast Pass Through function.

8.7.1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings

On GV-System, you can configure two settings. One is to allow remote access to multicast delivered
from the GV-System; the other is to receive audio broadcast from other host.

Activating Multicast
1. Click the Network button, select WebCam Server and click the Multicast tab. The Server Setup
dialog box appears.

2. Select Multicast to enable the multicast settings.

3. By default the IP address is 224.1.1.2 and port number is 8300 to send the video and audio
stream. Modify default values if necessary.

4. Optionally specify a Password for hosts to access multicast.

5. Click the Camera and Audio buttons to select which camera and audio is accessible through
multicast.

6. Select another Network Card, if available, to run multicast on a different network. Since the
multicast can take a lot of bandwidth when enabled, separating it from the main network is
advised whenever possible.

367
 Note: If you select different network cards belonging to different networks for multicast, ensure the
receiving end of the multicast service is connected to the same network or IP sequence. For
example, if the IP address assigned for multicast is 192.168.2.x, the receiving end should also use
the network card of 192.168.2.x.

Network card selection at the receiving end

Receiving Audio Broadcast

1. If you like to receive audio broadcast from other hosts on the GV-System, select Receive
broadcast audio. By default the IP address is 224.1.1.3 and port number is 8400 to receive
broadcasting. Modify default values if necessary.

2. Click OK to start the WebCam server.

Now the GV-System can not only deliver the multicast stream but receive audio broadcast from other
hosts. Ensure a speaker is installed on the GV-System.

368
 8 Remote Viewing

8.7.2 Sending Audio Broadcast

You can start audio broadcasting on any host by installing the following program.

1. Ensure a microphone is properly installed.

2. Install and run Audio Broadcast from the Software DVD. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-43

3. Select Enable. You can start speaking to other hosts.

If you cannot perform audio broadcasting, select Tool from the menu bar, select Set Broadcast
Address, and ensure the IP address and port number are correctly configured. By default the IP
address is 224.1.1.3 and port number is 8400 to broadcast audio.

369
8.7.3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast

To remotely receive multicast and audio broadcast, there are three methods: use the multicast
program included on the Software DVD, through the web interface of WebCam server, and through the
Multi View of WebCam server.

Using Multicast Program on Software DVD

1. Install and run Multicast from the Software DVD. This dialog box appears.

Host List

Configure Button

Figure 8-44

2. The host(s), using the same multicast IP address within the same LAN, is displayed automatically
on the host list. If you cannot see any host displayed, click the Configure button, select General
Setup, and ensure the relevant IP address and port number are correctly configured.

3. Drag the desired cameras to the screen for display. If the host has already set a password, you will
be promoted to enter it at this step.

4. To receive audio broadcast, first ensure a speaker is properly installed on this computer. Click the
Configure button, select General Setup, select Receive Broadcast Audio, and ensure the
broadcast IP address and port number are correctly configured, and click OK.

5. To save the current settings of screen division and camera display for future use, click the
Configure button, select Video List Setup, and select Export. You can also select Import to
apply the pre-defined settings.

370
 8 Remote Viewing

Through the Web Interface of WebCam

1. Type the IP address or the domain name of GV-System on the IE browser. Enter ID and
password to log into the GV-System. When the connection is established, the Single View page
appears.

2. On the left panel, select Live View and select Multicast. The Multicast Viewer appears.

3. To receive multicast and audio broadcast, follow Steps 2-4 in the section of Using Multicast
Program on Software DVD above.

Through the Multi View of WebCam

1. Click the Multicast button (No. 16, Figure 8-30) on the Multi View screen. The Multicast Viewer
appears.

2. To receive multicast and audio broadcast, follow Steps 2-4 in the section of Using Multicast
Program on Software DVD above.

371
8.8 JPEG Image Viewer
JPEG Image Viewer is a cross-platform viewer, practicable on Mac OS, Netscape, and Microsoft IE
browsers. Continuously receiving JPEG images from GV-System and limited to the single camera view,
the viewer is an ideal tool for the users with limited Internet bandwidth.

Note: To enable the JPEG Image Viewer, Java needs to be installed on the local PC.

To start the JPEG Image Viewer, follow these steps:

1. To enable the function on the WebCam server, click the Network button, select WebCam Server,
disable Enhance Network Security on the General tab, and enable Create JPEG/GIF File(s) on
the JPG tab.

2. Open an Internet Explorer browser on the local PC.

3. Enter the IP address or domain name of the GV-System. The Single View page appears.

4. On the left panel, click Live View and select JPEG Image Viewer. A valid ID and a password are
required for login. The JPEG Image Viewer window appears.

Figure 8-45

372
 8 Remote Viewing

8.9 Remote Playback

With the Remote Playback (RPB) function on the WebCam server, you can play back the recorded files
of the connected GV-System.

To allow remote access to GV-System, ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server
function (Network > WebCam Server) is activated on GV-System.

1. In the left panel of the Single View page (Figure 8-3), click Remote Play Back and select Remote
Play Back. This window appears.

Figure 8-46

2. Select the desired camera, date and time-segment file.

3. Click the Play button to start.

4. For further playback features, click on the image to have the options of Play Mode, Render and
Tools.

373
8.10 Remote ViewLog
Through WebCam Server, you can remotely play back the recorded files by using the video player
ViewLog.

To allow remote access to GV-System, ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server
function (Network > WebCam Server) is activated on GV-System.

1. On the left panel of the Single View page (Figure 8-3), click Remote Play Back and select
ViewLog. This dialog box appears.

Figure 8-47

2. Type the IP Address, ID and Password of the GV-System. Select DVR to be the host type. Keep
the default port as 5552, or modify it if necessary.

3. Click the Connect button.

When the connection is established, you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen.
Then you can access all ViewLog features for playback.

374
 8 Remote Viewing

8.11 Event List Query

With the Event List Query function on the WebCam server, you can remotely locate a desired event by
defining search criteria. The search results can be displayed in a text form or a statistic chart. You can
also play back any suspicious events instantly.

To allow remote access to GV-System, ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server
function (Network > WebCam Server) is activated on GV-System.

1. On the left panel of the Single View page (Figure 8-3), click Remote Play Back and select Event
List Query. The Query window appears.

2. On the left panel, select one of the following query categories, and then click Submit Query at the
button of the panel to change the category:

 Monitor: monitored events

 System: system activities

 Login: user login/logout status

 Counter: counter events

 POS: POS transaction events

Note that the above categories are based on those of System Log in the Main System, so you can
also locate the same event recorded in System Log.

3. Define the search criteria such as Event Type, Device, Information, Date and etc. The selection of
search criteria may vary depended on query categories.

4. If you search the events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period, select DST Rollback
and define a certain period of time in the Date column.

5. Click Submit Query. The search results will be displayed in the text form.

6. To play back the attached video, click the Video icon.

Righting-click on the video image gives you more playback features, such as changing playback
mode and turning on audio if available.

7. To graph the search results, click the Chart button.

375
 8. To export the search results, select one of formats Txt, Html or Excel and then click the Export
button.

Query categories Export data

Chart display Video icon Playback Window

Figure 8-48

8.12 Download Center

The Download Center provides you with an easy option to upgrade the codec, and decide what kind of
viewing program should be downloaded to your local computer based on screen resolution. Click
Download in the left panel of the Single View page (Figure 8-3) to access this feature.

Figure 8-49

376
 8 Remote Viewing

8.13 Mobile Phone Applications

With a smartphone, you can receive live view from GV-System using GV-Eye mobile app. The GV-Eye
can be downloaded from App Store or Android Market. If you have GV-Eye V2.7 or later installed, you
can scan the QG code in 8.2.10 P2P Setting to connect with GV-System. For details on using the app,
refer to GV-Eye Installation Guide.

8.14 Web Browsers on Smartphones

Using the browser on your smartphone, you can watch live view, control PTZ live views, and play back
recordings from a GV-System. By connecting to the WebCam server, no extra application is required.

Note:
1. Make sure the 3GPP function is enabled at the WebCam server.
2. Live view control is only available for supported PTZ cameras. For the support list, see Appendix
B.
3. The playback function is only supported by Android devices.

In the following steps, we use the Android smartphone as an example to log in the GV-System:
1. Open the browser on your Android device and type the IP address of the GV-System to log in.

Figure 8-50

377
 2. Click Login. The cameras on the GV-System appear.

Figure 8-51

3. To watch live view, tap Live View on the top, tap the H.264 option for Streaming Type and then

tap a video icon . The device connects to the live view shortly.
4. To access the PTZ functions, tap Live View on the top and then tap the JPEG option for
Streaming Type. This page appears. You can control the live view with the direction arrows,
zoom in/out and home position buttons.

Figure 8-52

378
 8 Remote Viewing

5. To play back, tap Remote Play Back. This page appears. Search recordings by defining the
camera, date and start time. If the video is recorded on a Daylight Saving day, select Yes for DST
Rollback.

Figure 8-53

6. The matched results are shown. Click the video icon for instant playback.

379
Chapter 9

E-Map Application.......................................381
9.1 The E-Map Editor .............................................................................. 381
9.1.1 The E-Map Editor Window ......................................................................... 382

9.2 Creating an E-Map File ................................................................... 383

9.3 Starting E-Map................................................................................... 387
9.3.1 Setting the Pop-up Map.............................................................................. 388

9.4 Remotely Accessing E-Map........................................................... 389

9.4.1 The Remote E-Map Window...................................................................... 389
9.4.2 Accessing E-Maps of Multiple Hosts .................................................... 391
9.4.3 Configuring the Remote E-Map ............................................................... 392
9.4.4 Viewing Event List and Playing Back Video....................................... 393

9.5 E-Map Server...................................................................................... 394

9.5.1 Installing E-Map Server.............................................................................. 394
9.5.2 The E-Map Server Window........................................................................ 394
9.5.3 Setting E-Map Server.................................................................................. 395
9.5.4 Remote Monitoring via E-Map Server ................................................... 395
9.5.5 Accessing Authentication Server Account Information ................ 395

380
 9
CHAPTER

E-Map Application
E-Map displays the monitoring area on an electronic map, by which the operator can easily locate the
cameras, sensors and alarms triggered by motion or I/O devices. Topics discussed in this chapter
include: creating an E-Map file with E-Map Editor, working with E-Map in the Main System, working
with E-Map on the WebCam server and E-Map Server.

9.1 The E-Map Editor

The E-Map Editor program allows you to import a floor plan in BMP, GIF and JPG formats, and use the
icons of cameras and I/O devices to edit a map per your requirement.

The E-Map Editor program comes with the installation of Main System. Click the Windows Start menu,
select Programs, select GV folder and click EMap Editor. The E-Map Editor window will appear.

381
9.1.1 The E-Map Editor Window

1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10

11
12

13

Figure 9-1
The controls on the E-Map Editor window:
No. Name Description
1 Up Returns to the previous E-Map file.
2 Add Map Adds an E-Map file.
3 Add Host Adds a host folder in the Host View.
4 Load Map Imports a floor plan.
5 Rename Renames an E-Map file and/or folder.
6 Delete Deletes an E-Map file and/or folder.
7 Zoom In / Out Enlarges / Diminishes the Map View.
9 Fit to Screen Adjusts the Map View to fit the current size of the window.
10 Actual Size Displays actual size of the imported graphic file.
11 Floor Plan The window displays the imported graphic file.
12 Map View Tree view of E-Map files and/or folders.
13 Host View Tree view of host folders.

382
 9 E-Map Application

9.2 Creating an E-Map File

1. To create an E-map, click the Add Map button on the toolbar. A New Map file is created.

2. Click the New Map file in Map View, and select Load Map to import a graphic file. The file opens
in the Floor Plan window.

Figure 9-2
3. Double-click the local server folder in Host View. The program automatically detects all of the
cameras and I/O devices installed on the server and display their icons.

Figure 9-3
4. Drag and drop these icons from Host View onto the map in the Floor Plan window.

5. Click File in the window menu and select Save to DVR to save the file to GV-System’s folder, or
select Save to File to save the file to a desired path.

383
 Advanced Settings
Optionally, you can have the following settings on your created E-Map.

A. Camera Icons

1. To set the orientation of camera icons, right-click any camera icon and select a desired direction.

Figure 9-4

2. Optionally set up a view zone to highlight the area monitored by the camera:

A. Right-click any camera icon and select Edit View Zone. A fan-shaped view zone appears.

Figure 9-5

B. Move the mouse to adjust the length and direction of the view zone.

C. Scroll the mouse to adjust the width of the view zone.

D. Right-click the map and select Finish to finalize the zone.

384
 9 E-Map Application

B. I/O and Camera Icons

Optionally change the icons of any cameras and/or I/O devices by right-clicking on it and select
Change Icon.

Figure 9-6

 No Event: Specifies the icon of the device when it hasn’t been triggered. Optionally click Add
Icon to import your own icon.

 Event: Specifies the icon of the device when it’s been triggered. Optionally click Add Icon to
import your own icon.

Note: The size of imported icon must be 32 x 32 pixels.

C. Polygonal Map
Optionally create a Polygonal Map within the E-Map, which flashes when any device within its region is
triggered.

1. In E-Map, right-click the desired map icon and select Edit Polygonal Map.

2. Click on the map to draw a polygonal area with yellow dotted lines.

Figure 9-7

3. Once finished, right-click on the map and select Finish.

385
 The enclosed area is colored in blue. When any device within the area is triggered, it will flash red.

Figure 9-8

.9.2.1 Creating an E-Map File for a Remote Host

Aside from for the local host (GV-System), E-Maps can also be created for a remote host. Through the
Remote E-Map function, these E-Maps can be accessed and monitored through a Web browser. For
how to remotely access E-Maps, see Accessing E-Maps of Multiple Hosts later in this chapter.

Note: The hosts supported by E-Map include GV-DVR/NVR, GV-IP Devices, GV-Video Server and
GV-Compact DVR.

1. Click the Add Host button on the toolbar, and select the type of host. A new host is added
in Host View.
2. Right-click the created host, and select Host Settings. This dialog box appears. The dialog box
varies based on the host.

Figure 9-9
3. Type the necessary information, such as IP address and the number of cameras, and click OK.
4. Follow the steps instructed in Creating an E-Map File to create an e-map file for the remote host.

386
 9 E-Map Application

9.3 Starting E-Map

After an E-Map is created, you can start the E-Map on the GV-System and monitor through the E-Map.
When any camera and/or I/O device on it is triggered, the corresponding icon will blink as an alert.

On the main screen, click the ViewLog button (No.13, Figure 1-2) and select E-Map to display the
following E-Map Viewer window. Double-click any E-Map file to open it.

3 4 5 6

2 1

Figure 9-10

The controls in the E-Map Viewer window:

No. Name Description

1 Popup Settings Select the desired cameras and I/O devices for a pop-up map.
2 Toggle Popup Toggles between popup and non-popup functions.
3 Tree View The tree view of E-Map files and folders.
4 Blinking Icon Represents a triggered camera or an I/O device.
5 Output Icon Manually triggers an output device.
6 Camera/Dome Icon Click to view the live video associated with that camera.

Note: If you have created the E-Map files for multiple hosts, you can also see these map files.
However, these map files won’t function on the GV-System but only work on Remote WebCam
through a Web browser. See Accessing E-Maps of Multiple Hosts later in this chapter.

387
9.3.1 Setting the Pop-up Map

When multiple E-Maps are being monitored simultaneously, the pop-up function can be enabled for
monitoring convenience. Once any camera or I/O device is triggered, its corresponding E-Map will pop
up, replacing the current E-Map.

1. Click the Popup Settings button (No.1, Figure 9-10).

2. Select the desired cameras and input devices for the application, and specify Dwell Time for the
interval between event triggers. Any event trigger will be ignored by the system during the interval
to avoid frequent map pop-up.

3. Click the Toggle Popup button (No.2, Figure 9-10) to enable the function.

4. Minimize the E-Map Viewer window. Once any camera or input device is triggered, the map will
pop up on your screen immediately.

388
 9 E-Map Application

9.4 Remotely Accessing E-Map

You can remotely access and view E-Maps with a Web browser.

1. To remotely access E-Maps through a Web browser, click the Network button (No. 11, Figure 1-2)
and select WebCam Server. The Server Setup dialog box appears.

2. Click OK to start the WebCam server.

3. Open the Web browser and type the address of the GV-System. Once the connection is
established, the Single View page appears.

4. On the left panel, click Remote E-Map. The Login dialog box appears.

5. Type the login info of the GV-VMS and click . The Remote E-Map window is displayed.

9.4.1 The Remote E-Map Window

Figure 9-11

389
 The controls on the Remote E-Map window:
No. Name Description
1 Login Logs up to 500 hosts.
Views the information of incoming events upon motion detected and
2 Host Information
I/O devices triggered.
3 Previous Goes to the last selected E-Map file.
4 Home Goes back to the top of the tree view.
5 Next Goes to the next E-Map file.
Accesses the Remote ViewLog function. For details, see Remote
6 ViewLog
ViewLog Service in Chapter 4.
7 Configure Configures the advanced settings.
8 Tree List Displays all created E-Map files and folders.
9 IP Address Displays the IP Address of the connected host.
When events occur, the corresponding icons will blink red.
Camera / Input / Output Camera icon: Move the cursor over the icon to view a live image.
10
Icon Click the icon to open a control panel for the camera.
Output Icon: Click the icon to manually trigger the output device. .

The controls in the Camera Icon

Figure 9-12

390
 9 E-Map Application

9.4.2 Accessing E-Maps of Multiple Hosts

If you have created E-Maps for multiple hosts, you can monitor these E-Maps remotely through a Web
browser. Up to 500 hosts can be accessed at a time.

1. E-Map window. Now you can select the corresponding E-Map for the new host for monitoring.

2. Select a host on the right panel and click Login. You are prompted for the required login info.

Figure 9-13

3. Click OK to return to the Remote E-Map window. Now you can select the corresponding E-Map
for the new host for monitoring.

391
9.4.3 Configuring the Remote E-Map

Click the Configure button (No. 7, Figure 9-10) to display the following dialog box:

Figure 9-14

[Download EMap files] Download E-Map files from the local server to the client PC. This option can
reduce network load when you want to view E-Maps of multiple hosts.
 Use local EMap files: Once downloading E-Map files to the client PC, you can select and use
these E-Map files for connection.

[Motion] / [I/O Input]

 Alert Sound: Assign a .wav file to alert the operator when cameras or I/O devices are triggered.
 Camera Blink, I/O Blink: When cameras or I/O devices are triggered, their icons on the E-map
flash. Deselect this option to stop the icons from blinking.

 E-Map Auto Popup: When cameras or I/O devices are triggered, the related map will pop up on
the screen instantly when the Remote-E-Map window is minimized.

392
 9 E-Map Application

 Show Event: Display motion or I/O triggered events on the Host Information window.
 I/O Trigger Camera: When input devices are triggered, the related camera views will pop up on
the screen instantly. For this function to work, input devices must be mapped to cameras on the
Main System. See Pop-up Live Video in Chapter 1.
 Hide Tree List: Check to hide the tree list.

 Enable DirectDraw: By default, DirectDraw is enabled to speed up graphics rendering. Some

VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames. In this case, disable
the option.

 Use small icon: Enable for devices to be displayed by smaller icons.

 Retry in the background: When Remote E-map is disconnected from the GV-System, a warning
message will pop up every 30 seconds. Select to hide the message and retry the connection in the
background.

9.4.4 Viewing Event List and Playing Back Video

You can see a list of triggered events on the Host Information window and play back the desired
video(s). Click the Host Information button (No. 2, Figure 9-11) to open it.

The Host Information window allows you to play back events happened in the host sites. Double-click
any Motion event in the left panel to display the remote playback window. With this window, you can
play back an event, speak to the host site and take a snapshot, as well as download the event to the
client PC.

Figure 9-15

393
9.5 E-Map Server
The E-Map Server is an independent application, designed to create E-Maps for different DVRs and
run without the GV-System.

9.5.1 Installing E-Map Server

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer. It will run automatically, and a window appears.
2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.
3. Click GV-E-Map Server, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

You can also install GV-E-Map Server from GeoVision Website.

9.5.2 The E-Map Server Window

Go to Windows Start, select Programs, select eMapServer, and click E-Map Server. This window
appears.

Figure 9-16

The controls on the E-Map Server window:

No. Name Description

1 Start Service Starts the E-Map Server.
2 Stop Service Stops the E-Map Server.
3 New Creates a new E-Map file.
4 Rename Renames the E-Map file.
5 Delete Deletes the E-Map file.
6 Refresh Refreshes the E-Map Server window.
7 Accounts Creates user accounts of the E-Map Server.

394
 9 E-Map Application

9.5.3 Setting E-Map Server

Before starting the E-Map server, you have to create e-map files and user accounts.

1. Click the New button (No.3, Figure 9-16) to create e-map(s). For details on creating an e-map file,
see Creating an E-Map File earlier in this chapter.
2. Click the Accounts (No. 7, Figure 9-16) button to create a user account for the server.

9.5.4 Remote Monitoring via E-Map Server

Via E-Map Server, you can monitor different surveillance sites on electronic maps from any computer
accessible to Internet.

1. Open the Web browser and type the address of the E-Map server.

2. Type the login info of the E-Map Server. You are prompted to select an E-Map (.emp) file.

3. Click OK. The Remote E-Map window appears.

4. Click Login to log into the desired host(s). For details, see Accessing E-Maps of Multiple
Hosts earlier in this chapter.

Note: To log into GV-System, make sure WebCam Server is enabled.

9.5.5 Accessing Authentication Server Account Information

With the connection to Authentication Server, the E-Map Server can ac3cess the Authentication
account settings. For details see Authentication Server in Chapter 11.

395
 Chapter 10

Short Message Service ..............................397

10.1 Installing SMS Server ................................................................... 397
10.2 The SMS Server Window ............................................................. 398
10.3 SMS Server Setup .......................................................................... 399
10.3.1 Device Settings .......................................................................................... 399
10.3.2 Server Settings .......................................................................................... 400
10.3.3 Account Settings ....................................................................................... 403

10.4 SMS Log ............................................................................................ 405

10.4.1 Setting SMS Log......................................................................................... 405
10.4.2 Viewing SMS Log ....................................................................................... 406

10.5 Password Security......................................................................... 408

10.6 SMS Notification............................................................................. 408
10.6.1 Connecting GV-System to SMS Server............................................... 408
10.6.2 Setting Mobile Numbers.......................................................................... 410
10.6.3 Setting Alert Notification ....................................................................... 411

396
 10
CHAPTER

Short Message Service

Via a GSM/GPRS modem, GV-System lets you send SMS (Short Message Service) messages when
an alert condition happens. The modem can be installed at either a separate server, or the same
computer/server equipped with GV-System. This chapter introduces how to manage a GSM/GPRS
modem with the GV-developed SMS Server program, and how to configure the Main System to send
out SMS alerts.

For supported GPRS models, see Appendix F.

10.1 Installing SMS Server

To install the SMS Server application, follow these steps:

1. Insert the Software DVD to the PC connected to a GSM/GPRS modem. It will run automatically,
and a window appears.

2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.

3. Click GV-SMS Server, and follow the on-screen instructions.

397
10.2 The SMS Server Window
Run the SMS Server program from the Start menu. The following window appears.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Figure 10-1 The SMS Server Window

The controls in the SMS Server window:

No. Name Description
1 Start/Stop Service Starts or stops the SMS Server.
2 Server Setting Sets up the SMS Server.
3 Account Setting Creates and edits accounts.
4 SMS Log Setting Sets up and accesses the SMS Log.
5 Device Setting Sets up the GSM/GPRS modem.
6 Exit Logs out administrator, changes password or exits the SMS server.

398
 10 Short Message Service

10.3 SMS Server Setup

Before starting the SMS service, you must configure these three settings: (1) Device Settings, (2)
Server Settings, and (3) Account Settings.

10.3.1 Device Settings

1. Click the Device Setting button (No. 5, Figure 10-1), and then select GSM Module. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 10-2 GSM Module Setting

2. Select the COM port connecting to a GSM/GPRS modem.

3. Click the Detect button to detect the modem.
 If the connection between the modem and the computer is established, the message will
show in the Device Information field: Name: (Manufacturer), Module: xxx, SIM Ready.
 If the connection fails, the display will be shown as: No usable device in COM xxx.
4. If you are using a tri-band modem, select 1900 or 1800 MHz from the drop-down list of Select
Band.
5. Click OK to apply above settings.

399
10.3.2 Server Settings

Click the Server Setting button (No. 2, Figure 10-1) to display the following Server Setting dialog box.
There are three major tabs in the dialog box: (1) General, (2) Message Filter, and (3) Notify

[General]

Figure 10-3 Server Setting-General

[Network] Define the port of the SMS Server, or leave it as default. To use UPnP for automatic port
configuration to your router, click the Arrow button. For details, see UPnP Settings in Chapter 8.

[Security] Enable to apply enhanced Internet security. Please note when the feature is enabled, the
subscribers using earlier version than 8.0 cannot access the SMS Server anymore.

[Startup]
 Auto Start Service when Sever Startup: Automatically starts SMS services when the program
starts.
 Minimize to System Tray when auto start service: Minimizes the SMS Server window to
notification area when it starts.
 Auto save the PIN number after start service: Automatically saves the PIN number when SMS
services start.

400
 10 Short Message Service

[Message Filter]

Figure 10-4 Server Setting-Message Filter

Check the desired alert conditions to send SMS messages.

The user-defined condition refers to the SMS messages sent manually in Center V2 and VSM. See
Sending SMS in Chapter 1 and Chapter 3 in the CMS User’s Manual.

401
 [Notify]

Figure 10-5 Server Setting-Notify

[Check Internet Connectivity] Assign any available IP address and click the Test button to know if
your SMS Server can access Internet.

[Send SMS notification when no connectivity] Sends SMS notification to the three designated
mobile numbers when the SMS Server cannot access Internet. You can specify the minimum time
interval between each notification in minutes.
 Mobile Icon: Check the icon and define the number for the SMS notification. Up to three
recipients can receive the SMS simultaneously.

402
 10 Short Message Service

10.3.3 Account Settings

Click the Account Setting button (No.3, Figure 10-1) to display the following window.

1 2 3 4 5

Figure 10-6 Account Setting

The controls in the Account Setting window:

No. Name Description
1 Add A Group Creates a group.
2 Add A Client Creates a client.
3 Delete A Group/Client Deletes a created group or client.
4 View/Edit A Client Highlight one client and click the button to view or edit its information.
5 Find A Client Searches a client.
6 Address Book Lists the created groups and clients.
7 Account Information Displays the highlighted client’s account information.
Displays the number of created groups and clients. The SMS Server
8 Statistics
can serve up to 5000 clients at one time.

403
 Creating a client:
1. Click the Add A Client button (No. 2, Figure 10-6). This dialog box appears.

Figure 10-7 Client Information

2. Type a login ID and a password. They will be the ID and password for the client to log in the SMS
Server (Figure 10-13).

3. In the Information section, type the client’s related information.

You can specify three mobile numbers of the client’s network administrators for SMS notification.
4. In the Notify Setting section, you can send a SMS message to the client in the case of:
 Internet disconnection between the client and the SMS Server, or
 Improper program shutdown in the client.
The recipients can be:
 The client’s network administrators: designate three mobile numbers in above Information
section.
 The client’s operators: See Setting Mobile Numbers later in this chapter. For the users of
Dispatch Server and Vital Sign Monitor, refer to the CMS User’s Manual. Clicking the
Question mark can view the specified mobile numbers at the client site.
5. Click Save for above settings.

Disabling a client:
You can disable subscription services to an individual client when subscription expires.
In the Account Settings window (Figure 10-6), right-click the desired client and then select Disable.
To restore the service, right-click the desired client and then select Enable.

404
 10 Short Message Service

10.4 SMS Log

10.4.1 Setting SMS Log

Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window (No. 4, Figure 10-1), and select
SMSLog Setting to display this dialog box.

Figure 10-8

[SMS Log]
 Keep Days: Select this option and enter the number of days to keep log files. Otherwise clear the
option to keep log files until the Recycle starts or the storage space is full.
 Recycle: Delete the files of the oldest day when storage space is lower than 500MB.
 Log Path: Click the [...] button to assign a storage path.

405
10.4.2 Viewing SMS Log

Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window (No. 4, Figure 10-1), and select View
SMSLog to display the SMS Log Browser.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Figure 10-9

The buttons on the Event Log Browser:

No. Name Description
1 Open Opens an event log.
2 Reload Refreshes the event log manually
3 Filter Defines the search criteria.
4 Backup Exports the current event list and video files.
5 Print Prints the current event list.
6 SMS Event Log Displays the log of SMS server events.
7 System Event Log Displays the log of SMS server activities.
8 Exit Exits the browser.
9 About Displays the application information of SMS Log Browser.

406
 10 Short Message Service

SMS Event Log

Clicking the SMS Event Log button (No. 6, Figure 10-9) on the toolbar, you can monitor senders (ID),

mobile numbers, text messages, sent and failed SMS. This can be beneficial as you may charge

your clients by the amount of SMS messages they sent.

Figure 10-10

System Event Log

Clicking the System Event Log button (No. 7, Figure 10-9) on the toolbar, you can monitor the server

activities, client login and logout, and connection problems.

Figure 10-11

407
10.5 Password Security
To prevent unauthorized users from changing your settings, set up an administrator password. To
apply the password security, follow these steps:

1. Click the Exit button (No. 6, Figure 10-1), and then select Change Password to set a password.
2. Click the Exit button, and select Logout Administrator to lock the SMS Server window.
3. When you want to log in, click the Exit button and select Login as Administrator. A valid
password is required.

10.6 SMS Notification

After setting up the SMS Server, you will need to connect the GV-System to the SMS Server, assign
mobile phones to receive SMS alert messages, and set up the types of events to send alert
notification.

10.6.1 Connecting GV-System to SMS Server

To connect the GV-System to the SMS Server, follow these steps:

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure,
and select Send Alerts Approach Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 10-12

2. Select Send Event Alerts, click the Arrow button and select the events to send alert notification.

3. Select Alternative Alert Approach to enable sending alerts by SMS messages.

408
 10 Short Message Service

4. Click the Account Setting button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 10-13

 Server IP: Type the IP address of the SMS Server.

 Server Port: Type the server port of the SMS Server, or keep it as default.
 Login ID & Password: Type a valid ID and password registered in the SMS Server (Figure
10-7).
 Local: If the GSM/GPRS modem is installed at the same server with the GV-System, select
this item.
 Remote: If the GSM/GPRS modem is installed at a separate server, select this item.

5. Click the SMS Option tab and specify the Interval between two sent-out messages. The Interval
time can be set up to 1440 minutes. Any alert condition will be ignored by the system during the
interval.

6. Click OK to apply above settings.

7. Click the Test Account button (Figure 10-12). If the connection of both devices is established, the
message will appear: Login SMS Server OK! If the connection fails, the message will appear:
Connect to SMS Server Fail.

409
10.6.2 Setting Mobile Numbers

The Main System allows you to configure three mobile phone numbers for the SMS service. When an
alert condition happens, the SMS messages will be sent out to the three assigned mobile phones
simultaneously.

1. Open the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box (Figure 10-12).
2. Click the Account Setting button. The SMS Setup dialog box appears. (Figure 10-13).
3. Click the Mobile Setup tab in the upper of the window. This dialog box appears.

Figure 10-14

4. Click one mobile phone icon, and then check the Add to SMS List item for the mobile phone
setup.
5. Type the Country Code and Mobile Number.
6. Click other mobile phone icons, and follow Steps 4 and 5 to set up the rest of two mobile phone
numbers separately.
7. Click OK to apply above settings.

8. Start monitoring. When the specified events or motion is detected, SMS alerts will be sent out
automatically.

410
 10 Short Message Service

10.6.3 Setting Alert Notification

To specify the types of events to receive alert notification:

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button (No. 14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure,
and select Send Alerts Approach Setup. The Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box (Figure
10-12) appears.

2. Select Send Event Alerts, click the Arrow button and select the events to send alert notification.

3. Click OK.

To send SMS alerts when motion is detected:

1. Click the Configure button (No.14, Figure 1-2), select System Configure and select Camera
Configure. The Camera Configure dialog box appears.

2. In the Motion Detection section, select Invoke to Send Alerts.

Figure 10-15

3. Click OK.

For details on the Invoke to Send Alerts options, see Invoke to Send Alerts in Chapter 1.

411
 Chapter 11

Useful Utilities ............................................415

11.1 Dynamic DNS................................................................................... 415
11.1.1 Installing Dynamic DNS ................................................................ 416
11.1.2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS.......................................... 416
11.1.3 Starting Dynamic DNS .................................................................. 417
11.1.4 Local DDNS Server ....................................................................... 418

11.2 Watermark Viewer......................................................................... 419

11.2.1 Activating Watermark Protection................................................. 419
11.2.2 Running the Watermark Proof ...................................................... 419
11.2.3 The Watermark Proof Window...................................................... 420

11.3 Multi-view Display.......................................................................... 421

11.4 Windows Lockup ............................................................................ 423
11.4.1 The GV-Desktop Screen................................................................ 423
11.4.2 GV-Desktop Features .................................................................... 423
11.4.3 Token File for Save Mode.............................................................. 427

11.5 Authentication Server .................................................................. 428

11.5.1 Installing the Server ..................................................................... 428
11.5.2 The Server Window....................................................................... 429
11.5.3 Creating a Client DVR ................................................................... 430
11.5.4 Creating a User Account .............................................................. 431
11.5.5 Importing Groups and Users from Active Directory .................... 434
11.5.6 Starting the Server ....................................................................... 438
11.5.7 Connecting GV-System to the Server........................................... 440
11.5.8 Remote Access from Control Center, Remote E-Map and MultiView..
...................................................................................................... 443

11.6 Fast Backup and Restore ............................................................ 446

11.6.1 Installing the FBR Program .......................................................... 446
11.6.2 Customizing Logo and Button ...................................................... 447
11.6.3 Customizing the Features............................................................. 448
11.6.4 Backing up and Restoring Settings .............................................. 449

11.7 Hot-Swap Recording ..................................................................... 451

11.7.1 The Media Man Tool Window ........................................................ 451
11.7.2 Viewing Disk Drive Status ............................................................ 452

412
 11.7.3 Adding a Disk Drive....................................................................... 453
11.7.4 Removing a Disk Drive .................................................................. 454
11.7.5 Logging In Automatically at Startup ............................................ 455
11.7.6 Setting LED Panel ......................................................................... 456

11.8 Backup Server................................................................................. 458

11.8.1 Adding a Disk Volume ................................................................... 458
11.8.2 Enabling Backup Server ............................................................... 460
11.8.3 Advanced Settings........................................................................ 461
11.8.4 Manually Adding Files for Backup ................................................ 463
11.8.5 Viewing Server Status .................................................................. 463
11.8.6 Retrieving Recorded Files ............................................................ 465
11.8.7 Viewing Backup Status ................................................................ 466

11.9 Backup Viewer................................................................................ 467

11.9.1 Usage Requirements .................................................................... 467
11.9.2 Starting Backup Viewer ............................................................... 468
11.9.3 Performing Queries ....................................................................... 468
11.9.4 Viewing the Event Files ................................................................ 469
11.9.5 Using Remote ViewLog ................................................................ 469

11.10 Bandwidth Control Application ............................................... 470

11.10.1 Installing the Bandwidth Control ............................................... 471
11.10.2 Allowing Remote Control at DVR ................................................ 472
11.10.3 Connecting to a WebCam Server................................................ 472
11.10.4 Controlling a WebCam Server..................................................... 473
11.10.5 Bandwidth Setup ........................................................................ 474
11.10.6 Block List Setup.......................................................................... 475
11.10.7 General Setup ............................................................................. 476

11.11 Report Generator......................................................................... 477

11.11.1 Starting Report Generator.......................................................... 477
11.11.2 Setting Report Generator ........................................................... 478
11.11.3 Setting Report Criteria ............................................................... 480
11.11.4 E-Mail Attachment Settings........................................................ 483
11.11.5 Playing Back Video Recordings.................................................. 484
11.11.6 Viewing Event Log ...................................................................... 485

11.12 Spot Monitor Controller ............................................................. 486

11.12.1 Spot Monitor Controller .............................................................. 486
11.12.2 Spot Monitor Panel ..................................................................... 489

11.13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller.................................................. 490

413
 11.13.1 Setting the Controller ................................................................. 490
11.13.2 Setting Pop-up Views.................................................................. 493
11.13.3 Displaying TV Quad Panel........................................................... 494

11.14 Digital Matrix ................................................................................ 495

11.14.1 Activating Multiple Monitors ...................................................... 496
11.14.2 Setting Live View........................................................................ 497
11.14.3 Setting Scanned Pages............................................................... 498
11.14.4 Setting Pop-up Alert.................................................................... 499
11.14.5 Setting Live View with Pop-up Alert........................................... 501
11.14.6 Controlling Screen Display ......................................................... 502

11.15 GIS Recording............................................................................... 503

11.15.1 Setting the GPS Receiver ........................................................... 503
11.15.2 Recording GPS Locations of GV-System .................................... 504
11.15.3 Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device ................................ 505
11.15.4 Viewing GPS Locations during Playback ................................... 506
11.15.5 Sending GPS Data to the GV-GIS ................................................ 508

11.16 GV-IP Device Utility..................................................................... 511

11.16.1 Installing GV-IP Device Utility .................................................... 511
11.16.2 The GV-IP Device Utility Window ............................................... 512
11.16.3 Setting GV-IP Devices ................................................................. 513
11.16.4 Setting GV-POE Switch ............................................................... 514
11.16.5 Mapping IP Cameras ................................................................... 515

11.17 MCamCtrl Utility for GV-Joystick V2 ..................................... 516

11.17.1 Installing MCamCtrl Utility ......................................................... 516
11.17.2 Starting the MCamCtrl Utility..................................................... 517

11.18 GV-Mobile Server ......................................................................... 518

11.19 Language Setting ........................................................................ 519
11.19.1 MultiLang Tool for Translated Text ............................................ 519
11.19.2 SetLanguage Tool to Set UI Language....................................... 523

414
 CHAPTER

11
Useful Utilities
GV-System supports some advanced utilities to enhance the system performance in a security
network.

11.1 Dynamic DNS

GV-Dynamic DNS provides domain name registration, making your dynamic IP address point to your
GV-System server. The GV-Dynamic DNS will update the server’s IP address to DNS Server every 10
minutes. Even if your server’s IP address changes, you can still locate it by using the registered
domain name.

Note: Dynamic DNS uploads IP addresses over the Internet through ports 80 and 81. If your
GV-System is connected behind a router or firewall, make sure ports 80 and 81 are enabled. Dynamic
DNS will only upload global IP addresses. If your GV-System is using virtual IP, NAT port mapping
should be done first.

IMPORTANT: The DDNS service simplifies the process of trying to connect an IP video device to the
network. However, GeoVision does not and cannot warrant that the DDNS service will be uninterrupted
or error free. Please read Terms of Service carefully before using the service. Besides GeoVision, you
can also obtain the free DDNS service from these providers: DynDNS.org and No-IP.com.

415
11.1.1 Installing Dynamic DNS

To install Dynamic DNS, follow these steps:

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer. It runs automatically, and a window appears.
2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.
3. Select GV-Dynamic DNS Service, and follow the on-screen instructions.

You can also download GV-Dynamic DNS Service V2 from GeoVision Website

11.1.2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS

1. Go to Windows Start, point to Programs, select DDNS, and run Dynamic DNS Service. The
DNSClientV2 dialog box appears.
2. Click Register. The registration page appears.

Figure 11-1

3. Type a username and password and the Word Verification code. The password must be at least 6
characters.

4. Click the Send button. The following message appears.

416
 11 Useful Utilities

Figure 11-2

 Hostname: Made by registered username and “gvdip.com”. In this example, the hostname is
“http://julia.gvdip.com”. This will be the domain name used to log into your server.

 IP Address: Your server’s current IP address. This IP address is updated every 10 minutes.

Note: The domain name .gvdip(xx).com may vary with xx from 01 to 99.

Note: Before you can register a domain name with Dynamic DNS Service provided by GeoVision, it
is required to run any GeoVision application in the background if the installed GV-System is of
version 8.2 or later.

11.1.3 Starting Dynamic DNS

After registering a domain name with GV-Dynamic DNS, enable the DDNS function on your server.
Run DDNS Client V2 (Figure 11-1) and be sure GeoVision software is also enabled at the
background.

After typing the Hostname and Password used to enable the Dynamic DNS service, complete the
following settings:

 Obtain an IP address automatically: The DDNS server will use any available IP address from
the server or the router.

 Use the following IP address: If your server or router has more than one IP address, you can
assign one IP address to connect between the DDNS server and GV-System. It is highly
suggested to assign a fixed IP address instead of a dynamic IP address, which will not be
accessible for the DDNS when the IP address is changed.

 Run at startup: Select to automatically run the DDNS service at Windows startup.

 E-mail Setting:

o Scheme: Select a given situation to receive e-mail notification.

417
 o Sender: Type the name, e-mail address, username and password of the sender.

o Receiver: Type the recipient’s e-mail address(es). For multiple recipients, add a semicolon
between each e-mail address.

o Mail Server: Type the host name or address of your mail server. Keep the default port 25 or
modify if the mail server uses a different port. Select SSL if your e-mail server requires the
SSL authentication for connection.

o Click the Test button to send a test e-mail to confirm if the settings are correct.

Click Save. The connection information will be displayed.

Note: The DNS Client will not upload IP address unless one of the following applications is running:
Main System, Center V2, VSM, Dispatch Server and SMS Server. If the IP address of your
GV-System is not updated for more than 30 days, your host name will be deleted automatically.

11.1.4 Local DDNS Server

The Local DDNS Server can map a device name to the POS device and the AS200E Controller with a
dynamic IP, by which the GV-System can access the POS device and the AS200E Controller by the
device name. For details see GV-Data Capture V3 Series User’s Manual or GV-AS200 Controller
Hardware Installation Guide.

418
 11 Useful Utilities

11.2 Watermark Viewer

The GV-System can embed digital watermarks in video streams for authentication purposes. The
watermarks are encrypted and digital signatures embedded in video streams during the compression
stage, protecting videos from the moment of creation. Watermarking ensures that images are not
edited or damaged after they are recorded.

11.2.1 Activating Watermark Protection

Click the Configure button on the main screen, click System Configure, click General Setting and
select Use Digital Watermark Protection. The GV-System will digitally sign videos as they are
recorded.

11.2.2 Running the Watermark Proof

1. Go to the GV folder, find and run WMProof.exe.

Figure 11-3
2. In the Watermark Proof window, click File from the menu bar, select Open and locate the recorded
file (.avi). The selected file is then listed on the window. Alternatively, you can drag the file directly
from the storage folder to the window.
3. If the recording is unmodified, a check mark will appear in the Pass column. On the contrary, if the
recording is modified or does not contain watermark during recording, a check mark will appear in
the Failed column. To play the recording, double-click the listed file on the window.

419
11.2.3 The Watermark Proof Window

1 3 5 7
2 4 6

Figure 11-4

The controls in the window:

No. Name Description
1 Open File Opens the recorded file.
2 First Frame Goes to the first frame of the file.
3 Play Plays the file.
4 Previous Frame Goes to the previous frame of the file.
5 Next Frame Goes to the next frame of the file.
6 Previous Watermarked Frame Goes to the previous frame that contains watermark.
7 Next Watermarked Frame Goes to the next frame that contains watermark.
The Extracted icon should be identical with the Original
8 Original vs. Extracted
icon. If not, it indicates the recording has been tampered.
9 File List Displays the proof results.

420
 11 Useful Utilities

11.3 Multi-view Display

The GV-System supports multi-view display with up to 6 monitors, one for live viewing and the others
for playback or other operation without obstructing surveillance scene. To make this operation possible,
your system must have a graphics card with multiple video outputs, and each output should be
connected to its own monitor for display.

1. To configure multi-monitor display on Windows, right-click on the Windows desktop and select
Properties. The Display Property dialog box appears.

2. Select Settings, enable Extend my Windows desktop onto this Monitor, and click the Apply
button.

Figure 11-5

3. Go to the GV folder and locate DMPOS.exe.

Figure 11-6

421
 4. Run DMPOS. exe. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-7

5. In the Screen Setup tab, select a desired monitor display mode from the Displayer Mode
drop-down list.

6. Click the desired application tab to move the application to the second monitor. In this case,
ViewLog is used as an example.

7. In the ViewLog tab, select the number of monitor from the Select Monitor drop-down list.

8. Click OK.

9. Start GV-System. It should appear on Monitor 1.

10. Click the ViewLog button on the main screen and select Video/Audio log from the menu.
ViewLog should appear on Monitor 2.

Note: The Set Position option allows you to determine where to position GV-System on Windows. It
is only necessary if your GV-System is set to 800 x 600 panel resolutions but your Windows desktop
is set to 1024 x 768 or higher. It is recommended that both GV-System and Windows desktop to be
set to the same resolution. To set the panel resolution of GV-System, click Configure button, select
General Setting, select System Configure and find Panel Resolution.

422
 11 Useful Utilities

11.4 Windows Lockup

The GV-Desktop helps you to secure your PC while away from your workstation. You may lock up the
Windows desktop while launching a customized GV-Desktop. The GV-Desktop is where operators are
limited to run the GV-System and the selected programs.

11.4.1 The GV-Desktop Screen

The GV-Desktop program is included in the installation of Main System. Go to Windows Start, point to
Programs, select GV folder, and click Key Lock Utility. This GV-Desktop screen appears.

Figure 11-8

No. Name Description

1 Programs Accesses programs.
2 Settings Adds programs to the programs menu.
3 Log Off Logs off GV-Desktop.
4 Shut Down Shuts down the computer.
5 Task Manager Click to view the tasks currently running on your computer.

11.4.2 GV-Desktop Features

423
 Programs
Click the Programs button (No.1, Figure 11-8) to see the program menu. The default programs are
Multicam Surveillance System (Main System), ViewLog, Repair Database Utility, eMap Editor, Control
Center Service and Hot Swap HDD Tool. You can add or remove new programs to the menu. In the
example below, Paint is a new program added to the menu.

Figure 11-9

424
 11 Useful Utilities

Settings
Click the Settings button (No.2, Figure 11-8) to display the following window. A valid ID and password
are required.

Figure 11-10

[Password] Click to change the password. For the Allow Removing Password System option, see
Account and Password in Chapter 1.
[Export Token] See Token File for Save Mode later in this chapter.
[System Menu] Select a desired program and click the Edit button to change its name.

[Customized Menu] Set up the Programs menu as desired. To add a program, click the Add button.
In the Shortcut dialog box, type the program name, click the button next to the field to assign a path
and click OK.

[Administrative Tools] Set up the Programs menu as instructed in Customized Menu option. To run
the added programs configured in the Administrative Tools field, the administrative ID and Password
are required.

[Desktop Type] Select Windows or GV-Desktop (Multicam) from the drop-down menu. The selected
desktop will launch the next time when you log in to the computer.

Log Off
Click the Log off button (No.3, Figure 11-8) to log off GV-Desktop. A valid ID and password are

425
 required.

Shut Down
Click the Shut Down button (No. 4, Figure 11-8) to shut down your computer. A valid ID and password
are required.

Task Manager
Click the Task Manager button (No. 5, Figure 11-8) to view the programs currently running on your
computer. When you minimize a program, it will be hidden and under operation in the background. To
bring the program back to desktop, double-click the program listed in Task Manager.

Figure 11-11

426
 11 Useful Utilities

11.4.3 Token File for Save Mode

This option in the Settings section lets you export a token file. In case you enter safe mode and are in
the status of the GV-Desktop, this token file will let you exit from the GV-Desktop and enter the
Windows desktop. To export a token file and apply it, follow the steps below.

Exporting the Token File

1. Click the Export Token button (Figure 11-10). The Enter Token Code dialog box.
2. Type a code in the Token Code field, and click OK.

3. In the Save As dialog box, locate a path, type a desired name in the File Name field and click
Save to save the file.

Switching from GV-Desktop to Windows Desktop

1. Click the Settings button on the GV-Desktop. You will be prompted to locate the stored token file
and type the configured token code.

2. When the Settings window (Figure 11-10) appears, select Windows in the Desktop Type field and
exit from the window.

3. Click the Log Off button to log off the GV-Desktop and run the Windows desktop. You need to
locate the stored token file and type the configured token code again.

427
11.5 Authentication Server
GV-Authentication Server is a password and account management system for multiple GV-Systems.
The Authentication Server administrator can create the accounts with different access rights to a group
of GV-Systems. Once the GV-System is connected to the Authentication Server, the previous
password settings in local GV-Systems will be invalid. Local GV-Systems will submit to the full control
of the Authentication Server.

11.5.1 Installing the Server

To install this application in a remote server, follow these steps:

1. Insert the Software DVD. It runs automatically, and a window appears.

2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.
3. Click GV-Authentication Server, and follow the on-screen instructions.

You can also download GV-Authentication Server from GeoVision Website

428
 11 Useful Utilities

11.5.2 The Server Window

Go to Windows Start, click Programs, click AuthServer and click AuthServer. This window appears.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

13

12

Figure 11-12
No. Button Description
1 Add An Area Creates an Area group.
2 Add A Client Creates a client account.
3 Delete An Area / Client Deletes an existing group or client.
4 View/Edit A Client Select a client from the Client List, and click to view / edit it.
5 Find A Client Finds an existing client.
6 Start/Stop Service Starts/Stops the Authentication Server.
7 Server Setup Configures the Authentication Server.
Configures passwords and grants permissions to clients. Imports
8 Account Setup
groups from Active Directory.
9 Log Sets up the Authentication Server Log and opens the log browser.
Exits this window; Logs out Administrator; Changes
10 Exit
Password, imports or exports account information.
Lists the connected GV-VMS, GV-System, E-Map Server or
11 Connected Client List
GV-Control Center.
Lists the information of the selected GV-VMS, GV-System, E-Map
12 Client Information
Server or Control Center.

13 Client List Sets up the Authentication Server Log and opens the log browser.

429
11.5.3 Creating a Client DVR

You must create and arrange the clients first which user credentials will be centrally managed by the
Authentication Server. To create a list of GV-System clients, follow the steps below.

1. To create a GV-System client, highlight the DVR List from the left panel and click the Add A
Client button . The Client Information dialog box appears.

Figure 11-13

2. Type the client’s information and click OK. The Name must match that of local GV-System.

Tip: To view the name of your GV-System, click the Configure button, select System Configure and
select General Setting.

Figure 11-14

3. To create another client, repeat the steps above.

430
 11 Useful Utilities

4. You can also arrange multiple clients under a group by highlighting a list and clicking the Add An
Area button (No. 1, Figure 11-12). The created group appears under the selected List.

11.5.4 Creating a User Account

To create user accounts with different access rights and assign the user accounts to a group of
GV-System clients, follow the steps below. Up to 20,000 accounts can be created.

1. Click the Account Setup button (No.8, Figure 11-12) and select Password Setup. The Password
Setup dialog box appears.

2. To create and edit a user account, refer to Account and Password in Chapter 1.

Note: The Administrator has the authority of changing the password of any accounts.

3. To assign the created user to a group of GV-System clients:

a. Click the Group Setting button.

Figure 11-15

b. In the Valid Group List window, click the New Group button.

Figure 11-16

431
 c. In the DVR Group Information window, give a name to the group, select the desired
GV-System clients to be added to the group. Click OK.

Figure 11-17

d. Click OK again to return to the Password Setup window.

e. Use the Valid Group drop-down list to select the created group. The user will be able to log in
the assigned GV-System clients.

Figure 11-18

432
 11 Useful Utilities

4. Optionally use the following functions to arrange the user and client accounts.

A. Right-click a user account to have two options. The Apply setting to option will apply the
same settings to a specific user account. The Apply setting to group option will apply the
same settings to all user accounts under the same account level.

Figure 11-19

B. Right-click a client account to have two options. The Apply setting to other DVR(s) option
allows you to apply the same settings to all clients under the same user account. For this
example, the settings of Building A client will be applied to all Building B, C and D clients. The
Copy option allows you to copy and paste one client’s settings and any client.

Figure 11-20

433
11.5.5 Importing Groups and Users from Active Directory

To create user accounts efficiently, you can import groups and users from Microsoft’s Active Directory
to Authentication Server. You will need to install Active Directory on Windows Server and set up users
into groups before following the steps below.

Note: User accounts in Active Directory need to be grouped into Groups settings first, because only
groups can be imported into Authentication Server.

1. Run Active Directory Domains and Trusts in Windows Server by clicking the Start menu and
opening Administrative Tools.

2. Right-click your local Active Directory system and select Manage. The Active Directive Users and
Computers dialog box appears.

Figure 11-21

3. On the View menu, select Advanced Features.

434
 11 Useful Utilities

Note: If you use Windows Server 2008 instead of Server 2012, skip this step.

4. Right-click the folder saved with the user accounts or groups and select Properties.

Figure 11-22

Tip: You can change the query parameters or show all items for each folder by clicking View and
selecting Filter Options.

5. Select the Attribute Editor tab, double-click the attribute distinguishedName and copy the value
like OU=persons,DC=FAE,DC=com. You will need to paste the value at step 8, C to assign the
folder to import the user accounts or groups.

435
 6. In AuthServer, click the Account Setup button (No.8, Figure 11-12) and select Active Directory
Setup. This page appears.

Figure 11-23

7. Under Source Database, select Active Directory to enable the function.

8. To connect to the server with Active Directory:

A. Type the Server IP Address and the Port number of the server.

B. To log into the server using your current login information, select Connect with the current
login information. To log into the server using the login information of its administrator, select
Connect with administrator login information and type the user name and password.

C. Paste the value of distinguished name you copied at step 5 respectively to Group / Users
Search Base.

D. Click Test Connection to see if you can connect to the server with Active Directory.

436
 11 Useful Utilities

9. To assign groups in Active Directory to User, Power User or Supervisor authority levels:

A. Click the Assign Authority Level button. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-24

B. Select the groups detected in Active Directory from the Undefined Group list and use the
arrow buttons to assign the groups to User, Power User or Supervisor level.
C. Click OK to import the user data into the Password Setup window.

10. To automatically update changes to user data in Active Directory, click Auto Update and specify
the update frequency in minutes.

11. Click OK and restart Authentication Server to apply the settings.

437
11.5.6 Starting the Server

To configure the server and start the service, follow these steps:

1. Click the Server Setup button (No. 7, Figure 11-12). This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-25
2. Under Security Setting, type the Authorized ID and Authorized Password which will be used for
the client GV-System to log into the Authentication Server.
3. Click OK to apply the settings.
4. Click the Start/Stop Service button (No. 6, Figure 11-12) to start the services.

You can optionally configure the following settings before starting the Authentication Server:

[Network Setting]

 Server Port: The default port number is 3663. To use UPnP for automatic port configuration to
your router, click the Arrow button. For details, see UPnP Settings in Chapter 8.

438
 11 Useful Utilities

 Automatic Failover Support: You can configure another two Authentication Servers in case of
the primary Authentication Server failure. Once the primary server fails, the second or the third
server will take over the connection from clients and provide uninterrupted services. Note the
settings of Authorized ID and Authorized Password on the failover server must match those of the
primary server.

Tip: To set up the failover Authentication Server, you can export the current settings by using the
Export Account and Import Account functions in the Exit button.

Note: Once the primary Authentication Server is ready to resume the services, close the failover
Authentication Server so the connection from clients can move back to the primary.

[Security Setting]

 Enhance network security: Enhances network security on Authentication Server. Note after you
enable the option, the client GV-System of version 7 or earlier cannot connect to the
Authentication Server.
 Enable IP White List: Click Edit to create a list of IP addresses allowed to connect to
Authentication Server.

[Server Setting]

 Auto start service upon server startup: Starts the service automatically upon the startup of
Authentication Server.

 Notify when DVR disconnected from server: Notifies the Authentication Server with a pop-up
window when the GV-System and Authentication Server loss connection.

439
11.5.7 Connecting GV-System to the Server

To configure the GV-System in order to access the Authentication Server remotely through a network
connection, follow these steps:

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select System Configure, select Password
Setup, and select Remote Authentication Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-26

 Enable Remote Authentication: Enable the connection with the Authentication Server.
 Allow local supervisors to disable Remote Authentication System: Allows the local
supervisor to stop the Authentication application when the connection with the Authentication
Server fails. Note if the option is disabled and the connection with the Authentication Server
fails, the local supervisor will not be able to log into the GV-System and the dialog box won’t
be accessible until connection resumes.
 Allow users to use local account to log in remote applications: Allows the local users to
access other remote applications with their previous password and ID settings when the
connection with the Authentication Server fails.

 Login with authentication server backup account: Keep using password settings created
on the Authentication Server even though the connection with the server fails.

440
 11 Useful Utilities

2. Click the Set Up Server button in Figure 11-26. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-27

3. Enter the IP address and port of the Authentication Server. Type the Authorized ID and
Authorized Password of the Authentication Server.
4. Click OK to start the connection. When the connection is established, the previous password
settings in the GV-System will be invalid.

5. Press [L] on the keyboard to call up the Login dialog box. The icon indicates the connection
is established.

Figure 11-28

As long as the Authentication Sever works, the Login dialog box will appear upon the starting of
GV-System. Type the user account created on the Authentication Server to log into the GV-System.

441
 Note: When the disconnection icon appears on the Login dialog box (Figure 11-25), there might

be one of these three reasons:

1. The login ID and Password do not match any of user IDs and Passwords created on the
Authentication Server.
2. The client’s given name doesn’t match the GV-System’s (Figure 11-14).
3. The network connection has traffic problem.

442
 11 Useful Utilities

11.5.8 Remote Access from Control Center, Remote E-Map

and MultiView

The Authentication Server allows you to restrict users of E-Map Server, Control Center, and MultiView
to access specific DVR hosts and cameras only. Instead of connecting to DVR hosts directly, the user
of E-Map Server, Control Center and MultiView will connect to the Authentication Server using the user
account you created on the Authentication Server.

You must first set up remote authentication on E-Map Server and Control Center. After E-Map Server,
Control Center and MultiView are connected to the Authentication Server, the user will be prompted to
log in with the user ID and password you created on the Authentication Server. Once logged in, a list of
DVR hosts authorized to the user account will be displayed, and the user will be able to view the
assigned cameras.

Setting Authentication Server

You need to create and arrange E-Map Servers and Control Servers under their separate lists on the
Authentication Server window (Figure 11-12). Type the name and information of the E-Map Server or
Control Center in the Client Information dialog box. The name does not need to match the location
name of the E-Map Server or Control Center.

Accessing from E-Map Server

The E-Map Server can access the user account setting of the Authentication Server.

1. In the E-Map Server window, click Tools on the menu bar, and select Options. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 11-29

2. Select Use Remote Authentication. If you want the Authentication Server service started
automatically at Windows startup, select Automatic. Keep the Port 80 as default or change it if
necessary. Click OK.

443
 3. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Remote Authentication. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-30

4. Type the IP address, authorized ID and authorized password of the Authentication Server. Type
the E-Map Server’s client name created on the Authentication Server. Click OK.
5. Click the Start Service button on the toolbar to start the E-Map Server.
6. When you log into the E-Map Server, enter the user ID and password created on the
Authentication Server. A list of assigned GV-System hosts to the user will be displayed.

Accessing from Control Center

The Control Center can access account settings of the Authentication Server.

1. On the Host List, right-click Host List by ID and select Remote Authentication Setup. A dialog
box appears.
2. Type the IP address, authorized ID and authorized password of the Authentication Server. Type
the Control Center’s client name created on the Authentication Server. Click OK to enable
connecting to the Authentication Server.
3. To access the Authentication Server account settings, on the Host List, right-click Host List by ID
and select Get Host List by ID. A dialog box prompts you for ID and password.
4. Type a user ID and password created on the Authentication Server, and click OK. A list of
assigned GV-System hosts to the user will be displayed.

444
 11 Useful Utilities

Accessing from Multi View Viewer

Once the GV-System is connected to the Authentication Server, you can only enter the user account
created on the Authentication Server to log into the Multi View Viewer. Once you log into the Multi View
successfully, a list of assigned GV-System hosts to the user will be displayed.

Figure 11-31

445
11.6 Fast Backup and Restore
With the Fast Backup and Restore (FBR) solution, you can change interface skin and customize
features to suit personal preference, as well as backing up and restoring your configurations in Main
System.

11.6.1 Installing the FBR Program

1. Insert the Software DVD, click Install GeoVision Supplemetal Utilities, select GV-Fast Backup
& Restore Multicam System, and follow the on-screen instructions. You can also download the
utility from GeoVision Website
2. After the installation is complete, run Fast Backup & Restore Multicam System from the
Windows Start menu. This window appears.

Figure 11-32

446
 11 Useful Utilities

11.6.2 Customizing Logo and Button

You can replace the screen images of Startup Splash, Non-Active Video and Video Lost with your own
images.

Before you start, remember that each screen image has its specified size. Create your own image
according to these specifications:
 Startup Splash: Bit Depth 24, Width 316, and Height 272.
 Non-Active Video: Bit Depth 24, Width 720, and Height 576.
 Video Lost: Bit Depth 24, Width 720, and Height 576.

To customize the screen image, follow these steps:

1. In the FBR window (Figure 11-32), click the Customize Logo and Button icon, select DVR, and
then select Custom Logo. This window appears.

Figure 11-33
2. Click a desired screen image to be replaced with an imported image.
3. Exit the FBR program, and start the GV-System to see the change.

447
11.6.3 Customizing the Features

Not every feature may be of equal interest to you. You can now specify which features are to be
displayed at system startup.

1. In the FBR Window (Figure 11-32), click the Customize Features icon to display this dialog box.

Figure 11-34

[Devices] Expand this folder, and select the device applications you want to enable in the
GV-System.
[Functions] Expand this folder, and select the functions you want to enable in the GV-System.
The gray checked boxes indicate that the functions are enabled by default. No changes can be
made to these functions.

2. Click OK to apply the settings.

448
 11 Useful Utilities

11.6.4 Backing up and Restoring Settings

You can back up the configurations you made in Main System, and restore the backup data to the
current system or import it to another GV-System.

Backing up the settings

1. In the FBR window (Figure 11-32), click the Backup System Settings or Restore Defaults icon,
and select Backup Current System. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-35

2. Select which settings you want to back up, and press the Next Step button . The Save As
dialog box appears.
3. Select the destination drive to store the backup file. When the backup is complete, this message
will appear: Successfully Backup MultiCam System Settings.

449
 Restoring the System
You can restore the current system with the backup of configuration file. Also, you can copy this
backup file to configure another system with the same settings as the current system.

1. Open the backup file (*.exe) you previously stored. A valid ID and password are required to
display this window.

Figure 11-36

2. Click the Restore Multicam System icon, and then select which backup settings you want to
restore.
3. Press the Next Step button to start restoring.
4. When the restoration is complete, this message will appear: Successfully Restore MultiCam
System Settings.

Restoring Defaults
You can choose to restore the system default settings by clicking the Backup System Settings or
Restore Defaults icon, and select Restore Defaults.

Note: Files backed up from GV-System V8.5.6.0 or before can be imported or restored back to
GV-Systems using Windows 8 or Server 2012 by disabling the User Account Control (UAC) for the
operating systems. Windows 8 and Server 2012 are only supported in GV-System V8.5.7.0 or later.

450
 11 Useful Utilities

11.7 Hot-Swap Recording

The program Media Man Tool provides a hot-swap feature, allowing a non-stop recording. You can add
and remove a hot-swap or portable hard drive to the GV-System without interrupting the monitoring.
When the new drive is added, it will be configured to the recording path automatically.

Additionally, you can back up ViewLog player and database files to play back at any computer.

Note: The minimum disk capacity required for this feature is 2 GB.

11.7.1 The Media Man Tool Window

This program comes with the installation of Main System. Click Windows Start, point to Programs,
select the GV folder and select Hot Swap HDD Tool. This window will appear.

Figure 11-37

No. Name Description

1 Exit Closes or minimizes the Median Man Tool window.

2 View Refreshes the disk drive status shown in this window.

Sets up the LED panel and automatically logs in the Media Man Tool
3 Tools
window.
Select the option to view the status and information of the disk drives. For
4 Display Details
details, see Viewing Disk Drive Status later in this chapter.

451
11.7.2 Viewing Disk Drive Status

To view the detailed information of a drive, check Display Details (No. 4, Figure 11-37) in the desired
drive section. The status window will appear.

Figure 11-38

No. Name Description

Indicates disk information.
In “Media Type,” two messages may appear:
 LAN: indicates a hard drive is connected.
 Local: indicates a local hard drive is connected.
In “Status”, three messages may appear:
1 Disk Properties
 Standby: indicates the hard drive already specified as the recording
path.
 Unused: indicates the hard drive not specified as the recording
path.
 Recording: indicates the files are being recorded to the disk.
Indicates the path, size and number of recorded events; the dates of the
2 DVR Event Info
oldest and latest events.

452
 11 Useful Utilities

DVR Database/MDB/ Indicates the path, size and number of the ViewLog Event List
3
Object Index Info log/System Log/Object Index files.

4 ViewLog Info Indicates the location you have backed up the EZ ViewLog player.

Note: The DVR Event Info updates every minute. The MDB Info, DVR Database Info, Object Index
Info and ViewLog Info update as data changes.

11.7.3 Adding a Disk Drive

1. Click Windows Start, point to Programs, select the GV folder and select Hot Swap HDD Tool.
2. Insert a hot-swap hard drive or plug a portable hard drive to your computer. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 11-39

3. Select Add to recording path and select the storage group from the drop-down list.
4. If there are recording files saved on the hard drive, you may select the options of Delete all
events, Delete all database files or Delete all object index files.
5. Click OK to automatically configure the hard drive to the recording path.
6. To verify the hard drive is added successfully, check if the “Status” of the drive displays Standby.
Or in the Main System, click the Configure button, point to System Configure, select General
Setting, click the Set Location button, and then select the Storage Group Folder to confirm the
new recording path.

Tip: To add a local drive to the recording path, right-click the desired drive, select Add for recording
and follow Step 3 to add the drive.

453
11.7.4 Removing a Disk Drive

To remove a disk drive from the recording path, right-click the desired drive, and select Remove from
recording path. This dialog box will appear. You can export related database files with the recordings
on the hard drive. You can also export the ViewLog player which allows you to play back the
recordings on any computer.

Figure 11-40

 Export ViewLog Player:

 Export ViewLog with database files: Exports the ViewLog player together with ViewLog
Event List log files (.db files), related to the recordings on the hard drive.

 Export database files only: Exports ViewLog Event List log files (.db files) only if the
ViewLog program already exits on the hard drive.
 Export System Log database files: Exports the system log files (.mdb files), related to the
recordings on the hard drive.
 Export Object Index files: Exports the Object Index files, related to the recordings on the drive.
 […] button: If you want to change the default folder “Viewlog” created on the hard drive, click the
button.

Note: Removing the hard drive will affect ViewLog database. To restore these events, add the hard
drive back to the system and run Repair Database Utility.

454
 11 Useful Utilities

11.7.5 Logging In Automatically at Startup

To automatically log in and minimize the Media Man Tools window at Windows startup, follow these
steps:

1. Click Tools on the menu bar, and select Auto login at Windows startup. A dialog box appears.
2. Type the ID and password of the GV-System for automatic login in the future.
3. If you want to minimize the Media Man Tools window to the system tray at startup, select Auto
minimize at startup.
4. Click OK to apply the settings.

455
11.7.6 Setting LED Panel

A LED panel on the screen provides a quick indication of the activity status of hard disk drives.

Figure 11-41

LED Color Description

Gray No HDD is assigned to this LED.
Green A HDD is assigned to this LED.
Red The HDD is full.
GV-System is recording or the video / audio files are played back in
Flashing Green
ViewLog.
Flashing Red The HDD is recycling.

1. Click Tools on the menu bar and select Setup LED Panel. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-42

456
 11 Useful Utilities

 LED Panel always stays on top: This option makes the LED panel stay on top of other
windows when the Media Man Tools window is minimized.

 Synchronize the LED Panel with the LED Device on GV-Hot Swap DVR: This option is
designed for the use of the GV-Hot Swap DVR System. When this option is enabled, the
LED device installed on the front panel of the GV-Hot Swap DVR System will synchronize
with the LED panel on the screen.

 Enable disk full beep: When the hard disk drive is full, the system sounds on. Note this
function only works when the motherboard is equipped or installed with a PC speaker.

2. By default, only the hard disk drive that stores video and audio files will be assigned to LED. If you
want to re-assign the hard disk drive or assign other drives to LEDs, freely move the hard disk
drive to the desired LED on the tree.

3. Click OK to apply the settings, and minimize the Media Man Tool window to display the LED panel
on the screen.

4. If you want to return to the Media Man Tools window, right-click the LED panel and select Switch
to the setup window.

Note:
1. Because the LEDs are designed to indicate the video and audio files are being written or read, it
is not recommended to assign the HDDs that store log files to the LEDs.
2. If the HDD that stores log files is assigned to a LED and its LED turns red, make sure the log
files are not being written before you remove it. Otherwise, the log files might be lost during the
removal. For details on storage locations of logs and video/audio files, see Setting Data Storage
in Chapter 1.

457
11.8 Backup Server
With Backup Server, the GV-System can back up recorded files to the storage system over Internet.
When the Backup Server is enabled, a copy of recorded files will automatically be backed up to the
storage system.

The Backup Server can support any storage system protocol which can add itself to Windows and be
formatted by Windows Disk Management. The following diagram shows the possible types of storage
systems the Backup Server can support. The Backup Server allows you to select multiple drives, both
local drives or through networking, to be used to back up files.

Network Local

iSCSI eSATA
NAS GV-System USB
Thecus 5200N + Internal Hard Driver
Backup Server
Figure 11-43

11.8.1 Adding a Disk Volume

Generally the steps to add a disk volume from a storage system looks something like this:

1. Assign a disk volume on the storage system for GV-System.

2. Create an account on the storage system for GV-System.

3. Build the connection between the storage system and GV-System. Certain storage systems may
require you to install and configure additional program, e.g. iSCSI Initiator, on the computer of
GV-System for building the connection. For this, consult the documentation of your storage
system.

4. When the disk volume can be detected by Windows, format the disk volume with Window’s Disk
Management as well as a lock disk.

458
 11 Useful Utilities

Steps 1~3 may vary depending on the type of storage system. Ensure the newly added storage drive
can be detected by Windows and be formatted by Disk Management in Computer Management. (To
access the Computer Management window, right-click the My Computer icon on the desk and select
Manage. Go down to Storage and select Disk Management.)

Figure 11-44

Note:
1. It is recommended that the formatted partition should be Basic disk storage and NTFS file
system if the disk volume is over 32 GB.
2. For users of the iSCSI storage system, a node name account should only be applied for one
host/computer to use. It is restricted to apply one node name account on different hosts/computers
due to data conflict.

459
11.8.2 Enabling Backup Server

Before you activate the Backup Server, ensure the connection between the storage system and
GV-System has been built and newly-added disk volumes have been formatted as well.

1. On the GV-System, click the Network button (No. 11, Figure 1-2), and select Backup Server.
The Geo Backup Server dialog box appears.

2. Click the Edit button and select locations to store the backup files.

3. Select Copy Viewlog to backup drives if you want to copy the ViewLog application to each of
the partition selected.

4. Click OK.

5. Click the Login button to connect to the storage system.

Figure 11-45

Note: When Copy Viewlog to backup drives is selected, a ViewLog folder and Backup Server
Viewlog.bat will be created in the selected partitions after backup is completed. Double-click
Backup Server Viewlog.bat to run ViewLog and to load the recorded events into ViewLog.

460
 11 Useful Utilities

11.8.3 Advanced Settings

You may want to configure the Backup Server to fit into your own needs. In the Geo Backup Server
dialog box (Figure 11-45), click Advanced. The Advanced Settings dialog box appears.

[General]

You can select the bandwidth speed to ensure the quality connection.

Figure 11-46
[Upload Policy]
 Full Speed: Build the connection at full maximum speed.
 Limit Bandwidth: Specify the desired bandwidth limit in kb/s.
 Smart Detect: Automatically detect the file size and decide the proper bandwidth speed.
[Startup] Automatically starts the Backup Server at Windows startup.
[Recycle] Enable this option to recycle video files.
 Enlarge Recycle Threshold: Recycle threshold is the file size at which the recycling begins. If you
set the recycle threshold to be 2000 MB, recycling starts when free space on the connected disk is
under 2000 MB and the oldest files are overwritten. The upper limit of the recycle threshold is
99999 MB.
[Keep Days (1-999)] Specify the number of days to keep the files from 1 day to 999 days. When both
Keep Days and Recycle are enabled, the system applies whichever condition comes first. For
example, if the specified smallest amount of storage space comes earlier than the designated keep
days, then recycle is applied first.

461
 [Server Settings]

You can select the files of cameras to be backed up, and the notification method when the network is
disconnected.

Figure 11-47
 Camera Selection: Selects the files of desired cameras to be backed up.
 Disconnection Alerts: Selects the alert methods when the network is disconnected.
 Trigger output: Triggers the specified output module and pin for alerts.
 Send E-mail: An e-mail message is sent out for alerts. Before using this function, click the
Setup button in the E-Mail Setup field to set up an e-mail account.
 Send SMS Message: A SMS message is sent out for alerts. Before using this function, click
the Accounts Settings button in the SMS Setup field to set up a SMS account.

[Schedule]

You can plan the time to back up the files to the storage system.

Figure 11-48
 Any Time: The backup starts whenever there are files to be backed up.
 Daily: The backup starts at the set time of a day. Drag the mouse over the timeline to define the
start and end time.
 Weekly: The backup can start at any time or the specified time of a week. To specify the time,
select the desired days (Mon – Sun), select Select Time, and then drag the mouse over the
timeline to define the start and end time.

462
 11 Useful Utilities

11.8.4 Manually Adding Files for Backup

Once connected, the files from the GV-System will automatically be backed up to the storage system.
To manually select the files for backup:

1. Click the Backup Server icon on the system tray, and select Add Files. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-49
2. Expand the hard disk drive folders and select the desired files for backup, and click OK.

11.8.5 Viewing Server Status

To view the information of connection activities, backup files and backup data, click the Backup
Server icon on the system tray and select Server Status.

[Event Log] This tab shows the history of connection activities.

Figure 11-50

463
 [Backup File List] This tab displays the files being backed up. Click File View to display the backup
files by file names or click Camera View to display the backup files by cameras.

Figure 11-51

Tip: To view the information of the backup file, click the file event.

[Database List] The related log data, including system log and POS data, will be backed up to storage
system with the recording files. Note that the record only appears on the next day of file transference.

Figure 11-52

464
 11 Useful Utilities

11.8.6 Retrieving Recorded Files

You can retrieve the files from the storage system and play video back.

1. On the ViewLog screen, click the Tools button, and select Remote Storage System. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 11-53
2. Click the Get Host List button to enable connecting to the storage system. The DVR icon
appears.

3. Expand the DVR folder, select the host and click the button on the top right corner.

4. After the events stored on the storage system are displayed on the Event List, you can use
ViewLog features for playback.

465
11.8.7 Viewing Backup Status

You can view the backup status of each camera. To view the information, click the Backup Server icon
on the system tray and select Backup Status. The Backup File Viewer dialog box appears. In the left
menu, click a camera channel to see the date and time when the recording of the camera was backed
up.

Figure 11-54

466
 11 Useful Utilities

11.9 Backup Viewer

With the Backup Viewer, you can access the video recordings and log data backed up at the storage
system from any computer over the Internet. You can search the log data as well as view, edit and
save the recordings at the local computer.

Backup Viewer
GV-System / Backup Server

Read only Read/Write

Storage System

Figure 11-55

11.9.1 Usage Requirements

You must meet the following requirements when building the Backup Viewer and creating the account
on the storage system:

 The Backup Viewer is not appropriate to be installed on the computer of Backup Server
(GV-System) due to node/host name conflict.

 Create an account of “Read-Only” on the storage system for Backup Viewer.

 Build the connection between the storage system and Backup Viewer. Certain storage systems
may require you to install and configure additional program, e.g. iSCSI Initiator, on the computer
of Backup Viewer for building the connection. Consult the documentation of the storage system
for building connection with another computer.

467
11.9.2 Starting Backup Viewer

Before you start Backup Viewer, ensure to meet the usage requirements mentioned earlier.

1. Insert the Software DVD, click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities, select GV-Backup
Viewer and follow the onscreen instructions.

2. Run Backup Viewer. The Backup Viewer window appears.

3. Click the Connect button on the toolbar to enable connecting Backup Viewer to the storage
system.

You can also download GV-Backup Viewr from GeoVision Website

Note: When installing Backup Viewer on Windows 7 / 8 / Server 2012 using Typical Installation, a
message will pop up to notify that Microsoft iSCSI Initiator cannot be installed, because Windows

7 / 8 / Server 2012 comes with built-in iSCSI Initiator. You can simply ignore the message and
proceed with installation.

11.9.3 Performing Queries

On the iSCSI tab, you can search events or log data stored on the connected storage system. This
feature shares the same interface and functions with the Event List Query function on WebCam Server.
For details, see Event List Query in Chapter 8.

iSCSI Tab

468
 11 Useful Utilities

Figure 11-56

11.9.4 Viewing the Event Files

On the ViewLog tab, you can retrieve the recordings from the storage system and play video back.

ViewLog tab

List of available hosts,

cameras and dates

Event List

Playback Window

Figure 11-57

Right-clicking the playback window can change the play mode and create special effects when you
play video back. For details, see Single Player in Chapter 4.

11.9.5 Using Remote ViewLog

Using the Remote ViewLog function, you can access the data on the GV-System. Click the Remote
ViewLog button on the toolbar. The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears.
Type the IP address, ID and Password of the GV-System, select DVR in the Host Type field, and click
Connect to enable connecting to the GV-System.

469
11.10 Bandwidth Control Application
The Bandwidth Control is an independent application that controls and monitors the network traffic of
the WebCam servers. Its features include:
 Manage up to 10 WebCam servers
 Get bandwidth usages of every Webcam server and every user
 Set bandwidth thresholds for specific users and IP addresses
 IP black and white list
 Kick unwanted users

Note: The Bandwidth Control application only works on Internet Explorer. If the user logs in the
WebCam server using other browsers, e.g. Netscape and FireFox, the Bandwidth Control cannot
detect and manage the login user. However, the user of other browsers has access to JEPG and live
images only.

470
 11 Useful Utilities

11.10.1 Installing the Bandwidth Control

1. On the computer you want to install the Bandwidth Control program, insert the Software DVD, click
Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities, select GV-Bandwidth Control Client Site, and follow
the onscreen instructions.
2. After the installation is complete, double-click the Bandwidth Remote Control icon created on the
desktop. The Bandwidth Control window appears.

You can also download GV-Bandwidth Control Client Site from GeoVision Website

1 2 3 4 5

7 6

Figure 11-58

No. Name Description

1 Connection Builds the connection to a WebCam server.
2 Disconnect Stops the connection to a WebCam server.
3 Get Control Obtains the right to remotely control the WebCam servers.
4 Give Up Control Ceases controlling the WebCam servers and users.
5 User List Displays the connected users and their status
6 Bandwidth Record Displays the network traffic in graph display.
7 Event Log Records activities of WebCam servers and users.
8 Host List Displays all WebCam servers to be connected.

471
11.10.2 Allowing Remote Control at DVR

The network traffic of WebCam server can be controlled when the GV-System permits the remote
control from the Bandwidth Control program by the following steps:

1. On the main screen, click the Network button, and select WebCam Server.
2. On the General tab, select the Run Bandwidth Control server option. When this option is
enabled, on the Control Center Server option list, the “Bandwidth Control Service” is marked with
a check.

11.10.3 Connecting to a WebCam Server

1. Click Host on the menu bar, and select Connection. Or you can click the Connection button on
the toolbar. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-59

2. To add a WebCam server to be connected to, click Add.

3. Type host name, IP addresses, user name and password of the WebCam server. Modify the port
if necessary.
4. Click OK. If the connection is established, the WebCam server shows up in the Host List.
5. You can add up to 10 WebCam servers by repeating above steps.
6. To stop the connection, select the host and click the Disconnect button.
7. Up to 5 users of the Bandwidth Control programs can connect to a single WebCam server for
network traffic monitoring. However, only one user has access to bandwidth settings. When this
user clicks the Give Up Control button, the user no longer controls the WebCam server.
Whoever clicks the Get Control button first has access to bandwidth settings. For bandwidth
settings, see Controlling a WebCam Server later in this chapter.

472
 11 Useful Utilities

11.10.4 Controlling a WebCam Server

To disconnect a login user or set the bandwidth limit for a user, right-click the user to have these
options:

Figure 11-60

 Kick: Disconnects the user from the WebCam server.

 Block IP: Prohibits the IP address from connecting to the WebCam server. To use the function,
the Enable IP Black List option (Figure 11-63) must be selected first.
 Bandwidth Setup: Select By Username to specify a bandwidth limit for the user, or select By IP
to limit the bandwidth used by the IP address. A setup dialog box will appear. In this example, an
IP address is selected for bandwidth limit setup. Select Bandwidth Setup, specify a bandwidth
limit, and then click OK.

Figure 11-61

473
11.10.5 Bandwidth Setup

You can specify the total bandwidth allocated to a WebCam server. You can also specify the bandwidth
for certain users and IP addresses. This is especially useful when your network is busy or heavily
loaded.

1. Click Configure on the menu bar, and select Bandwidth Setup. A dialog box prompts for you to
select a host.
2. Select the desired WebCam server, and click OK. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-62
 Bandwidth limit: Select this option, and define the total bandwidth that the WebCam server
will be allowed to use on your network.
 By IP: Click the Add button, and specify a specific IP address or a range of IP addresses and
its bandwidth limit.
 By Username: Click the Add button, and specify the user name and its bandwidth limit.

Note: If you have already specified the total bandwidth to a WebCam server, it is prioritized before
the bandwidth limits set to user names and IP addresses.

474
 11 Useful Utilities

11.10.6 Block List Setup

Two types of block lists are provided to restrict access to a WebCam server: permitting and denying a
specified range of IP address to establish the connection. Note that only one type of block list can be
used at one time.

1. Click Configure on the menu bar, and select IP White / Black List Setup. A dialog box prompts
for you to select a host.
2. Select the desired WebCam server, and click OK. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-63

3. Select the type of block list you want to use, and click Add to define the IP addresses.
 Enable IP White list: Allows the defined range of IP addresses to establish the connection.
 Enable IP Black list: Prohibits the defined range of IP addresses from establishing the
connection.
4. Click OK to apply the settings.

475
11.10.7 General Setup

You can set up sound alarm when a user logs in, or change the real-time graph display of network
traffic. Click Configure on the menu bar and select General Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-64

 User Login Alarm: Computer alarm sounds on when a user logs in.
 Bandwidth Display Option: Set the color of bandwidth save, grid lines of the graph and the
background color of the graph.

 Number of Grid Line: Set the number of grid lines to be displayed on the graph.

You can click the Bandwidth Record tab in the Bandwidth Control window to view the network traffic
in graph.

Figure 11-65

476
 11 Useful Utilities

11.11 Report Generator

With the Report Generator, you can generate a daily or weekly report based on the specified recording
data. The report can be either generated manually or automatically by schedule. The report is
available in two types of formats: MDB and HTML. You can save the report on the hard disk, send it to
a specified e-mail address or have it to be dealt in both ways. If the reports indicate the video
recordings of events, you can play them back via Internet connection.

11.11.1 Starting Report Generator

1. The Report Generator program is included in the installation of Main System. Double-click
ReportGenerator.exe from the GV folder.

2. The program will be minimized to the system tray. Double-click the icon to run the program.

3. Type the ID and password of the GV-System when you are prompted to log in.

477
11.11.2 Setting Report Generator

In the Report Generator dialog box, click the Advanced Setting tab.

Figure 11-66
[Startup]

 Auto startup when Windows startup: Select this option to start Report Generator automatically
at Windows startup.

 Minimize UI: Select this option to minimize the Report Generator after it is started.

[Day Definition of Report] Define the time period of data to be included in the report.

 The previous day: The report is generated on the previous day’s data.

 24 hours before execution time: The report is generated on the data from 24 hours before
report generation.

[Report]

 Keep Days: If you generate reports to the hard disk, specify the number of days to keep the
report files. Up to 30 days of files can be kept. To generate reports to the hard disk, see Step 4 in
Setting Report Criteria later in this chapter.

478
 11 Useful Utilities

[Domain name from DDNS] This option will generate URL links in the exported HTML report for
remote video playback. For this function to work, enter the fixed IP address or domain name of the
GV-System, and enable Remote ViewLog Service on the GV-System. To obtain a domain name, see
Dynamic DNS earlier in this chapter. For details on remote playback, see Playing Back Video
Recordings later in this chapter.

[Event Log Settings]

 Auto Import: Specify the number of days of Report Generator logs to be displayed when the
Event Log is started. Up to seven days of data can be displayed.

 Keep Days: Specify the number of days to keep Report Generator logs. The logs can be kept for
up to 365 days.

 Log Path: Select the location to store Report Generator logs.

479
11.11.3 Setting Report Criteria

You can create up to 300 reports (Jobs) with different criteria.

1. In the Report Generator dialog box, click the Program Report tab.

Figure 11-67

2. In the Job field, type a descriptive name for the report.

3. Select the types of events you want to include in the report. To set up specific criteria, click the
Filter button beside each option.
[System MDB]

 Monitor: Includes the events of motion and I/O events.

 System: Includes the events of functions enabled and disabled in GV-System.

 Login: Includes the events of who has logged in and out of GV-System and WebCam
Server at what time.

 Counter: Includes the events of and result of GV-System’s counter function.

[POS MDB] Select the cameras for searching POS event.

480
 11 Useful Utilities

4. In the Action Select field, select how the report is accessed.

 Save to HD: Select this option to save the report on the hard disk. Click the Setting button
to display this dialog box.

Figure 11-68

Click Select to specify the storage location, and use the drop-down list to select a report
format. If you want to create a self-executable file of the report, select Create a
self-executable file.

 E-Mail: Select this option to send the report to an e-mail address as an attachment. Click the
Setting button to set up the e-mail account and attachment.

For details on setting up the e-mail account, see Setting Email Server in Chapter 1.

For details on setting up the attachment, see E-Mail Attachment Settings later in this
chapter.

5. In the Execution Method drop-down list, choose the way and time to generate the report.

 Everyday: Automatically generates daily reports at a specific time. Specify the time by using
the Select Time drop-down list.

 Sun - Sat: Automatically generates reports on the selected day (Sun to Sat) and at a
specific time. Specify the time by using the Select Time drop-down list.

To select the days of data to be included in the report, click the desired day buttons.

Figure 11-69

481
  Manual daily: Manually generates a daily report.

 If you select The Previous day on the Advanced Setting tab (Figure 11-63), the report
will be generated on the data of one day before your specified date. For example, you
enter “12/10/2007” in the Select Date drop-down list. The report is generated on the
data of 9th December 2007.

 If you select 24 hours before execution time on the Advanced Setting tab (Figure
11-67), the report will be generated on the data of 24 hours before your specified date
and time. Specify the date and time by using the Select Date and Select Time
drop-down lists.

 Manual Weekly: Manually generates a weekly report.

 If you select The Previous day on the Advanced Setting tab (Figure 11-67), the
generated report will contain the data of 7 days before your specified date. For
example, you enter “12/10/2007” in the Select Date drop-down list. The report is
generated on the date from December 3rd to 9th in 2007.

To select the days of data to be included in the report, click the desired day buttons.
See Figure 11-67.

 If you select 24 hours before execution time on the Advanced Setting tab (Figure
11-67), the generated report will contain the data of 7 days counting back on your
specified date and time. Specify the date and time by using the Select Date and
Select Time drop-down lists. For example, if you enter “12/10/2007” and “01:00”, the
report is generated on the time from 01:00 am, December 10th to 01:00 am, December
4th, 2007.

To select the days of data to be included in the report, click the desired day buttons.
See Figure 11-67.

482
 11 Useful Utilities

11.11.4 E-Mail Attachment Settings

After you set up the e-mail account to receive the reports as e-mail attachments, you can also set up
the attachment limits to avoid sending out large files.

1. On the Program Report tab, select E-mail and click the Setting button beside. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 11-70

2. In the Attach File Select field, use the Export file type drop-down list to select Html or MDB as a
file format. If you want to create a self-executable file of the report, select Create a
self-executable file.

3. Select Attach File Limit, and decide the size limit of the attached file. Set the limit between 1 MB
and 10 MB.

4. Select one of these options to set the attachment condition.

 The attached files exceeding the size limit will not be sent: When the attached report file
exceeds the size limit, the e-mail will not be sent.

 The attached files are automatically split and sent out in multiple e-mails: If the
attached file exceeds the size limit, it will be automatically split and sent out in multiple
e-mails. Note this option cannot apply to the report files in .mdb format.

For details on setting Mail Server, see Setting Email Server in Chapter 1.

483
11.11.5 Playing Back Video Recordings

In a HTML format report, the video recordings can be played back with the Remote ViewLog function.
Ensure the Remote ViewLog Service is enabled on the GV-System that owns those recordings.

1. Open a report and click the desired video icon.

Video icon

Figure 11-71

2. If the Domain name from DDNS option on the Advanced Setting tab (Figure 11-63) is not
selected, this dialog box will appear.

Figure 11-72

3. Type the IP or domain name, ID and password of the GV-System, and then click Connect for
playback.

Figure 11-73

484
 11 Useful Utilities

4. You can change the play mode and create special effects on the video by right-clicking on the
playback window. For details on the playback window, see Single Player in Chapter 4.

11.11.6 Viewing Event Log

All Report Generator events are recorded to the event log. To view the event log, in the Report
Generator dialog box, click the Event Log tab. All events are displayed in descending order.

For the related settings of the event log, see Event Log Settings in Setting Up Report Generator earlier
in this chapter.

485
11.12 Spot Monitor Controller
GV-Combo Card (GV-1120 / 1280 / 1480) and GV-Combo A Card (GV-1120A / 1280A / 1480 A)
come equipped with a TV output allowing you to connect one spot monitor or TV monitor to the
computer. With the Spot Monitor Controller, you can define the screen divisions, set the channel
sequence of each scanned page and adjust video images on the additional monitor.

11.12.1 Spot Monitor Controller

To start the Spot Monitor Controller, follow these steps:

1. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, select DSP Spot Monitor,
and select Spot Monitor Setup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-74

2. Select Use DSP as Spot Monitor at next Startup, and click OK.
3. Restart the GV-System.
4. On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, select DSP Spot Monitor,
and select Spot Monitor Controller. The Spot Monitor Controller window appears.

Note: When the DSP Spot Monitor Control feature is enabled, DSP Overlay will be disabled in the
Main System.

486
 11 Useful Utilities

[Advanced Layout]

Figure 11-75

 Spot x: The drop-down list is available when the GV-System is equipped with two video capture
cards and connects two additional monitors. Select Spot 1 to configure the screen display on the
first monitor, and Spot 2 for the second monitor.

 DIV 1-16: Screen division option.

 Right Arrow button: Sets the channel sequence of each scanned page. Up to 16 scanned pages
can be configured. Click the button to display this dialog box.

Figure 11-76

 Screen Division: Displays the channel sequence. You can modify the sequence by typing
the number directly on each division.
 < > buttons: Navigate pages.
 Empty page: Clears up the channel sequence of the open page.

487
 [Video Setting]

Figure 11-77

[Spot X] See the same option in the Advanced Layout tab.

[Video Attribute] Select a desired camera from the drop-down list to adjust image attributes, such as

Brightness, Contrast, Hue and Saturation.

[Video Enable] Select the desired cameras for display on another monitor.

[Scan Setting] Enter the interval between the scanned pages. Select Auto if you want to

automatically scan the cameras or Manual to scan at your own speed.

488
 11 Useful Utilities

11.12.2 Spot Monitor Panel

With the Spot Monitor Panel, you can switch screen divisions and channels as well as starting and

stopping page scan immediately. On the Main System, click the TV-Out button . This panel
appears.

1 4

3
5
6

Figure 11-78

No. Name Description

Spot 1 is for screen display on the first monitor, and Spot 2 for that on the
1 Spot x
second monitor.

2 Scan Automatically or manually rotates channels and stops rotation.

3 Previous Page Goes to the pervious page of the scanned pages.

4 Next Page Goes to the next page of the scanned pages.

5 Exit Closes the Spot Monitor Panel.

7 Switch Opens or closes the channel menu.

8 Channel Menu Displays the desired channel for single view.

9 Screen Division Sets screen divisions to 1, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 16.

After single view, click this button to restore the first scanned page, but
10 Zoom Esc
restore the last channel when the screen division is set to 1.

489
11.13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller
The Controller integrates the GV-Multi Quad Card with TV monitor (spot monitor) applications. It
features:
 Up to 5 TV monitors can be controlled.
 TV Monitor 1 supports up to 16 screen divisions, and TV Monitor 2 to TV Monitor 5 support 1 and
4 divisions.
 Different screen divisions can be set up on each monitor.
 The channel sequence of screen divisions is user-defined.

Note:
1. This function is only supported in GV-Video Capture Cards with GV-Multi Quad Card, which
include GV-600A / 650A / 800A / 1120A / 1240A / GV-1480A.

2. The Controller does not support the videos from IP devices. To export videos from IP devices,
refer to the Digital Matrix section later in this chapter.

11.13.1 Setting the Controller

On the main screen, click the Configure button, select Accessories, and select Quad Spot Monitors
Setup. The TV Quad Setting dialog box appears.

 In the General Setting tab, you can modify Video Format and Video Attribute for all TV monitors.
 In the TV tabs (TV1 to TV5), you can set up the following configurations for each TV monitor.

Figure 11-79

490
 11 Useful Utilities

[Video Enable] Check or uncheck the desired channels displayed on monitor screen.

[Scan Setting]
 Interval: Enter the interval between the scanned pages. Set the time between 1 and 999
seconds.
 Scan by: Select Auto to scan the channels automatically or Manual to scan at your speed.

[Setting]
 Camera Popup: See Setting Pop-up Views below.
 TV Setting: Click the Setting button to display this dialog box.

Figure 11-80

Press the 4 direction buttons (U, L, R and D) to adjust the positions of the divisions on the monitor
screen.

To display the camera number on the TV monitor, check the Show Camera Number option. To
display the camera numbers on all connected TV monitors, check the Show Camera Number
option, and then click the finger button.

To change the color of the camera number indicator on the TV monitor, use the Color drop-down
list to select the desired color.

491
 [DIV 1-16] In the TV Quad Setting window (Figure 11-76), there are screen division options. You can
modify the channel sequence by typing the number directly on each division. Click OK or Apply
Current TV Setting to apply your configurations.
 Right Arrow Button: Sets the channel sequence of each scanned page. Click the arrow button
to display this dialog box.

Figure 11-81

 Screen Division: Displays the channel sequence. You can modify the sequence by typing the
number directly on each division.
 < > Buttons: Navigates pages.
 Empty page: Clears up the channel sequence on the open page.

492
 11 Useful Utilities

11.13.2 Setting Pop-up Views

The pop-up camera views on the screen notify users of the current event, whether it is motion or I/O
devices being triggered. You can decide to have pop-up cameras on computer screen, TV monitor or
both together.

Activating Pop-up Views

1. In the TV Quad Setting window, click the desired TV tab.
2. Click the Setting button of Camera Popup. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-82

3. Set the Dwell Time and Interrupt Interval.

 Dwell Time: Specify the amount of time a pop-up view remains on the monitor screen when
an event occurs. Set the dwell time between 1 and 120 seconds.
 Interrupt Interval: Specify the interval between pop-up views when events occur. Set the
time interval between 1 and 60 seconds.
4. To be alarmed with a pop-up view whenever movement occurs in the video image, select the
desired cameras to be popped up in the Camera Motion Invoke section.
5. To be alarmed with a pop-up view when input devices are triggered, select input module and use
the drop-down list to select the desired camera to be popped up.
6. Click OK to apply the settings.

Tip: All cameras can be repetitively setup on different TV monitors. If one camera is selected on
more than one TV monitors, it can be set with different alert events.

493
11.13.3 Displaying TV Quad Panel

On the main screen, click the TV-Out button . This panel will appear.
1

5
6
2 8
7
3
9

10

Figure 11-83

No. Name Description

1 Monitor Selects the monitor to be controlled.

2 Scan Automatically or manually rotates channels, and stops rotation.

Sets screen divisions. Only TV 1 can support screen divisions up to 16,

3 Screen Division
and TV 2 to TV 5 supports 1 or 4 screen divisions.

4 Channel Menu Displays the desired channel for single view.

5 Exit Closes the TV Quad Panel.

6 Previous Page Scans the previous page.

7 Next Page Scans the next page.

8 Settings Displays the TV Quad Setting window.

9 Switch Displays or hides the channel menu.

After single view, click this button to return to the first scanned page or
10 Zoom Esc
return to the last channel when the screen division is set to 1.

Note: If the DSP Spot Monitor function is enabled at the same time with the Quad Spot Monitors, the
TV-Out button has two options: Spot Monitor Panel and TV Quad Panel. Select the desired panel to
be displayed on the screen.

494
 11 Useful Utilities

11.14 Digital Matrix

To create more screen space to display multiple channels, such as 32 channels, Digital Matrix is thus
introduced to provide a way to view and manage up to 8 monitor displays.

The monitor of the computer where you configure the settings and control is called the “primary
monitor” and up to 7 additional monitors can be connected with. Additional graphics cards are required
to install multiple monitors. Most graphics cards now support dual monitors at least. To connect up to 8
monitors, you may need 4 graphics cards installed in the computer of GV-System.

The Digital Matrix includes these features:

 Live view: You can set different live views and screen divisions for each monitor.
 Automatic channel scan: You can set up to 16 scanned pages with different screen divisions and
channels for each monitor.
 Pop-up Alert: You can be alerted by pop-up live videos when motion is detected or I/O devices
are triggered.

495
11.14.1 Activating Multiple Monitors

Use Windows Display Properties to activate multiple monitors. Here we use Windows 7 to illustrate
the steps of configuration.

1. Go to Control Panel, click Appearance and Personalization, click Display and select Change
display settings. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-84

2. Click the Display list. If you do not see multiple monitors listed, check if your additional monitors
are connected with the computer properly. The icon of the primary monitor has start menu on its
bottom left side.

3. Select additional monitors from the list, and select Extend these displays for every additional
monitor.

4. Click Identify. Windows 7 displays a large white number on every monitor to identify your monitors.
Drag and drop the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors.

5. Click OK.

6. Start the GV-System, click Configure, click Accessories, select Digital Matrix Setting, select
monitors from the Display list and select Activate for each monitor. For example, if you install 7
additional monitors, you need to activate Display 1 to Display 7 one by one.

7. Click Apply. Your additional monitors should now display the channels seen on the primary
monitor.

496
 11 Useful Utilities

11.14.2 Setting Live View

You can set different live views and screen divisions for each monitor.

1. On the main screen, click Configure, click Accessories, and select Digital Matrix Setting. This
dialog box appears.

Figure 11-85

2. Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured.

3. Select Screen Division.

4. Drag and drop the camera numbers to the desired positions on the divisions. To clear the
assignment, drag and drop the “C” icon to that position.

5. Select Live Mode.

6. Repeat above steps to configure other monitors.

7. Click OK to apply the settings.

497
11.14.3 Setting Scanned Pages

You can set up to 16 scanned pages with different screen divisions and channels for each monitor.

1. Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured.

2. In the upper-left column, expand the Matrix folder tree, and then click Page 1. This page appears.

Figure 11-86

3. Select Activate Page 1 Scan.

4. Select Screen Division.

5. Drag and drop the camera numbers to the desired positions on the divisions. To clear the
assignment, drag and drop the “C” icon to that position.

6. Specify Dwell Time for how long this scanned page remains on the monitor.

7. Repeat Steps 2 to 5 to configure more scanned pages for the specific monitor.

8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to configure scanned pages for other monitors.

9. In the upper-left column, click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11-85.

10. Select Auto Scan.

11. Click OK to start scanning among pages.

498
 11 Useful Utilities

11.14.4 Setting Pop-up Alert

You can be alerted by pop-up live videos when motion is detected or I/O devices are triggered.

1. Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured.

2. In the upper-left column, click Event Popup. This page appears.

Figure 11-87

 Motion Trigger: The live video of selected cameras pops up when motion is detected.

 I/O Trigger: The live video of assigned camera pops up when the selected input device is
triggered.

 Popup Dwell Time: Specify the amount of time that a pop-up live video remains in the
foreground.

 Popup Interruption Interval: Specify the interval between camera pop-ups. This option is
useful when several cameras are activated for pop-up alert at the same time.

3. Use the Display list to select other monitors for setup.

4. After above settings, click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11-85.

5. Select Event Popup Mode. Then select Fixed Position of Camera or Random Position of
Camera. For these two options, see Setting Pop-up Positions section below.

6. Click OK.

7. Start monitoring. When motion is detected or the input device is triggered, the live video will pop
up for alert.

499
 Setting Pop-up Positions
When you select Random Position of Camera, you can decide the positions for pop-up cameras.

 Fixed Position of Camera: The cameras pop up in their assigned positions. To assign positions,
select Screen Division. Then drag and drop the cameras number to the desired potions on the
divisions.

 Random Position of Camera: The positions of pop-up cameras are based on the sequence order
of triggers. There are two modes for this position:

1. Cascade Mode: This mode can avoid the same cameras popping up on different monitors.
This is suggested to be used when multiple monitors are placed close to each other.

Example:

Camera 1, Camera 2, Camera 3, Camera 4 and Camera 5 are assigned for alert popup on
both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. Monitor 1 is set at 4 screen divisions. When the five cameras
are triggered at same time, the first 4 cameras show up on Monitor 1 and the 5th on Monitor
2.

1 2 5

3 4

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

2. Parallel Mode: This mode allows the same cameras simultaneously pop up on different
monitors. This is suggested to be used when multiple monitors are placed in separate rooms.

Example:

Camera 1, Camera 2, Camera 3 and Camera 4 are assigned for pop-up upon motion
detection on both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. When the four cameras are triggered at the same
time, they will show up simultaneously on both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2.

1 2 1 2

3 4 3 4

Monitor 1 Monitor 2

500
 11 Useful Utilities

11.14.5 Setting Live View with Pop-up Alert

You can set a different live view mode with pop-up alert together for each monitor. When alert events
occur, the live video of the associated camera will pop up on the assigned monitor to replace its live
view mode.

1. To configure live view mode, follow the instructions in Setting Live View earlier in this chapter.

2. To configure pop-up alert, in the upper left column, click Event Popup. Figure 11-85 appears.

3. Configure Motion Trigger, I/O Trigger, Popup Dwell Time and Popup Interruption Interval for
each monitor. For details see Setting Pop-up Alert earlier in this chapter.

4. Click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11-85. Ensure the Live Mode option is selected.

5. Click OK. The live view mode you configured for each monitor is displayed.

6. Start monitoring. When alert events occur, the associated camera will pop up on the desired
monitor.

501
11.14.6 Controlling Screen Display

During Digital Matrix operations of page scan or alert popup on other monitors, you can instantly
suspend the predefined task on a monitor, and change its screen divisions or remain on specific
channels when you spot suspicious events.

1. On the main screen, click ViewLog and select Digital Matrix Channel Lock. This dialog box
appears.

Figure 11-88

2. Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured.

3. Select Lock Channel at Display to control the specific monitor.

4. Select one of the three options:

 Pause Event Popup or Page Scan: Suspends alert popup and page scan operations.

 Drag and Drop Camera No. to the Screen Division: Displays desired camera channels.
Use the Division list to select the screen divisions. Drag and drop the camera numbers to the
desired positions on the divisions. To clear the assignment, drag and drop the “C” icon to that
position.

 Go to Defined Page: Displays a specific scan page.

5. Click Apply or OK to apply the settings.

502
 11 Useful Utilities

11.15 GIS Recording

GV-System can record the video along with GPS data of its own and the connected IP devices. With
the recorded GPS data, you can view the recordings simultaneously with the GPS locations of
GV-System and connected IP devices on Google Maps, Microsoft Virtual Earth, OpenStreetMap or
self-defined maps.

If you are the user of GV-GIS monitoring station, the GPS data collected from either GV-System or
from connected IP devices can also be sent to the GV-GIS for central monitoring.

11.15.1 Setting the GPS Receiver

To record the GPS location data of GV-System, GV-GPS USB Receiver is required to connect to the
local computer. Also, you need to run the GeoGISClient program in the background to receive the
GPS data from the GPS receiver.

1. Run GeoGISClient.exe from the GV folder. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-89

2. To add the GPS receiver to the GV-System, click the button and click the GPS Receiver tab.
This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-90

503
 3. Select the COM Port the GPS receiver is connected to and click Test to detect the device. Select
Baud Rate of the GPS receiver (refer to the documentation of the GPS receiver). Specify the
time in seconds for the frequency to update the GPS data. Then click OK.

4. Click the button to start receiving GPS data from the GPS receiver.

11.15.2 Recording GPS Locations of GV-System

After configuring the GPS receiver on GV-System as mentioned earlier, you can enable the GIS
function to record videos with GPS locations of GV-System.

1. To enable the GIS function of GV-System, click the Configure button on the main screen, select
Accessories and select Enable Local GIS.

2. Start monitoring. The GPS data of GV-System will be recorded with the video.

504
 11 Useful Utilities

11.15.3 Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device

If the connected IP device is also equipped with and enabled for the GPS function, you can choose to
record videos with GPS locations of the IP device.

1. To record the GPS data of a remote IP device, ensure the GPS function on the IP device is
enabled.

2. Right-click the IP device listed on the IP Device Setup window and select GIS Setting.

3. Select Enable GIS Data to receive the GPS data from the IP device.

Figure 11-91

4. To enable the GIS function of GV-System, click the Configure button on the main screen, select
Accessories and select Enable Local GIS.

5. Start monitoring. The GPS data of the IP device will be recorded with its own video.

Note:

1. If the GIS function of GV-System is not enabled at Step 4, the GPS data of the IP device will not
be recorded on GV-System.

2. If the remote GIS function of the IP device is not enabled at Step 3, the video of the IP device
will be recorded with the GPS data of GV-System, instead of the GPS data of the IP device.

505
11.15.4 Viewing GPS Locations during Playback

To play back the recorded GPS locations with videos, follow the steps below.

1. On the ViewLog window, click the Tools button and click Select Map API to select a map API
(Application Program Interface). This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-92

2. Under Please Select a Map API, select a Map API.

3. To play back GPS data, click the Tools button and select Display GIS Window. The first-time
user will be prompted for a License Agreement. Read through the license terms before you click I
understand and agree to continue.

4. Select the events with GPS data from the Video Event list, select the desired video mode, and
click the Play button to start.

Figure 11-93

506
 11 Useful Utilities

Note:

1. If you like to use the maps created yourself, overwrite the files at

:\GV folder\GIShtm-User, and select User Defined from the “Please Select a Map API”
drop-down list (Figure 11-92).

2. If you are the paid-client of Google Maps, select Client from the “Please enter the map
authorization key or license key” drop-down list; otherwise select Key.

507
11.15.5 Sending GPS Data to the GV-GIS

You can configure up to 4 GV-GIS stations to receive the GPS data of the GV-System and connected
IP devices simultaneously.

Sending Only GPS Data of the GV-System

To send only GPS data of GV-System to the GV-GIS station, follow the steps below. On the GV-GIS
station, a Mobile Host account for GV-System needs to be created first.

1. To allow the remote access from GV-GIS to GV-System, enable Control Center Server from the
Network button on the main screen.

2. Click the button on the GV-GIS Client window (Figure 11-89). This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-94

3. In the GPS Data Source Selection section, select GPS Receiver.

4. In the Connection Information section, type the IP address of GV-GIS. Keep the default port value
of 3356, or modify it if necessary.

5. In the Account for GPS Receiver to Connect GV-GIS Server section, type login ID and password
already created on GV-GIS for GV-System.

6. Click OK.

508
 11 Useful Utilities

7. To create connection to other GV-GIS stations, double-click # 2 to # 4 columns on the GV-GIS

Client window and configure the connection information by following above steps.

8. To start connecting to GV-GIS, click the button. The GPS data of GV-System will be sent to
GV-GIS.

Sending GPS Data of both GV-System and Connected IP Devices

You can not only send the GPS data of GV-System to the GV-GIS station, but also those of connected
IP devices. On the GV-GIS station, the Mobile Host accounts for GV-System and IP devices need to
be created individually in advance.

1. To allow the remote access from GV-GIS to GV-System, enable Control Center Server from the
Network button on the main screen.

2. Ensure Enable GIS Data is enabled for desired IP devices to receive the GPS data from those IP
devices (Figure 11-91).

3. Click the button on the GV-GIS Client window (Figure 11-89). This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-95

4. In the GPS Data Source Selection section, select IP Device.

5. In the Connection Information section, type the IP address of GV-GIS. Keep the default port value
of 3356, or modify it if necessary.

509
 6. In the Account for GPS Receiver to connect GV-GIS Server section, type login ID and password
created on GV-GIS for the GV-System.

7. In the Account for IP Device to connect GV-GIS Server section, select desired IP cameras and
type their separate login IDs and passwords created on GV-GIS.

8. Click OK. The Connection(s) column on the GV-GIS Client window will display the total number
of to-be-connected devices which includes one GV-System and the number of connected IP
cameras.

9. To create connection to other GV-GIS stations, double-click # 2 to # 4 columns on the GV-GIS

Client window and configure the connection information by following above steps.

10. To start connecting to GV-GIS, click the button. The GPS data of GV-System and connected
IP devices will be sent to GV-GIS.

510
 11 Useful Utilities

11.16 GV-IP Device Utility

The GV-IP Device Utility can detect GV-IP Devices in the LAN and allows you to quickly set the IP
address of the device, upgrade firmware, export/import device settings and reboot the device. In
addition, with the Utility, you can map IP cameras to the channels of GV-System, and export and
import the camera mapping settings.

11.16.1 Installing GV-IP Device Utility

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer. It runs automatically, and a window appears.

2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.

3. Select GV IP Device Utility, and follow the on-screen instructions.

You can also download GV-IP Device Utility from GeoVision Website

511
11.16.2 The GV-IP Device Utility Window

To start the GV-IP Device Utility, go to Windows Start, point to Programs, select GV IP Device Utility,
and then run GV IP Device Utility. The window below appears and automatically searches for any
GV-IP Device under LAN.
6
1 2 3 4 5 7

Figure 11-96
The controls in the window:

No. Name Description

1 Search Searches for available GV-IP Devices under LAN.

Automatically assigns unused IP addresses on the LAN to the IP

2 Auto Set IP Address
addresses with the same ID and Password.

Adds an IP device to the list or import an excel file to add multiple IP

3 Add devices. A template of the excel file is located in the folder where GV-IP
Device Utility is installed.

4 Delete Deletes the IP device from the list.

5 Configure Specifies the network adaptor.

 Configure: Specifies the network adaptor.

6 Tool (on the menu bar)  Temperature Monitor: Select the temperature unit and specify the
temperature

7 IP Address Directs to the Web interface of the IP address.

512
 11 Useful Utilities

11.16.3 Setting GV-IP Devices

Double-click a GV-IP device on the list to open the setting dialog box. Click the different tabs described
below to configure the settings. Before you change any settings, you will be prompt to enter the
username and password of the device.

Figure 11-97

[Set IP Address] Type the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS server of the device.
You can also customize the HTTP port and VSS port.

[Firmware Upgrade] To upgrade the firmware of the device, click Browse to specify the path of the
firmware file and click Upgrade to proceed. You can select Upgrade all devices to upgrade all other
devices of the same username and password.

[Device Name] Type a name for the device.

[Export settings] Click Browse to specify a path. Click the Export Settings button to export the
device settings.

[Import Settings] Specify the location of the file to import camera settings to a device. If Upgrade all
devices is selected, the settings will apply to all other devices of the same username and password l.
You can select Password settings and Network settings to also import the password and network
settings.

[Camera Adjustment] You can access the live view, change basic camera settings and focus value.

[Other Settings] Click Reboot to reboot the device. Click Load default to load the default settings.
Click Sync time with PC to synchronize the date and time of the device with those of the local
computer. Click Change Password to change the password of the device. You can select Sync all
devices to apply the same settings to all other devices of the same username and password.

513
11.16.4 Setting GV-POE Switch

The GV-IP Device Utility allows you to quickly access multiple GV-POE Switches in the LAN for
configuration. Currently, only the GV-POE0801 / 1601 / 2401 of Firmware V1.02 are supported.

1. Click the IP address of desired GV-POE Switch to display the available settings.

Figure 11-98
2. To access the Web interface of the switch, click Web Page.
3. To set up the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway of the switch, click Set IP Address.
4. To access the port connection status, click Configure. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-99

514
 11 Useful Utilities

5. To enable the POE function for the connected GV-IP Device, click the check box in the POE
column.
6. Click Refresh to retrieve the port information and Apply to allow the settings to take effect.

Note: If a new GV-IP Device is connected with the GV-POE Switch, you must close this dialog box
and click the Search button to update the port connection status.

11.16.5 Mapping IP Cameras

You can map IP cameras to the channels of GV-System by using the GV-IP Device Utility. Click the
NVR Camera Settings tab on the GV-IP Device Utility window and the following window appears:

2 4
1 3 5

Figure 11-100

No. Name Description

1 Add Adds a new tab to create another set of IP camera settings.

2 Delete Deletes the selected tab.

3 Delete Selection Deletes the selected IP camera from the Dispatch Pattern section.

4 Clear All Clears all IP cameras in the selected tab.

5 Export Exports the IP camera mapping settings.

515
 To map IP cameras to the channels of GV-System:
1. Drag one or multiple IP devices from the Camera List to the desired camera channels in the
Dispatch Pattern section.
2. By default, the login username and password for the IP camera both are set to admin. If the
added IP camera does not use the default settings, you need to right-click the IP camera in the
Dispatch Pattern section and select Login User Information to modify its logon information.
3. You can use the Export button to export the IP camera mapping settings and then import the
settings back into the Main System. See Camera Mapping Using GV-IP Device Utility in Chapter
2.

11.17 MCamCtrl Utility for GV-Joystick V2

The MCamCtrl Utility is an independent application that allows you to control GV-PTZ Camera, GV-PT
Camera, GV-IP Speed Dome, and any PTZ camera connected to GV-Video Server and GV-Compact
DVR using a GV-Joystick V2, a plug-and play device which is used to pan, tilt, zoom and focus a PTZ
camera.

Connect the GV-Joystick V2 directly to the GV-System and run the MCamCtrl Utility at the background,
you can remotely control the PTZ movement. For details on setting up the GV-Joystick V2, see
GV-Joystick V2 User’s Manual.

Note:

1. The GV-Joystick V2 is supported in GV-System V8.5.9.0 or later. Up to 8 GV-Joystick V2 can

be connected.

2. The GV-Joystick V2 can work in conjunction with GV-Keyboard V3 to empower the operation of
GV applications. For details, see GV-Keyboard V3 User’s Manual.

11.17.1 Installing MCamCtrl Utility

To install the MCamCtrl Utility on the computer connected with a GV-Joystick V2:

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer.

2. In the main menu, click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.

3. Select GV-MCamCtrl Utility, and follow the on-screen instructions for installation.

516
 11 Useful Utilities

11.17.2 Starting the MCamCtrl Utility

1. Go to Windows Start, point to Programs, select MCamCtrl, and then run MCamCtrl. The
MCamCtrl dialog box appears.

Figure 11-101
2. In the Device field, select the port connecting to the GV-Joystick V2.

Note: If you can not find the GeoVision Joystick option, make sure your GV-Joystick device is
properly connected and then click the Refresh button from Keyboard & Joystick controller dialog box
to scan for the device again.

3. Leave both ID and Name fields blank.

4. In the Startup Type field, select Manual or Automatic to run MCamCtrl at next startup.

5. To adjust the speed of GV-Joystick V2, use the slide bar in the PTZ Maximum Speed field.

6. To customize the functional keys on the GV-Joystick V2, see Application in GV-Joystick V2 User’s
Manual.
7. Click the Start Service button ► to start the service.

To begin controlling the PTZ movement with GV-Joystick V2, and keep the MCamCtrl Utility running in
the background.

517
 11.18 GV-Mobile Server
GV-Mobile Server is an application that can encode up to 32 video channels and allows live view
access from GV-IP Decoder Box, GV-Pad and mobile devices including Android Smartphone, iPad,
iPhone and iPod Touch. Third-party surveillance software can also access video channels from
GV-Mobile Server through RTSP.

For more details, refer to the GV-Mobile Server User Manual on the Software DVD.

518
 11 Useful Utilities

11.19 Language Setting

11.19.1 MultiLang Tool for Translated Text

The user interface has been translated from English into 30 other languages. If you find the translation
to be unsuitable and would like to correct it, you can use the MultiLang Tool to revise the translation.
Next, you can apply the revised text to the applications and export a MRevise.exe file to make the
same revision on another computer. You can also send the revision back to GeoVision to have the
revision included in future software releases.

Note: When using the MultiLang Tool, it is recommended to revise an entire sentence at a time
instead of simply searching a single word and replacing the word in all other strings.

To revise the translated text:

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer. It runs automatically, and a window appears.
2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities.
3. Select GV-MultiLang Tool and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Close all GeoVision applications first and then double-click MultilingualConfig.exe. This dialog
box appears.

Figure 11-102
5. Click Language and select the language of the text you want to revise.

519
 6. Click Version to select the version of the Main System that you want to revise.
7. In the Search field, type all or part of the text in English or the target language and click Search.

Figure 11-103

Note:
1. The search is case sensitive.
2. Before making any revision, click Tools and select Revision Note to read the revision
instructions.

8. Double-click the text you want to revise. This dialog box appears.

Figure 11-104

9. Revise the translated text and click OK.

520
 11 Useful Utilities

Tip: The text may contain symbols such as %d or \n that instruct the application to perform certain
functions. Be careful not to change the symbols in the translated text.

To apply the revised text:

1. To apply the revised translation to the applications, click Save. For the following applications, the
system will automatically locate the corresponding files on your computer and replace with the
revised translation.
 GV-System
 Remote ViewLog
 Fast Backup and Restore (FBR)
 GV-IP Device Utility
 Multi View
 Remote E-Map
 Center V2
 Vital Sign Monitor
 Dispatch Server
 GV-GIS
 MCamCtrl Utility
 POS Text Sender
 Authentication Server
 SMS Server
 Audio Broadcast
 Multicast
 TwinDVR System
 Bandwidth Control Client Site
 Backup Viewer
 Mobile Server

521
 2. After applying the revision, a dialog box appears to show which applications have been revised.
Click OK.

Figure 11-105
3. The message “Do you want to apply the revised multilingual texts to another folder?” appears. If
the storage path for the application has been changed or if the associated application is not listed
in the dialog box, click Yes and select the folder of the application.

To export or send the revised text:

1. To export the revision as an executable file, click Tools, Export and Export executable file. You
can copy the .exe file to another computer and apply the same translation revision by running
the .exe file.
2. To report the translation revision back to GeoVision,

 If your default mail client is Outlook, Outlook Express or Mozilla Thunderbird, click Tools,
Export and Send Report to send the revision.

 If your default mail client is not set up or supported, click Tools, Export and Export text file,
and email the exported text file to [email protected].

3. For the distributors to duplicate Software DVD with the translation revision,

 Copy and paste all the contents of Software DVD to your computer.
 Export the revised translation file and rename the file as MRevise.exe.

 Move MRevise.exe to the location you saved the contents of Software

DVD :\Software\Translation Revision.
 Duplicate the Software DVD with the MRevise.exe file.

 Test the Software DVD by clicking 10. Import Translation Revision from the Install Program
window to apply the translation revision.

522
 11 Useful Utilities

11.19.2 SetLanguage Tool to Set UI Language

The default user interface (UI) language of the following GV-software and applications is set according
to the region detected. You can install the Set Language tool to set the UI language to English.

 GV-System
 GV-Fast Backup and Restore Multicam System
 ViewLog / EZViewLog
 GV-Remote ViewLog
 GV-POS Text Sender
 GV-IP Device Utility
 GV-Center V2
 GV-Vital Sign Monitor
 GV-Dispatch Server
 GV-Control Center
 GV-Remote E-Map
 CMS Lite

To install the Set Language tool:

1. Insert the Software DVD to your computer. It runs automatically, and a window appears.

2. Click Install GeoVision Supplemental Utilities, select GV-SetLanguage and follow the
on-screen instructions.

3. After completing the installation, close all Geovision software or applications.

4. At the Start menu, Select SetLanguage.

5. When the Configure window appears, use the Language drop-down list to select English.

Figure 11-106

6. Click OK and restart your GV-software or application to enable English UI.

523
 Appendix .....................................................537
A. USB Dongle Required for IP Device Applications............................................... 537
B. Supported PTZ Protocols and Models .................................................................... 538
C. Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking ............................................................ 540
D. Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan and Tilt Control ...................... 541
E. Supported IP Device Brands and Protocols.......................................................... 542
F. Supported GPRS Models .............................................................................................. 543
G. Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View ........................................................... 544
H. Display Ratio Supported by Panel Resolution ..................................................... 545

536
Appendix

A. USB Dongle Required for IP Device

Applications
Solution Application USB Dongle
GV-Hybrid Connection of 3rd party IP devices
NVR Dongle
DVR to GV-System
GV-NVR Connection of 3rd party IP devices to GV-NVR NVR Dongle
Connection of GV-IP Devices
GV-Center V2 No extra dongle required
to Center V2
rd
Note: Currently, GV-Center V2 does not support the connection with 3 party IP devices.

537
B. Supported PTZ Protocols and Models
Note that GV-System only supports original factory models. Other brands of cameras claiming of the
same protocol compatibility may not work properly with GV-System. GeoVision takes no responsibility
of such incompatibility.

PTZ Model and Protocol

AcutVista (SSD-7971D)
Ademco (Jupiter)
Bosch (G3)
Bosch (TC700 / 8560)
Canon (VCC4 / VCC5i)
CBC GANZ (ZC-S120 Series)
Chiper (CPT-V9KRV)
COP (15-CD53W) - Pelco D
COP (15-CD55TW) - Pelco D
COP (15-CD55W) - Pelco D
COP (CD55X) - Pelco D
Direct Perception (PTU Series)
D-max Dome
DongYang Dome (DOH-240)
DynaColor (D-7720 / 7722)
DynaColor Dome
Dynacolor (DynaHawk-ZH701)
ELBEX (Matrix / 1000)
Elmo (PTC-200C)
Elmo (PTC-400C)
Elmo (PTC-1000)
EverFocus (EPTZ 1000 / 500)
Eyeview T-Power (T2-SA27)
GKB (SPD-221)
HiSharp - Pelco D
HiSharp - Pelco P
JEC Dome
JVC (TK-S576B / S655 / C686E)
Kalatel CyberDome
Kampro Technology (K-ZC23)

538
 Appendix

KenKo (DMP23-H1)
LG (LPT-OS553HQ)
Lilin (PIH) – MLP1
Lilin (PIH-7625) – MLP1
Lilin (PIH-820) – MLP1
MESSOA (SDS600 Series)
MESSOA (D-700 Series)
Minking Dome
Mintron (54G2AHN / P)
NanWang (NVD 2300PNT)
NanWang V4.1 (NVD 2300PNT)
Panasonic (WV-CS850)
Panasonic (WV-CW960)
Pelco Dome
Pelco (Spectra III)
Pelco Spetra Mini Dome (SD4-WO)
Pishion (22X)
PTZ in I/O
RX214D
SAE (DR-E588)
Samsung (SCC-641 / 643)
Samsung (SPD-1600)
Samsung (SPD-3300)
Sensormatic (Ultra IV)
Sony (EVI-D100)
StorVision PTZ
TOA (CC551)
VDI (CT-58SPD)
VIDO.AT Dome
YAAN Dome
360 Vision (ViD-18COP04) - Pelco P

539
C. Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking
The PTZ models listed below are tested and certified by GeoVision for their compatibility with the
Object Tracking function.

Dual-Camera Tracking (Object Tracking and Zooming)

Brand / Model
AcutVista (SSD-7971D)
Dynacolor (DynaHawk Zh701)
GeoVision (GV-SD010 Series, GV-SD220 Series, GV-PTZ010D)
Messoa (SDS600 Series)
Messoa (D-700 Series)
Pelco (Spectra III)
Sensormatic (Ultra IV)
VIDO. AT Dome

Advanced Single Camera Tracking

Brand / Model
AcutVista (SSD-7971D)
COP (15-CD55W) - Pelco D
GeoVision (GV-SD010 Series, GV-SD200 Series , GV-SD220 Series, GV-PTZ010D)
Lilin (PIH-7625) – MLP1
Messoa (D-700 Series)
Pelco (Spectra III)
VIDO.AT Dome

540
 Appendix

D. Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan

and Tilt Control

Slope and Random Random Mode Support

Brand / Model
Modes Support Only
AcutVista (SSD-7971D) √
Bosch (G3) √
COP (15-CD53W) - Pelco D √
COP (15-CD55TW) - Pelco D √
COP (15-CD55W) - Pelco D √
COP (CD55X) - Pelco D √
Dynacolor (Dynahawk-Zh701) √
Dynacolor Dome √
D-max Dome √
GeoVision (GV-IP Speed Dome) √
JVC (S655 / TK-C686E / TK-S576B) √
Lilin (PIH-7625) – MLP1 √
Lilin PIH – MLP1 √
Lilin (PIH-820) – MLP1 √
Messoa (SDS600 Series) √
Messoa (D-700 Series) √
Pelco D √
Pelco P √
Pelco Spetra Mini Dome (SD4-W0) √
Pelco (Spectra III) √
Samsung (SCC-641 / SCC-643) √
StorVision √
VDI (CT-58SPD) √
VIDO AT Dome √

541
E. Supported IP Device Brands and Protocols
This list provides the supported IP device brands. For detailed information on the supported IP devices,
refer to Supported IP Camera List on GeoVision’s Website

IP Devices
GeoVision
ACTi
Arecont Vision
AXIS
Bosch
Canon
CNB
D-Link
Etrovision
Hikvision
HUNT
IQinVision
JVC
LG
Messoa
MOBOTIX
Panasonic
Pelco
Samsung
Sanyo
SONY
UDP
Verint
VIVOTEK
Protocols
ONVIF
PSIA
RTSP

542
 Appendix

F. Supported GPRS Models

Brand Model
Round Solutions TER-GX series
Wavecom Multiband 900E 1800 GSM Modem

543
G. Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View
This chart lists all the default icons with their filenames as a reference for users who wish to replace
icons on the Multi View window. To replace an icon on the Multi View window, simply rename your
custom icon name to one of relevant icon name listed below.

DVR Size Icon Default Host Size Icon

dvr16.bmp 16x16 addrbook_defaulthost.bmp 22x22
dvr24.bmp 24x24
addrbook_dvr16.bmp 16x16 Authentication Host Size Icon
addrbook_dvr22.bmp 22x22 addrbook_authsvrgrouop.bmp 22x22

GV-Video Server Size Icon Multiple Host Size Icon

VS16.bmp 16x16 addrbook_host16.bmp 16x16
VS24.bmp 24x24 addrbook_host22.bmp 22x22
addrbook_vs16.bmp 16x16
addrbook_vs22.bmp 22x22 Group Size Icon
addrbook_group16.bmp 16x16
GV-IPCAM Size Icon addrbook_group22.bmp 22x22
ipcam16.bmp 16x16
ipcam24.bmp 24x24 Camera Size Icon
addrbook_ipcam16.bmp 16x16 addrbook_camera.bmp 22x22
addrbook_ipcam22.bmp 22x22
Off-host Size Icon
GV-Compact DVR Size Icon addrbook_webcamoffhost.bmp 22x22
compactdvr16.bmp 16x16
compactdvr24.bmp 24x24
addrbook_compactdvr16.bmp 16x16
addrbook_compactdvr22.bmp 22x22

GV-Video Gateway Size Icon

videogateway16.bmp 16x16
videogateway24.bmp 24x24
addrbook_videogateway16.bmp 16x16
addrbook_videogateway22.bmp 22x22

544
 Appendix

H. Display Ratio Supported by Panel Resolution

The display ratio supported by each types of panel resolution is listed below:

Panel Resolution Supported Display Ratio

800 x 600 4:3
1024 x 768 4:3
1280 x 1024 5:4
1680 x 1050 16:10
1600 x 1200 4:3
1920 x 1200 16:10
1280 x 800 16:10
1920 x 1080 16:9
1440 x 900 16:10
3840 x 2160 16:9

545